Home

VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual

1. LA PATa eae BNC Female to Female BNC T connector 103 0028 00 103 0030 00 M Connect to CH4 for trigger Figure 2 4 Connecting the Sync Pickoff to the instrument VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 3 Operating Basics To achieve the best frequency response and multiburst measurements connect the 75 Q terminator as close to the platform s input connector as possible as shown in the Figure 2 5 VM5000 Signal source Tektronix MTX100 S000 Set top box olho BNC T J 9 S Modulator S a connector YG PyB PyR HP St f 15H cnal CH4 Sync YIG P B P R Pickoff IO BNC T connector 75 Q Termination Figure 2 5 Connection of 3 wire video with composite sync Setup 1 NOTE Verify that the trigger channel is set to channel 4 the default setting If the trigger setting Configuration gt Operation is not set to channel 4 you will see signal warning messages and will be unable to take measurements 2 4 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com O
2. VM5000 red pre O TG700 with A gt e 75 Q Termination AWVG7 module D CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 m BNC T connector oe Gils O O CH3 CH2 CHI Figure B 4 Noise floor accuracy test hookup 2 Start the VM5000 application File gt Applications gt VM5000 3 Select File gt Recall Default 4 Select Configuration gt Format and select RGB Color Space VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 11 Appendix B Performance Verification Check Channel Delay Match er rn p 11 12 13 Select Configuration gt Measurements Select the Noise check box and deselect the Color Bars check box Select Configuration gt Operation and select Channel 4 as the trigger Select Results gt Noise Select Unweighted BW in the Filter area Adjust the Bandwidth Hz setting to 30 0 MHz Change the Averages setting to 64 Select the VM5000 Run button The Noise measurement results table should appear with continuously updating measurements Check that the noise measurement dB values are greater than 76 dB for all three channels For example a 78 dB reading passes A 74 dB reading fails This check verifies the delay match between the VM5000 CH1 CH2 and CH3 measurement channels Delay match error affects Ch Ch Skew measurement accuracy The specification for delay match error between any two channels is less than 1 ns
3. e E eee eee eee 3 42 H Syne Measurement soirs Caninas eed oes hoe een oak ats be oes be soos eee es 3 43 H Sync Jitter Measurement esperan a eee 3 45 H Timing Measurement aya eraa EAEE EARE cece eee 3 46 Linearity Measurement asss aon cece cee E AE iS 3 48 Luma Levels Measurement s r aa eE A EAEE ccc eee ees 3 49 Noise Inj Ratio Measurement 0 eee ce eee eee 3 50 V Sync Measurement iss vcs saci tgs eed shes he een aaa bts be EE eee es 3 52 V Timing Measurement EEE EREA EE EEA EER 3 55 Video Transient Measurement 0 0c eee eee eee 3 56 Setting Up Measurements 0 cece eee c cece cee eeeeees 3 59 Taking Measurements 0 0 cece eee cee een e nen eens 3 59 Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference 0 0 00 ee eee 3 60 Creating a Custom Reference File 1 0 0 0 0c eee eee eee eee 3 62 Taking Measurements with Limit Testing 0 2 e eee eee 3 64 Customizing a Limits File 2 0 2 0 cee eee eee 3 66 ii VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Table of Contents Setting Up the Channel Delay Measurement 200002 eee Setting Up the Color Bars Measurement 0 c eee e eee eee Setting Up the Frequency Response Measurement 06 Setting Up the Multiburst Measurement 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee Setting Up the Noise Measurement 00 cece eee eee eee Setting Up the Noise Spectrum Me
4. GainError ppm 1 0E 06 Rm in Q VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First 9 Read This First Test D HV Input LF Mode DC Termination Accuracy and WB Mode DC Input Impedance 10 This test checks the accuracy of the 2 20 kQ termination that can be switched on in the HV LF Path Term On LED and the DC input impedance of the HV WB Path The specification for the LF Path termination is 2 20 kQ 1 5 The specification for the WB path DC input impedance is 2 20 kQ 3 0 The following equipment is required for the test m Host VM5000 with mouse and keyboard m Digital Multimeter m 50 Q BNC cable Qty 2 m BNC T adapter Qty 1 m BNC female to dual banana adapter Qty 2 1 Connect the MIU to the VM5000 apply power and establish communica tions using Hyperterminal as described in Test A of this procedure 2 Using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 0011000 to the MIU Verify that the H channel HV LF Path and Term On LEDs are illuminated The 8mA and 8 mA LEDs must be off 3 On the VM5000 front panel under VERTICAL select 1 MQ for CH4 4 Connect the two BNC to banana adapters to the multimeter one to the Ohms input the other to the Ohms Sense input Orient the adapters so the BNC shell is connected to the LO terminal of each input note on typical adapters the banana plug connected to the BNC shell has a GND label 5 Connect a BNC cable to each
5. Jitter peak peak aA as pixel clock period The H Sync Jitter is calculated for N consecutive lines of video frames N is entered by the user Half of the difference between the minimum and maximum is reported as the H Sync period jitter This value is also quantified as a percentage of the pixel clock period H Timing Measurement 3 46 The Horizontal Timing measurement consists of the following measurements the horizontal sync pulse the back porch the addressable video signal the front porch the left border and the right border VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information Back porch is the portion of the video signal that lies between the trailing edge of the horizontal sync pulse and the start of the active picture Border is the period during which a background colored border is displayed in order to allow the image to extend beyond the limits of the surrounding bezel on overscan type monitors The duration of the left border or the right border in the active video constitute one tenth of the total time Addressable video is the period during which active video image information is transmitted Front porch is the portion of the video signal between the end of the active picture and the leading edge of the horizontal sync Sync pulse width is the period of the active sync pulse Signal Source The test signal used for the H Timing measurement is Bl
6. SCHL EL HY EPP ESHEREE MHz Figure A 1 Graph of Immunity behavior A 18 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix A Specifications Option SD HD Tables A 11 and A 12 provide characteristics specific to Option SD HD Table A 11 Video measurement specifications Characteristic Color bar measurement accuracy Noise measurement Unweighted Weighted Noise floor Multiburst measurement Flag amplitude 1 MHz to 10 MHz packets 10 to 30 MHz packets Frequency readout VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Description 2 0 mV 1 5 Measurement of all 8 bar of reading levels displayed in abso lute mV values YPbPr or RGB formats Range and Accuracy 20 to 60 dB 1 dB Noise measurement band 30 MHz measurement width selectable 200 KHz bandwidth to 250 MHz Trigger on 60 to 70 dB 2 dB CH 4 required for measure ts below 60 dB 30 MHz measurement 30 MHz BW ae bandwidth 20 to 60 dB 1 dB Unified Weighting Filter Trigger on CH 4 required for measurements below 60 dB lt 76 dB 30 MHz noise Typical lt 80 dB 30 MHz bandwidth noise bandwidth 2 mV 1 5 of reading 0 5 dB Measurement relative to reference flag amplitude 0 75 dB 0 1 MHz Multiburst packet frequency is measured and displayed 60 to 70 dB 2 dB A 19 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780
7. If Limit testing is enabled you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for the supported combination of resolution refresh rate and timing standard VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 127 Viewing Measurement Results Select the min option to display the minimum limit values Select the max option to display the maximum limit values Refer to Figure 3 58 ee File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Sync 7 7 pue Measured Relative Reference Limits min Polarity P Line Humber Lo max Average 4 Figure 3 58 Limit values for the V Sync measurement In the Result panel of the V Sync measurement the parameters are different in the absence of MIU Displaying V Timing Measurement Results Option VGA Configure the V Timing measurements as explained in Setting Up the V Timing Measurement on page 3 95 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt V Timing Refer to Figure 3 59 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Timing Line Humbers e Average 1 dth Line Figure 3 59 V Timing measurement results 3 128 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot co
8. 99 Record the results in Table B 32 100 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Resolution should read 8 bit B 44 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Appendix B Performance Verification Table B 32 10 bit Linearity R Channel Level 3 of 4 Linearity Lower limit R Upper limit Resolution Bits 8 8 Max INL LSB 5 12 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 5 0 5 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes 101 From the TekScope application menu bar select Vertical gt Offset gt Select Ch3 gt enter 0 175 Volts in Offset box 102 From the TekScope application menu bar click the App software button 103 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement 104 Record the results in Table B 33 105 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Resolution should read 8 bit Table B 33 10 bit Linearity R Channel Level 4 of 4 Linearity Lower limit R Upper limit Resolution Bits 8 8 8 Max INL LSB 5 12 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 5 0 5 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes 106 Compute composite resolution If the Resolution bits value in Tables B 30 through B 33 is the same add 2 to the value and enter this value under Resolution Bits in Table B 34 If the value for Resolution bits is not the same for all
9. Table E 3 TG700 DNL analog signal format files Table E 4 TG700 DNL digital signal format files Table E 5 Available MXT100 trp signal setup files Table E 6 Advanced TV Elementary Streams Table E 7 Advanced TV Bitmaps Table E 8 Standard Definition TV Elementary Streams Table E 9 Standard Definition TV Bitmaps Table E 10 Available formats of DVD files VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual xi SSS La Preface This is the user manual for the VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set This manual focuses on the automatic video measurement functionality it does not cover the oscilloscope functionality Refer to Related Manuals and Online Documents to locate information about using the oscilloscope functionality About This Manual This manual is composed of the following chapters m Getting Started shows you how to configure and install your instrument and provides a functional check procedure m Operating Basics using a highly graphical approach walks you through the basics of using the instrument user interface m Reference goes into more detail on the menu functions understanding the measurements and interpreting your results m Appendices provides additional information including instrument specifica tions performance verification cleaning information and signal source descriptions VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement
10. amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Configuration Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits Setup And Or Run Run Mode Line Select Auto Scale amp Run Once Q Single Line T Enabled ES Continuously Multi Lines Bo Initial Values Configure Once amp end La E RGBHY MIU Sync Polarity Report Mode Las lled T Use MIU Md Auto Detect W Embed Screen Capture Restore Default Ez sal Exit Figure 2 12 Selection of the Use MIU option on the Configuration gt Operation tab Option VGA Setup 2 VGA Use this setup for testing PC and play out device video when it is not convenient Connector to 5X Cable to use the RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit To ensure accurate measure ments connect the signals to the VM5000 using the T connectors and precision terminations on CH1 CH4 You must use 75 ohm terminations on CH1 CH3 used for GBR and 2 21 KQ and 301 Q terminations on CH4 used for H Sync and V Sync measurements This method requires you to change the signal and termination connections on CH4 for certain horizontal and vertical measurements The VM5000 displays a dialog box prompting you to make these changes when necessary the RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit performs these connection and termination changes internally VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 9 Operating Basics To connect the DUT to the VM5000 using a 5X cable 1 Install the incl
11. H Timing Start Line Sets the start line number for the H Timing measurement Note the start line number should be less than or equal to the end line number End Line Sets the end line number for the H Timing measurement Note the end line number should be greater than or equal to the start line number Linearity Start Line Sets the start line number for the Linearity measurement Note the start line number should be less than or equal to the end line number End Line Sets the end line number for the Linearity measurement Note the end line number should be greater than or equal to the start line number Luma Levels Start Line Sets the end line number for the Luma Levels measurement Note the end line number should be greater than or equal to the start line number End Line Sets the end line number for the Luma Levels measurement Note the end line number should be greater than or equal to the start line number Video Transient Start Line Sets the end line number for the Video Transient measurement Note the end line number should be greater than or equal to the start line number End Line Sets the end line number for the Video Transient measurement Note the end line number should be greater than or equal to the start line number VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 15 Menu Descriptions Results Menu Option SD HD The Results menu enables you to display a summary of measurement results or display det
12. Taking Measurements with Limit Testing The procedure to take measurements with limit testing is 1 3 64 Option SD HD Select the appropriate format and the color space for the input signal or Option VGA Select the appropriate resolution the refresh rate and the timing standard for the input signal Select one or more measurements to take Set the measurement run operation Select Configuration gt Reference amp Limits VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements 5 Select Enable Limit Testing See Figure 3 12 or Figure 3 13 File Configuration Results Utilities Help Configuration Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits Picture amp Vector EJ Relative Result Display Limit Testing l Enable Relative Result Dis E Enable Limit Testing B Capture Results as Referente W Stop on Limit Testing Failure Configure Reference Selection Limits Selection Default Default EEEE Elect eferente File C Manual Select Limits File at rae Figure 3 12 Enabling limit testing Option SD HD 8 File Configuration Results Utilities Help Configuration Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits er Relative Result Display Limit Testing fi Enable Relativ sult Display d Enable Limit Testing OB Capture Results as Reference E on Limit Testing Failure Configure Reference Selection Limits
13. m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value Click the Dist BW MHz box to change the distortion bandwidth frequency This setting applies only to the RMS Distortion measurement Dist BW MHz 400 There are three ways to change the frequency m Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the frequency location When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the frequency location to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the Frequency Response measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the Multiburst Measurement Option SD HD To set up the Multiburst measurements select Results gt Multiburst to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that can be changed for the measurement For Multiburst you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change settings for the Multiburst measurements 1 Select Results gt Multiburst 2 To change the setting for Line Number click the Line Number box VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 73 Setting Up Measurements Line Humber a G There are three ways to change the number Turn the top knob on the front
14. 000005 Video rise fall time B Channel 000005 Video rise fall time R Channel 8 bit Linearity measurement results G channel 8 bit Linearity measurement results B channel 8 bit Linearity measurement results R channel 10 bit Linearity G Channel Level 1 of 4 10 bit Linearity G Channel Level 2 of 4 10 bit Linearity G Channel Level 3 of 4 10 bit Linearity G Channel Level 4 of 4 10 bit Linearity G Channel All Levels 10 bit Linearity B Channel Level l of 4 10 bit Linearity B Channel Level 2 of 4 10 bit Linearity B Channel Level 3 of 4 10 bit Linearity B Channel Level 4 of 4 10 bit Linearity B Channel All Levels 10 bit Linearity R Channel Level 1 of 4 10 bit Linearity R Channel Level 2 of 4 10 bit Linearity R Channel Level 3 of 4 10 bit Linearity R Channel Level 4of4 10 bit Linearity R Channel All Levels Table E 1 Signal Sources discs cece eee reece evens Table E 2 Test Signal Files File and Signal Formats B 1 B 4 B 6 B 7 B 14 B 15 B 20 B 20 B 23 B 24 B 26 B 28 B 30 B 32 B 33 B 33 B 35 B 35 B 36 B 37 B 37 B 38 B 38 B 39 B 40 B 41 B 41 B 42 B 42 B 44 B 44 B 45 B 45 B 46 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Table of Contents
15. Full bandwidth Average acquisition mode 15 ppm x reading 100 averages Full band 20 ps width Table A 3 Trigger specifications Characteristic Auxiliary trigger input resistance typical Maximum trigger input voltage typical Edge trigger sensitivity Main and Delayed trigger Description 21 5 kQ 20 V DC or peak AC Trigger Source Sensitivity Any channel DC coupled 0 35 div from DC to 50 MHz increasing to 1 div at 1 GHz Auxiliary input 400 mV from DC to 50 MHz increasing to 750 mV at 100 MHz A 6 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 3 Trigger specifications Cont Characteristic Edge trigger sensitivity typical Advanced trigger sensitivity typical Event count sensitivity typical Video trigger sensitivity typical Video Trigger Format Trigger level or threshold range VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Description All sources for vertical scale settings 10 mV div and lt 1 V div Trigger coupling NOISE REJ AC Same as DC coupled limits for frequencies 60 Hz attenuates signals lt 60 Hz 1 5 x the DC coupled limits from DC to 30 kHz attenuates signals gt 30 kHz 1 5 x the DC coupled limits for frequencies 280 kHz attenuates signals lt 80 kHz Sensitivity 3 x the DC coupled limits HF REJ LF REJ For all trigger types except Edge with vertical scale settings
16. Option VGA Ea Oa Configure Configure Signal a le a J a Picture button Click the Picture button to display the picture of the signal Vectorscope button Option SD HD Displays the signal in vectorscope format Hide button Click Hide to restore the main screen to full screen and hide the application window behind the main screen To restore the application window after hiding it click App on the main screen To access the Windows desktop for example to view reports click Hide In the main screen click File gt Minimize and then click Hide again VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics 8 Exit button Click Exit to quit the application From the Exit dialog box you can choose whether to retain the settings The default setting for Restore Scope Setting is No Click the button to change the option to Yes To quit the application click OK If you don t want to quit the application click Cancel Measurement Steps Overview 1 Use the Configuration gt Format menu to set the input signal format standard such as 1080i 60 and refresh rate page 2 24 2 Use the Configuration gt Measurements menu to select one or more measurements to run page 2 27 3 Use the Configuration gt Operations menu to set the measurement run operations such as run mode and trigger channel page 2 28 4 Click Run to run the selected measurements and view t
17. Table of Contents vi Figure 2 17 Calibration instruction 0 cece eee eee Figure 2 18 Attaching Sync Pickoff for compensation adjustment Figure 2 19 Connecting to the probe compensation connector Figure 2 20 Location of AUTOSET button 008 Figure 2 21 Display of waveform to determine sync pickoff compensation 00 cere cece cece cece ee ee ee ee arenes eeees Figure 2 22 Adjusting the compensation eeeeeeee Figure 2 23 Option SD HD Matrix signal 006 Figure 2 24 Option VGA Matrix test signal 006 Figure 3 1 Signal definitions H Sync 0c cece eens Figure 3 2 Jitter in H Sync period cece cece eee eee Figure 3 3 Frequency response with 500 MHz filter for Noise In Ratio measurement cece cece cece cence vere eceens Figure 3 4 Voltage ripple and noise cee ee cee ceees Figure 3 5 Signal definitions V Sync 0 cece ee eee Figure 3 6 Signal definitions Video transient 2 Figure 3 7 Results of the Color Bars measurement Figure 3 8 Enabling relative to reference results Figure 3 9 Relative to reference results displayed Option SD HD Figure 3 10 Relative to reference results displayed Option VGA Figure 3 11 Editing a reference file 0 cc cece eee eens Figure 3 12 Enabling limit testing Option SD HD Figu
18. where Delay1 is between channels G to B Delay2 is between channels G to R Delay3 is between channels B to R VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 41 Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information How Results are Calculated The leading edge position of the second white bar is determined for all three video channels For each pair of channels the difference in the above values is computed and reported The result is also reported as a percentage of the pixel clock period Color Bars Measurement 3 42 Signal Source Interpreting Results How Results are Calculated The Color Bars measurement measures the GBR color bars of a VGA card in a PC The Color Bars measurement measures the amplitude level relative to back porch of each of the eight colors that is white yellow cyan green magenta red blue and black for each active channel Therefore this measurement makes eight measurements on three channels for 24 total measurements The software assumes that G is on Channel 1 B is on Channel 2 and R is on Channel 3 The Color Bars measurement is also used to check individual channel gain In addition it can be used as a crude check of linearity because severe clipping or other non linear distortions will alter the measurement results from the ideal The test signal used for the Color Bars measurement is the color bars pattern located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM The color bars test signal used ha
19. 1 Select Results gt Noise 2 To change the setting for the Cursor click the Cursor Hz box Cursor Hz R E 371m There are three ways to change the number Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value Select one of the channels G B or R in the list box to change the channel for the noise spectrum measurement The next time the Noise Spectrum measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the NonLinearity Measurement Option SD HD To set up the NonLinearity measurements select Results gt NonLinearity to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that can be changed for the measurement For NonLinearity you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 77 Setting Up Measurements 3 78 To change settings for the NonLinearity measurements 1 Select Results gt NonLinearity 2 To change the setting for Line Number click the Line Number box Line Humber a s K There are three ways to change the number Turn the top knob
20. 10 mV div and lt 1 V div 1 0 div from DC to 500 MHz For sequential trigger delayed by events with vertical scale settings 10 mV div and lt 1 V div 1 0 div from DC to 500 MHz For delayed and main triggers with vertical scale settings 210 mV div and lt 1 V div Any channel 0 6 to 2 5 divisions of video sync tip Triggers from negative sync composite video field 1 or field 2 for interlaced systems any field specific line or any line for interlaced or noninterlaced systems Supported systems include NTSC PAL SECAM and analog HDTV Trigger Source Sensitivity Any channel 10 divisions from center of screen Auxiliary input 8 V Line Fixed at zero volts A 7 Appendix A Specifications Table A 3 Trigger specifications Cont Characteristic Description Trigger level or threshold accuracy Edge trigger DC coupling for signals having rise and fall typical times lt 20 ns Trigger Source Accuracy Any channel 2 x setting net offset 0 3 div x volts div setting offset accuracy Auxiliary Not calibrated or specified Where net offset offset position x volts division Set level to 50 function typical Operates with signals 30 Hz Trigger position error typical Edge trigger DC coupling for signals having a slew rate at the trigger point of lt 0 5 div ns Acquisition mode Error Sample Average 1 displayed pt 1 ns Trigger jitter typical o 8 ps RMS B Event De
21. Auto 2 38 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics Displaying the Input Signal in a Vectorscope Window for Option SD HD The VM5000 can display the input signal in a vectorscope window so that you can quickly see the color range of the signal The vectorscope displays the chrominance coloring portion of the video signal The amplitude and the phase are the two important parameters of the chrominance signal that lead to noticeable picture problems The phase is relationship between the chrominance signal and the reference burst on the video The processing within a vectorscope and the display of the processed signals is designed to detect and evaluate both phase and gain distortions of the chrominance Each bar of the video signal creates a dot on the vectorscope s display The position of these dots relative to the targets on the graticule and phase of the burst vector are the indicators of the chrominance signal s health The vectorscope s display is created by decoding the chrominance portion of the video signal into its two components B Y and R Y These two signals are then plotted against each other in an X Y fashion with B Y on the horizontal axis and R Y on the vertical axis Three color bars signals are used with vectorscopes 75 and 100 full field color bars and the SMPTE color bars The 100 and 75 labels refer to the amplitude of the signal 1 Select Configuration gt Picture amp
22. C and 30 C 68 F and 86 F m The instrument must be operating within the environmental limits listed in Table A 9 on page A 15 m The instrument must be powered from a source that meets the specifications listed in Table A 7 on page A 14 m The instrument must have been operating continuously for at least 20 minutes within the specified operating temperature range You must perform the Signal Path Compensation procedure Option SD HD only after the 20 minute warm up period If the ambient temperature changes more than 5 C 10 F you must restart the procedure See Signal Path Compensation for Option SD HD on page 2 13 The specifications listed in Tables A 1 through A 10 apply to all options The specifications specific to Option SD HD begin on page A 19 The specifications specific to Option VGA begin on page A 22 Table A 1 Channel input and vertical specifications Characteristic Description Input coupling AC DC and GND Input channels Four identical channels Input impedance selection 50 Q or 1 MQ Bandwidth limited to 500 MHz 1 MQ selected Input impedance DC coupled 50 Q 2 5 typical 1 MQ 1 0 in parallel with 18 pF 2 pF VSWR s1 5 1 typical from DC to 1 GHz Maximum voltage at input BNC AC DC or GND coupled 1 MQ 150 Vrms CAT I and lt 400 peak For steady state sinusoidal waveforms derate at 20 dB decade above 200 kHz to 9 Vas at 3 MHz 50 Q lt 1 Vrms for settings below 100mV div lt 5 Vrms for
23. In standard definition television noise weighting filters such as the CCIR Recommendation Rec 576 2 unified weighting filter are used to weight the noise spectrum to better match the visibility of noise in typical viewing conditions The unified weighting filter has been modified to exactly match the visibility of noise characteristics of 576 2 on the screen for each selected video format After line tilt and other low frequency distortions are removed from the signal all AC signal content is spectrally weighted by the selected filter if any and the resulting RMS voltage is calculated along with the signal to noise ratio in dB using a 700 mV peak signal value VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option SD HD Detailed Measurement Information NonLinearity Signal Source Interpreting Results How Results are Calculated Short Time Distortion Signal Source The Noise relative to reference value is calculated as follows Result measured value reference value This measurement is used to measure deviations from a straight line ramp test signal Deviations can be caused by such things as soft limiting from analog amplifiers and digital processing errors Problems in linearity can reduce video quality by for example reducing contrast at various average luminance levels or creating color shifts You can use the matrix signal or you can use either a ramp or step signal However a ramp signal w
24. Select Results gt Noise 2 To change the setting for Line Number click the Line Number box Line Number r amp a K There are three ways to change the number m Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average E There are three ways to change the average m Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 75 Setting Up Measurements 3 76 To change the Filter type and the cut off frequency of the bandwidth filter change the settings under Filter Fitter OFF Unified Weighting Unweighted BY Select a Filter type from the three available options Off Unified Weighting and Unweighted Bandwidth m Set the Filter option to Off to measure the broadband noise without any filt
25. Setting Up Measurements Figure 3 16 Illustration of the BMP test signal in full screen mode 5 From the File menu select File gt Set as Wallpaper centered Figure 3 17 Illustration of the BMP image set as wallpaper 6 Disconnect the output of the DUT from the monitor and connect the output of the DUT to the VM5000 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 83 Setting Up Measurements Setting Up the Ch Ch Mismatch Measurement 3 84 Option VGA To set up the Ch Ch Mismatch measurement select Results gt Ch Ch Mismatch to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that can be changed for the measurement For Ch Ch Mismatch you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change the settings for the Ch Ch Mismatch measurements 1 Click Results gt Ch Ch Mismatch 2 To change the line number click the Line Number box Line Humber EEE There are three ways to change the line number Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement
26. Table 1 1 Recommended Probes Cont Probe type Active DC to 1 0 GHz FET high bandwidth differential Active DC to 1 7 GHz FET high bandwidth differential Active 100 MHz high voltage differential Active 50 MHz high voltage differential AC Current AC Current DC AC Current High Speed Current Current 250 KHz to 2 GHz 50 Q input AC Only for temporary in circuit installation Current DC to 50 MHz 15 A DC Low Capacitance 20X 3 GHz Current Measurement Current Measurement Differential Preamp High Voltage Differential Optical Electrical Converter Optical Electrical Converter VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Tektronix probe P6247 P6248 P5205 P5210 P6021 P6022 AM5030S CT 1 CT 2 CT 6 TCP202 P6158 TCPA3000 TCPA4000 ADA400A P5200 P6701B P6703B Installation This section addresses instrument installation Unpacking on page 1 5 Checking the Environment Requirements on page 1 6 Connecting the Mouse on page 1 7 Powering On the Instrument on page 1 8 Shutting Down the Instrument on page 1 8 Creating an Emergency Startup Disk on page 1 9 Backing Up User Files on page 1 9 Installing Software on page 1 10 Connecting to a Network on page 1 11 Adjusting Display Contrast on page 1 12 CAUTION Be sure to create your emergency startup disk as described on page 1 9 You may need that disk if you ever need to reinstall Windows 2000 on the instrument hard drive Unp
27. TestEquipmentDepot com Appendix A Specifications Table A 11 Video measurement specifications Cont Characteristic Description Frequency Response Measurement Accuracy Flag Amplitude Amp 10 MHz to 30 MHz frequency range 2 mV 1 5 of reading 0 75 dB lt 5 MHz 0 25 MHz 25 MHz 0 1 MHz lt 10 2 Frequency readout Distortion Non linearity measurement 1 5 accuracy Transient Response Measurement Rise Time amp Fall Time K2T Overshoot amp Undershoot Rise amp Fall Settle Times Sync measurement Accuracy 5 ns 1 0 1 5 of reading 5 ns Accuracy Sync Amplitude 2 mV 1 5 of reading Sync Timing 0 06 sample rate 15 ppm x Reading rms Rise Time and Fall time 5 ns Channel delay readouts in ns Delay Match Error Less than 1 ns Measurement relative to reference flag amplitude Selected frequency is mea sured and displayed Correlated distortion rela tive to amplitude of funda mental frequency sinusoid Effective Filter BW resolution is approximately 0 3 MHz or sweep BW within 3 uS whichever is greater Non linearity measurement using a ramp test signal Incremental linearity re ported over five equally spaced intervals as well as an overall linearity figure for each channel Better than 0 5 typical Blanking interval measure ments including sync am plitude width and rise time CH 1 to CH 2 CH 1 to CH 3 CH 2 to CH 3 Accu
28. VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 45 Operating Basics 2 46 2 To change a value select the field and enter a value by key board You can also change values using one of the methods outlined in step 3 and step 4 Select the keypad icon to the left of the field to display a virtual keyboard to enter values using the touch screen Use the indicated general purpose knob to change the values Line Number 325 325 Average 1 Line Humber VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics Saving Measurement Setups 1 Select File gt Save Setup Recall Default Setup Recall Setup The application displays the Save dialog box Option SD HD The default save location for xi Option SD HD is mee a TE Gt amp C VMSO000TV EEE Bo Save uwmset The default save location for Option VGA is C VMS5000PC Eee pe eee VM Setting Files vmset 2 Select the Look in list to navigate to a different directory other than the default save location VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 47 Operating Basics 2 48 3 Enter a file name in the File Name box The instrument of fers an available file name or you can choose your own It automatically appends vmset to the file name of measurement setup files Select Save to save the measurement settings Files of type S
29. Vector Configuration Format Measurements Operation Warnings Reference amp Limits i Picture amp Yector 2 The instrument displays the D File Configuration Results Utilities Help Picture amp Vector tab which Sieh eK provides access to the picture Picture Display Vector Display and vectorscope settings Aspect Ratio Graticule Scale 9 Auto O 100 Formet Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits Picture amp Vector Line Humber e e Configure Signal VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 39 Operating Basics 2 40 3 Sets the video line number that is displayed in the vectorscope display Note that the line number on the Picture amp Vector tab is not used to specify where measurements are taken 4 Sets the Graticule and the Scale according the video signal format Auto is the default setting in Graticule This setting can be either HD or SD depending on the format selected 5 Click the vector button 6 This launches the video monitor display window Click the maximize button to expand the vectorscope display to full screen Line Humber amp 85 s Vector Display Scale 100 75 Graticule Auto 709 HD 601 SD ed Tektronix M5000 Video Monitor VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics Taking and Viewing the Measurement Results Ensure that you select a s
30. Vector Configuration Format Measurements Operation Warnings Reference amp Limits 5 The instrument displays the Picture amp Vector panel These settings control the display parameters of the picture and vectorscope displays amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Configuration Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits Picture amp Vector Picture Display Vector Display vid Aspect Ratio Graticule Fs sa Aut Line Humber e R Configure A Py 75 169 501 5 Signal m Line Number sets the video line Gne humbe amp number that is displayed in the vectorscope display or high lighted in the picture display Use the line number to identify features in the picture To remove the line set the line number to a line outside the active video Note that the line number on the Picture amp Vector tab is not used to specify where measurements are taken VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 37 Operating Basics 4 Sets the width to height ratio of Picture Displ the picture display based on the a Aspect Ratio format Auto Auto is the default Auto 43 determines the aspect ratio of the video signal and sets the picture display accordingly The 4x3 setting is for SD format and 16x9 is for HD format 5 Sets the Graticule and the Scale Vector Disp of the Vector Display ay Graticule Scale
31. button to navigate to a specific location Use the Get Default button to reset the file name to File Hame E CXVMSO0OP C Reports T akd rif the default location and name for the selected format File Name CAVMS5000HDVNVT olk2 pdf 5 Use the Description field to add notes into the report file You can enter up to 46 characters For example Serial Number 123456789012 tested by Joe P 6 Use the Measurements option Measurements button to select which measurements to save to a report m All Creates a report with all the measurements you have run since starting the application which have valid results in the results panels m Selected Creates a report with only the measurements that are currently selected in the Configuration gt Measurements screen and that have valid results in the results panels 2 52 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics 7 Select Generate Report to save the measurement results to the gt specified format and location All selected measurements are saved together in a single file each measurement has its own area in the report When Multi Lines is selected the Generate Report button in the Utilities gt Generate Report is not selectable VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 53 ee Ae Reference Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com EEE eee
32. fad Results Warnings 3 Select the warning messages to i Warning Types Reported report when a warning occurs fd Measurement Warnings See page 3 7 for more 2 Signal Warnings information a 3 W Results Warnings 4 Select how to report warning messages by selecting the check boxes in the control options Td Fop Up Warning Details pane Messages can be displayed in a window or logged to a file Control Options gf Log Warnings To File If Log Warnings To File is selected the warnings are written to the Log txt file Option SD HD at C VMS5000TV or Option VGA at C VMS000PC Warnings are appended to the Log txt file until it reaches 1 MB in size At that point it is renamed LogOld txt and a new Log txt file is created If the new file reaches 1 MB in size it will be renamed LogOld txt and will be written over the existing LogOld txt file If you wish to save the data in the LogOld txt file you must save the file under a different name before it is overwritten VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 33 Operating Basics Setting Reference and Limits Options When you run a measurement relative to a reference the VM5000 Option SD HD or VMS000PC Option VGA runs the measurements and displays the difference between the measurement and the reference value The reference values are stored in a reference file Limit Testing provides a Pass Fail indication by comparing the measured va
33. falls within pass or outside fail specified maximum and minimum values You can choose to take measurements relative to a reference and with limit testing concurrently Taking Measurements The procedure for taking measurements is 1 Option SD HD Select the appropriate format and the color space for the input signal or Option VGA Select the appropriate resolution the refresh rate and the timing standard for the input signal Select one or more measurements to take Select Configuration gt Operations Set the Setup And Or Run Run Mode and Auto Scaling setting for controlling the operation Select the Run button to take and view the measurements Views the measurement results by selecting the corresponding menu item in the results panel of the measurement VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 59 Setting Up Measurements Figure 3 7 shows the results of the Color Bars measurement Note that you can select only the Measured tab when relative results display and limit testing Results Color Bars Unit mv Line Humber 204 Average 1 options are disabled B Ei Blue Bla Figure 3 7 Results of the Color Bars measurement Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference The procedure to take measurements relative to a reference is 1 3 60 Option SD HD Select the appropriate format and the color space for the input signal or Option VGA Select the appropriate
34. not the 9500B Amplitude Setting values 23 Check that the Measured White and Black levels for each channel fall within the corresponding Upper and Lower limit vales 24 Check that the Measured White to Black Amplitudes for each channel fall within the corresponding Upper and Lower limit values 25 Turn the 9500B OUTPUT OFF and disconnect the min loss pad and cable from the MIU input Table B 9 Amplitude measurement results Characteristic G Measured White level Measured Black level Lower White limit value DC700 x 0 980 8 mV Upper White limit value DC700 x 1 020 8 mV Lower Black limit value DCO 8 mV Upper Black limit value DCO 8 mV Lower White to Black limit DC700 x DCO x 0 982 3 mV value Upper White to Black limit DC700 x DCO x 1 018 3 mV value VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 23 Appendix B Performance Verification Check Noise Floor Measurement Accuracy Table B 10 uses the values of DC700 DCO from the example Table B 9 on page B 23 Table B 10 Example of Amplitude measurement results Characteristic G B R Measured White level 699 0 mV 696 2 mV 698 3 mV Measured Black level 0 0 mV 1 7mV 0 5 mV Measured White to Black 699 0 mV 697 9 mV 698 8 mV Amplitude MWL MBL Lower White limit value 700 1 mV x 0 980 8 mV 678 1 mV Upper White limit value 700 1 mV x 1 020 8 mV 722 1 mV Lower Black limit val
35. setting 0 35 x net offset 1 5 mV 0 1 div x V div setting 0 35 x net offset 15 mV 0 1 div x V div setting 0 25 x net offset 150 mV 0 1 div x V div setting A 3 Appendix A Specifications Table A 1 Channel input and vertical specifications Cont Characteristic Description Temperatures gt 40 C 0 75 x net offset 150 mV 0 1 div x V div setting where net offset offset position x volts division DC gain accuracy Sample or 3 1 0 x net offset offset range for 2 mV div Average acquisition mode 3 98 mV div DC voltage measurement accuracy Measurement type DC accuracy in volts Sample acquisition mode Any sample 2 mV div 3 98 mV div typical 1 5 3 0 x net offset offset range x reading net offset offset accuracy 0 13 div x V div setting 0 6 mV Delta voltage measurement 2 mV div 3 98 mV div between any two points 1 5 3 0 x net acquired under the same offset offset range x setup and ambient condi reading net offset 0 26 tions div x V div setting 1 2 mV Where net offset offset position x volts division Average acquisition mode Average of 16 waveforms 2 mV div 3 98 mV div 1 5 3 0 x net offset offset range x reading net offset offset accuracy 0 06 div x Vidiv Delta voltage measurement 2 mV div 3 98 mV div between any two averages
36. 01 50 Q Type N male to BNC female Tektronix part number Tests F G H 103 0045 00 Amphenol 31 216 RFX 75 Q female BNCs each end VSWR 1 10 1 Tyco AMP model 222117 1 Test G 26 dB RL or better 1 1500 MHz VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First 2 2 2 2 Read This First Table 1 Equipment required for performance verification Cont Quantity Recommended Description required Minimum requirement equipment Where used 50 Q BNC female 50 Q female BNCs each end VSWR Tektronix part number Tests C G H female adapter 1 10 1 26 dB RL or better 1 1500 MHZ 103 0028 00 Amphenol 31 219 RFX BNC T adapter 50 Q 1 male BNC 2 female BNCs Tektronix part number Tests B C D E 103 0030 00 Amphenol 31 208 RFX BNC female to dual Standard 0 750 inch banana plug spacing Tektronix part number Tests B C D E banana adapter 103 0090 00 Pomona Electronics model 1269 BNC Shorting cap BNC male connector center conductor Amphenol models 5275 or Test C connected to shell with less than 0 1 Q 31 17 resistance Table 2 Optional equipment for performance verification Quantity Recommended Description required Minimum requirement equipment Where used Reference Minimum Return Loss 45 dB 1 300 MHz BNC Wide Band Engineering Test F 75 Q load female connector Co model A56T75B 6 with female BNC connector option Precision 75 Q 75 Q male BNCs each end VSWR 1 01 1 45 dB Wide Band
37. 100 mV div settings and above VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual A 1 Appendix A Specifications A 2 Table A 1 Channel input and vertical specifications Cont Characteristic Differential delay DC 50 Q input Deskew range typical Channel to channel crosstalk Digitizers Sensitivity range 1MQ 50 Q Analog bandwidth Analog bandwidth selections Analog Bandwidth Limit Low frequency AC coupled High frequency typical Calculated rise time typical Step response settling errors typical lt 2 V step amplitude Description 100 ps between any two channels with DC input coupling and the same V div scale settings at or above 10 mV div 75 0 ns 100 1 at lt 100 MHz 230 1 at gt 100 MHz up to the rated bandwidth for any two channels with equal V div settings 8 bit resolution Four separate digitizers each channel sampled simultaneously Fine adjustment available with lt 1 resolution 1 mV div to 10 V div in a 1 2 5 sequence 1 mV div to 1 V div in a 1 2 5 sequence SCALE range Bandwidth 1 mV div to 1 99 mV div DC to 175 MHz 2 mV div to 1 V div DC to 1 GHz DC 50 Q coupling bandwidth limit set to Full operating ambient lt 30 C derated by 5 MHz C above 30 C 20 MHz 150 MHz or Full 50 Q lt 200 kHz 1 MQ lt 10 Hz reduced by a factor of ten when using a 10X probe 20 MHz with 20 MHz bandwidth limit turned on 150 MHz with 150 MHz bandwidth limit turned on
38. 485 a Average Noise at Cursor Position l Cursor Hz 3 CEE Spectrum my 3 71M JA dB iG v Figure 3 30 Displaying limit values for the Noise measurement Configure the Noise Spectrum measurements as explained in Setting up for Noise Spectrum measurements on page 3 77 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Refer to Figure 3 31 Hoise at Cursor Position Cursor Hz ra Spectrum is 3 71M AN PR v Figure 3 31 Displaying the Noise Spectrum measurement VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Click the Spectrum box to get the noise spectrum display on the VM5000 video monitor refer to Figure 3 32 Tektronix YMS5000 Video Monitor tr A frog RK ners AEN fron Pe ee Ane pet VAS AANA Fa a oN Figure 3 32 Displaying the Noise Spectrum on the VM5000 video monitor Displaying NonLinearity Measurement Results Option SD HD Measured Values Configure the NonLinearity measurements as explained in Setting Up the NonLinearity Measurement on page 3 77 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt NonLinearity Refer to Figure 3 33 File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results NonLinearity p e Measured Unit Line Number 389 Maximum Average 1 Figure 3 33 Displaying the NonLinearity measurement Click the Measured tab to display the measured NonLinearity values VMS5000 Automatic Video Measuremen
39. 72 This setting is the best option for RGB GBR signals When Meas Location is set to Freq 4 2 2 the measurement uses the full frequency for CH1 and half that frequency for CH2 and CH3 Meas Location Freg 4 2 2 Y Freg 4 4 4 Freq 4 2 2 Click the Freq MHz box to change the measurement location to a particular frequency Freq MHz r a There are three ways to change the frequency Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the frequency location When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the frequency location to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value When Meas Location is set to Time the measurement reports the waveform frequency at that specified time Meas Location h Freq 4 4 4 A Sel Freq 4 2 2 Time Click the Time us box to change the measurement location to a particular time VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements Time uS amp m s There are three ways to change the time m Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the time location When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the time location to perform
40. 855 735 ie a gt M Defaulti im1080p24 RGB iat pel Sa Craw AypoShages O08427 BE amp 4 A SRMEOS Ede NUM Figure 3 15 Customizing a limits file To customize a limits file 1 Open a reference file for the appropriate format and color space using a spreadsheet program or a text editor 2 Change the values in the file to those that suit your needs Use columns C and D for the min and max values 3 Save the file under a new name remember to save the file in CSV format VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 67 Setting Up Measurements Setting Up the Channel Delay Measurement 3 68 Option SD HD To set up the channel delay measurements select Results gt Channel Delay to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that can be changed for the measurement For channel delay you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change settings for the Channel Delay measurements 1 Select Results gt Channel Delay 2 To change the setting for Line Number click the Line Number box Line Humber Fc There are three ways to change the number Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to
41. AWVG7 CH1 output goes to the VM5000 CH1 input d Connect the CH2 cable to the VM5000 CH2 input and the CH3 cable to the VM5000 CH3 input e Connect a fourth 75 Q BNC cable to the lower AWVG7 CH1 output f Connect the other end of this cable to a BNC T connector and a 75 Q termination g Connect the BNC T connector to the VM5000 CH4 input B 8 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification VM5000 TG700 with me 75 Q Termination AWVG7 module S O JE BNC T connector CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Figure B 3 Frequency accuracy test hookup 2 3 4 5 On the TG700 press Module repeatedly to display AWVG7 Press FORMAT repeatedly to display 1080 59i GBR Press ENTER Press Multiburst repeatedly to display Multiburst 1 10 MHz NOTE Press and hold the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button to unlock the front panel 6 Start the VM5000 application File gt Applications gt VM5000 7 Select File gt Recall Default 8 Select Configuration gt Format 9 Select RGB Color Space 10 Select Configuration gt Measurements 11 Select the Multiburst check box and deselect the Color Bars check box 12 Select Configuration gt Operation and select Channel 4 as the trigger 13 Select Results gt Multiburst 14 Select the VM5000 Run button The Multiburst
42. Attenuator Qty 2 50 Q BNC cable Qty 2 Type N to BNC adapter Qty 2 Equipment for optional checks steps 11 14 12 Reference 75 Q load 75 Q BNC female female adapter Precision 75 Q BNC male male adapter Connect the MIU to the VM5000 apply power and establish communica tions using Hyperterminal as described in Test A of this procedure Using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 1000000 to the MIU Verify that the RGB WB Path LED is illuminated On the VM5000 front panel under VERTICAL select 50 Q for CH1 CH2 and CH3 Connect a Type N to BNC adapter followed by a 6 dB attenuator to the tracking generator output Connect the other end of the attenuator to the Return Loss bridge RF IN using a 50 Q BNC cable Connect a second Type N to BNC adapter and 6 dB attenuator to the spectrum analyzer input and connect the other end of this attenuator to the bridge RF OUT using a second 50 Q BNC cable Leave the bridge test port open VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First Read This First 5 Set the spectrum analyzer so that the analyzer noise floor display with no RF signal applied to the analyzer input is at least 40 dB below signal level produced by the bridge when the test port is open 0 dB RL over the range of 1 MHz to 250 MHz The analyzer settings may vary with the specific spectrum analyzer and bridge used but the following settings should be usable with many analyzer bridge com
43. BNC to banana adapter Connect the other end of each cable to the BNC T adapter This connects Ohms input and Ohms Sense input in parallel at the BNC T adapter On the multimeter select 4 wire Ohms mode and 10 kOhms range Connect the BNC T adapter to the H input BNC on the MIU CHECK that the multimeter reads between 2175 Q and 2225 Q i o A Using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 0110000 to the MIU Verify that the H channel and HV WB Path LEDs are illuminated and that the 8 mA 8 mA and Term On LEDs are off VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First Read This First 10 On the VM5000 front panel under VERTICAL select 50 Q for CH4 11 CHECK that the Multimeter reads between 2142 Q and 2258 Q 12 Disconnect the BNC T adapter from the H input BNC Test E HV Input LF Mode Current Sources This test checks the accuracy of the 8mA and 8 mA current sources The specification is 8 mA 2 5 and 8 mA 2 5 The following equipment is required for the test 2 Re gn Host VM5000 with mouse and keyboard Digital Multimeter 50 Q BNC cable Qty 1 BNC female to dual banana adapter Qty 1 Connect the MIU to the VM5000 apply power and establish communica tions using Hyperterminal as described in Test A of this procedure On the VM5000 front panel under VERTICAL select 1 MQ for CH4 Using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 0010101 to the MI
44. Ch Skew Alternate White and Black Color Bars Nine Color Bars H Sync Any pattern H Sync Jitter Any pattern H Timing Black White Black Linearity Staircase Luma Levels Alternate White and Black Noise Inj Ratio Full White V Sync Any pattern V Timing Half White and Half Black Video Transient Alternate White and Black Whether you choose a single test pattern or take multiple measurements you must select the appropriate file that you will use to generate the video test signal The file you select depends on the format you want to test and for some patterns refresh rate must also be considered Suppose you want to test a 1280x1024 resolution format Within the appropriate folder look for a file that matches the format of the test you want to perform If you want to test Linearity you would need to choose either full field Staircase test pattern or use the Matrix test pattern Within the Staircase folder you would look for a file named 1280x1024 Matrix bmp refresh rate is important for the Matrix pattern 4 Select the bitmap file that fits your requirements and open the file with a program such as Paint Shop Pro If you set up the DUT to drive a second display you can set the background of the second display to the bitmap file rather than opening the file with a bitmap editor This displays the bmp file in full screen mode without any borders applied for Single Monitor mode 3 82 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual
45. DC 50 Q coupling bandwidth limit set to Full SCALE range Rise time 1 mV div to 1 99 mV div 2 29 ns 2 mV div to 1 V div 300 ps Bandwidth limit set to Full SCALE range Settling error at time after step 1 mV div to 99 5 mV div 20 ns lt 0 5 100 ns lt 0 2 20 ms lt 0 1 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 1 Channel input and vertical specifications Cont Characteristic lt 20 V step amplitude 200 V step amplitude Position range Peak Detect or Envelope Mode Pulse Response Offset range 1 MQ coupling 50 Q coupling Offset accuracy VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Description 100 mV div to 1 0 V div 1 01 V div to 10 V div 5 divisions 20 ns lt 1 0 100 ns lt 0 5 20 ms lt 0 2 20 ns lt 1 0 100 ns lt 0 5 20 ms lt 0 2 Capture of single event pulses Number of channels 1or2 3 or 4 Minimum pulse width 400 ps 800 ps User adjustable input offset voltages SCALE range 1 mV div to 99 5 mV div 100 mV div to 1 V div 1 01 V div to 10 V div 1 mV div to 50 mV div 50 5 mV div to 99 5 mV div 100 mV div to 500 mV div 505 mV div to 1 V div SCALE range 1 mV div to 9 95 mV div 10 mV div to 99 5 mV div 100 mV div to 1 0 V div 1 01 V div to 10 V div Offset range 1V 10V 100 V 0 5 V 0 25 V 5 V 2 5 V Offset range 0 2 x net offset 1 5 mV 0 1 div x V div
46. ESE e ee Seed Eee eee EE Figure B 8 Setup to determine the noise floor measurement ACCULACY oee ei eet eka eRe a ea eaie sia eee ashe delete Figure B 9 Setup to check channel skew match Figure B 10 Setup to measure H Sync transient response accuracy Figure B 11 Setup to perform Transient and Linearity MeASUPEMENS lt s scese eed reese bee hae es eee wale ee ees Figure B 12 Setup to perform Linearity measurement Figure E 1 Using TG700 baseband test signals Figure E 2 Using ATSC transport stream signals Figure E 3 Using elementary stream signals 006 Figure E 4 Using DVD signals ccc eee eer erences 3 132 3 133 3 133 A 18 B 3 B 5 B 9 B 11 B 13 B 18 B 21 B 25 B 26 B 29 B 31 B 40 E 3 E 4 E 6 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1 1 Recommended Probes cccceccecscceceees 1 3 Table 1 2 Instrument options cc cece cece eee e eee eee 1 23 Table 1 3 Standard Accessories ccc eee ce cece ee eeeee 1 24 Table 1 4 Recommended Accessories 0ecceceececeees 1 27 Table 1 5 Optional Accessories cece cece cece eeees 1 27 Table 2 1 Required connections of the VGA signal VM5000 and the terminator ois o es5 06 eteda sev od oteite a2 a Bie See ses bua aie S 1a 2 12 Table 2 2 Option SD HD Matrix signal element
47. Engineering Test F BNC male male RL or better 1 300 MHz Co model A74VA 75 Q adapter male BNCs each end VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First 3 Read This First Test A Initial Connection and Setup 1 With the VM5000 Power off connect all five MIU coaxial cables to the host VMS5000 Use the labels on the MIU as a guide Connect the RS232 cable between the MIU and COM1 port on the VM5000 Attach a keyboard and mouse to the VM5000 Turn on the VM5000 The MIU Power ON led should be lit and the MIU Fault LED should be off If the Fault indicator is lit check that all of the coaxial cables have been properly connected Open Hyperterminal on the VM5000 If an MIU Hyperterminal session was previously established and saved open it If not establish a session as follows a Minimize open programs such as the oscilloscope application and the VMS5000 application so that the Windows desktop is visible b Open the terminal emulation program Hyperterminal Hyperterminal is typically located under Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Communica tions gt Hyperterminal c When Hyperterminal is first opened a pop up window Connection Description will open Under name enter MIU and then click OK d A Connect To window will open Under Connect using select COM1 and click OK e A COM1 Properties window will open Set the Port Settings as follows m Bits per second 9600 m Data bits
48. Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Displaying the Multiburst measurement Displaying limit values for the Multiburst Displaying the Noise measurement Displaying limit values for the Noise measurement Displaying the Noise Spectrum measurement Displaying the Noise Spectrum on the VM5000 video Displaying the NonLinearity measurement Displaying limit values for the NonLinearity Displaying the Short Time Distortion measurement Displaying limit values for the Short Time Distortion Displaying the Sync measurement 4 Displaying limit values for the Sync measurement Ch Ch Mismatch measurement results Limit values for the Ch Ch Mismatch measurement Ch Ch Skew measurement results 0 0005 Limit values for the Ch Ch Skew measurement Color Bars measurement results Limit values for the Color Bars measurement H Sync measurement results Limit values for the H Sync measurement H Sync Jitter measurement results Limit values for the H Sync Jitter measurement H Timing measurement results Limit values for the H Timing measurement Linearity measurement results 0 eeee Limit values for the Linearity measurement Luma Levels measu
49. Lower limit G Upper limit Resolution Bits 8 8 Max INL LSB 5 12 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 5 0 5 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes 31 From the TekScope application menu bar select Vertical gt Offset gt Select 32 33 34 35 Ch1 gt enter 0 175 Volts in Offset box From the TekScope application menu bar click on App software button From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement Record the results in Table B 21 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Resolution should read 8 bit Table B 21 10 bit Linearity G Channel Level 2 of 4 Linearity Lower limit G Upper limit Resolution Bits 8 8 Max INL LSB 5 12 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 5 0 5 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes 36 From the TekScope application menu bar select Vertical gt Offset gt Ch1 gt enter 0 Volts in Offset box 37 From the TekScope application menu bar click on App software button 38 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement 39 Record the results in Table B 22 40 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Resolution should read 8 bit VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 37 Appendix B Performance Verification Table B 22 10 bit Linearity G Channel Level 3 of 4 Linearity G Upper limit Resolution Bits Bo 8 Max INL LSB 20 48 Max DNL LSB 0 5 Monotonic Y
50. Measurement Results 04 3 101 Displaying Color Bars Measurement Results 0 0008 3 102 Displaying Frequency Response Measurement Results 3 104 Displaying Multiburst Measurement Results 0 0008 3 106 Displaying Noise Measurement Results 00 00 0000 eee eee 3 107 Displaying NonLinearity Measurement Results 005 3 109 Displaying Short Time Distortion Measurement Results 3 111 Displaying Sync Measurement Results 000 00 e eee eee 3 112 Displaying Ch Ch Mismatch Measurement Results 0 3 113 Displaying Ch Ch Skew Measurement Results 000 3 115 Displaying Color Bars Measurement Results 00 0000 3 116 Displaying H Sync Measurement Results 0 0 0 0 0a 3 118 Displaying H Sync Jitter Measurement Results 0000 3 119 Displaying H Timing Measurement Results 0000008 3 121 Displaying Linearity Measurement Results 00000008 3 122 Displaying Luma Levels Measurement Results 000 3 124 Displaying Noise Inj Ratio Measurement Results 0 3 125 Displaying V Sync Measurement Results 0 0 0 0 eee eee 3 127 Displaying V Timing Measurement Results 00 0008 3 128 Displaying Video Transient Measurement Results 0 3 130 D
51. Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification 49 50 Determine monotonicity enter Yes under Monotonic Y N if and only if the corresponding values in Table B 20 through Table B 23 are Yes Otherwise enter No in Table B 23 on page B 38 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Table B 24 10 bit Linearity G Channel All Levels Linearity Lower limit G Upper limit Resolution Bits 10 10 Max INL LSB 5 12 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 5 0 5 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes 10 bit DNL Monotonicity and Resolution measurement B Channel The steps for checking the 10 bit DNL Monotonicity and Resolution measurement B Channel are as follows 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 Make connections as shown in Figure B 11 on page B 31 Use the MIU B input instead of G a Connect the Channel 1 output of the AWG710B to B input of the MIU through the 50 Q to 75 Q min loss pad b Connect the MRK 1 output of the AWG710B to the H input of the MIU c Connect the MRK 1 output of the AWG710B to the V input of the MIU From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Operation gt Setup And Or Run gt Setup And Run From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement It may take a few minutes for the measurement to complete Connect the AWG710B CH1 output to B input of the MIU with t
52. ON Standby switch push and hold the On Standby switch for up to 20 seconds to start the shutdown process To completely remove power to the instrument push the On Standby switch and then disconnect the power cord from the power source VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Installation Creating an Emergency Startup Disk A Backing Up User Files Now that you have completed the basic installation process you should create an emergency startup disk The emergency startup disk contains basic files to restart your instrument in case of a major hardware or software failure The disk also contains files that you can use to check and format the hard disk CAUTION Create this disk and store it in a safe place It may help you recover your Windows 2000 installation without rebuilding the entire instrument hard disk Follow these steps to create the emergency startup disk for a Windows 2000 instrument 1 Minimize the instrument application by selecting Minimize in the File menu 2 From the Windows taskbar select Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt System Tools gt Backup 3 In the Welcome display click Emergency Repair Disk 4 Insert a 3 5 inch disk into the disk drive and follow the on screen instruc tions to create the startup disk Always back up your user files on a regular basis Use the Windows Backup tool to back up files stored on the hard disk The Backup tool is located in the Sy
53. RMS Distortion Result RMS distortion measured RMS distortion reference The Relative to Reference values for the display are calculated as follows measured frequency reference frequency x 100 reference frequency Frequency VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 31 Option SD HD Detailed Measurement Information Time eee time reference ine x 100 reference time fie ecu flag reference fee x 100 reference flag measured ampie L reference amplitude Flag 20 log reference flag x 100 reference amplitude i measured distortion reference distortion RMS Distortion f x 100 reference distortion Measured Calculation The measured values appear in the Results panel when Measured tab is selected These values are calculated as follows Frequency Frequency measured Time Time measured Flag Measured flag amplitude in mV Amplitude Amplitude of signal at the time or frequency input Result 20 log measured amplitude measured flag amplitude Amplitude note that attenuated signals give results in dB Result s correlated distortion sept x 100 RMS signal amplitude 3 32 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option SD HD Detailed Measurement Information Multiburst The Multiburst measurement is used to verify frequencies and corresponding amplitudes of sinusoidal bursts It can be used to verify the proper reconstructi
54. Reference amp Limits funi Lines tions panel select Measurements on Multiple Lines c fi ti n gt M lti Lines Start Line End Line Start Line End Line onfiguratio u I E Syn ba Eo EEEES W H Timing pe pe E Luma Select the measurements you ren pe Ee EE want to take Enter the Start Line and End Line values for each measurement VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics Changing Line Number or Averaging on the Results Screen You can change the video signal line number and the number of measurement to average before displaying the results The instrument stops measuring changes the results to dashes and uses the new settings at the start of its next measure ment cycle See page 3 17 for information on line numbers and averaging 1 Select a measurement from the Results menu For example click Results gt Color Bars The instrument displays the Color Bars measurement results Results Option SD HD Summary Channel Delay E gt Frequency Response Multiburst Noise Non Linearity Shor Time Distortion Sync File Configuration Results Utilities Halp Results ColorBars maal CA Unit mY YIG Pb B Line Number White 6897 44 0 0 Yellow 61866 240 87 Cyan 0 17 117 03 Green 70 94 23481 Magenta 286 59 22068 Red 206 82 117 88 Blue 78 07 346 593 Black 0 79 0 65 Results Color Bars Measured Relative Reference Limits B Line Number Average 1
55. Required equipment Prerequisites 1 HD CAV Television Test Signal generator Tektronix TG700 with AWVG7 module 75 Q BNC cables 2 75 Q precision BNC terminations 2 Connector BNC T 2 Coupler Dual Input BNC T cable assembly 1 The test signal generator must warm up for at least 20 minutes before doing this test Connect the instrument to the test signal source Refer to Figure B 5 while doing the following steps a Connect a 75 Q BNC cable to the upper CH1 AWVG7 output b Connect the other end of the cable to a BNC T connector BNC T Cable Assembly and 75 Q termination VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification c Connect the BNC T Cable Assembly to the VM5000 CH1 and CH 2 inputs d Connect a second 75 Q BNC cable to the lower CH1 AWVG7 output e Connect the other end of the cable to the VM5000 CH 4 input and a 75 Q termination using a BNC T connector VM5000 00 0 0 09 0 00 00 00 0 00 75 Q Termination TG700 with AWVG7 module O o 00000 000 Ooo 0 O O O lt BNC T connector Hie CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 O O CH3 CH2 CH1 BNC T cable assembly BNC T connector 75 Q Termination Figure B 5 Channel delay match test hookup O
56. Running Measurements Overview 2 23 S Saving measurement setups 2 47 Selected button generating reports 3 25 Selected Option generating reports 2 52 Selecting Measurement 2 36 Set Measurements 2 34 Setup amp Run 3 11 Setup amp Run button 3 6 3 8 Setup amp Run Option 2 29 Setup Only 3 11 Setup Only button 3 6 3 8 Setup Only Option 2 29 Short Time Distortion detailed measurement information 3 35 displaying 3 111 setting up 3 79 Show the application when hidden 2 22 Shutdown 1 8 Signal path compensation 1 14 A 1 Signal sources matrix files E 1 non matrix See Measurements detailed information Site considerations 1 6 Software reinstallation D 1 Software installation 1 10 Software version number 3 26 Space requirements 1 6 Specifications A 1 video measurements A 19 Standard accessories 1 24 Startup disk creating 1 9 Stop button 2 22 Switch Accessory options 2 31 Sync detailed measurement information 3 37 displaying 3 112 setting up 3 80 sync pickoff compensation 2 13 Sync Polarity Mode 2 32 Sync signal trigger channel buttons 2 31 System diagnostics menu 1 13 T Taking a measurement 2 41 Termination 75 Ohm CH4 2 6 Test signal See Matrix test pattern VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Index TG700 DNL files Matrix test pattern E 2 Timing Standard CVT 2 26 CVT R 2 26 DMT 2 26 Tming Standard GTF 2 26 Transport stream files Matrix test
57. Selection Q Deranli fe Default GENEI E Ect eferente File Manual Selec ire eile rae Exit Figure 3 13 Enabling limit testing Option VGA By default the software selects a limit file appropriate to the specified signal However you can specify a different reference file by selecting Manual in the Limits Selection area 6 To specify a non default limits file select Manual under Limits Selection Click Select Limits File and navigate to the desired limits file and select it VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 65 Setting Up Measurements 7 After you have selected the limits file select the run button to take and view the measurements 8 Views the measurement results by selecting the corresponding menu item in the results panel of the measurement See Figure 3 14 Note that you can select the Limits tab File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results CalorBars 3 Measured Relative Reference Limits F Unit mW PbsB Line Humber min 37 e max Average 209 37 1 d 155 4 Figure 3 14 Results when limit testing is available Customizing a Limits File A limits file defines the maximum and minimum acceptable values for measure ments Limits files are used as the source of comparison for Limit Testing measurements The VM5000 includes a set of limits files which you can use as a starting point to create limits files to suit your needs There is a differen
58. Set User Manual Installation Connecting the Mouse The instrument includes a USB Universal Serial Bus mouse You can plug the mouse into any of the four available USB ports The USB ports and other PC peripheral connection points are shown in Figure 1 2 Refer to the TDS5000B Quick Start User Manual for additional connection information Keyboard JQ OK PS 2 mouse uss MN PC SVGA output comer fo 7 o 4 tis he o m Centronics printer RS 232 rUo O USB gt Php Ethernet Microphone in O00 Ox Audio line in Audio line out GPIB AC Jo Scope VGA output Figure 1 2 Locations of VM5000 Option VGA connectors NOTE For best performance plug the USB devices directly into the USB connectors on the instrument chassis rather than connecting the devices serially You can connect or disconnect a USB mouse keyboard or other USB devices with the power on If your USB mouse locks up disconnect and reconnect the USB connector to restore normal operation CAUTION To avoid product damage shut down the instrument and disconnect A N the power cord from the power source before connecting any accessories other than USB devices If the instrument front panel and or touch screen does not respond press the On Standby switch for at least five seconds to cycle power See Shutting Down
59. Television Test Signal generator Tektronix TG700 with AWVG7 module 75 Q BNC cables 4 75 Q precision BNC terminations 4 Connector BNC T 4 The test signal generator must warm up for at least 20 minutes before doing this test You must have completed the Determine the AWVG7 Signal Outlet Amplitude procedure on page B 2 1 Connect the instrument to the test signal source Refer to Figure B 2 while doing the following steps a Connect a 75 Q BNC cables to each of the upper CH1 CH2 and CH3 AWVG7 outputs b Connect the other end of each cable to a BNC T connector and a precision 75 Q termination c Connect the BNC T connector to the VM5000 so that the cable from the AWVG7 CH1 output goes to the VM5000 CH1 input d Connect the CH2 cable to the VM5000 CH2 input and the CH3 cable to the VM5000 CH3 input TG700 with AWVG7 module VM5000 a 75 Q Termination O BNC T connector Figure B 2 Amplitude accuracy test hookup VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 5 Appendix B Performance Verification e Connect a fourth 75 Q BNC cable to the lower AWVG7 CH1 output f Connect the other end of this cable to a BNC T connector and a 75 Q termination g Connect the BNC T connector to the VM5000 CH4 input 2 On the TG700 press the MODULE FORMAT
60. Up the V Timing Measurement Option VGA To set up the V Timing measurement select Results gt V Timing to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that you can change for the measurement For V Timing you can choose the number of times the measurement is averaged To change the settings for the V Timing measurement 1 On the menu bar click Results gt V Timing 2 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average 7 CU There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 95 Setting Up Measurements m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the V Timing measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the Video Transient Measurement 3 96 Option VGA To set up the Video Transient measurement select Results gt Video Transient to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that you can change for the measurement For Video Transient you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the
61. Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 19 Operating Basics For other refresh rates the actual starting line number can be noticeably different than the 60 Hz refresh rate To view the active video line number location for a specific pattern at another refresh rate locate the Microsoft Excel file Matrix Signals LineNumbers xls located on the VM5000 software CD This file lists the Actual Video line numbers for all supported refresh rates Starting the Application Ensure that you have set up the input signal sources before running the measurements See page 2 23 1 Power on the instrument The instrument displays the default main screen 2 On the menu bar click Option SD HD File gt Run Application gt E e VM5000 HD and SD Video ester eee eee ear or fecal ta Seip File gt Run Application gt ore cuise VM5000 VGA Video YMSO00 HD and SD Video VMSODO VGA Wk Mnisize cule 2 20 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics 3 The instrument reduces the waveform area to the upper part of the screen and opens the VM5000 application in the lower part of the screen Option SD HD le Eda Vertical Hone Acq Ing Display Cursors Measure Math Tek Fatlacq S 10 Dee 02 19 20 03 tities Help Trig Holdott 9 95mrs Configuration Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits Picture amp Vector Format C
62. a new user defined for mat select User Defined For mat and click Add To edit a user defined formatselect User Defined Format and click Edit The User Defined Format window appears Enter the ap propriate values for the horizon tal and vertical parameters To save your new format enter a name in the Format Name field and click Save To delete a user defined format select the User Defined format and click Delete Option SD HD SD HD Color Space A S POP 150 400P 60 720P 60 YPbPr ROB 1080P 24 Option VGA User Defined Format V Parameters H Parameters H Addr Time H Blank Time V Blank Time H Back PorchTime V Back PorchTime H Border Time V Border Time H Syne Time Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits Configuration Resolution Refresh Rate Timing i 0 g OWT Configure Add Edit De LIR Ean iT Delete selected User Defined Format VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 25 Operating Basics 5 Select the appropriate Color Space Option SD HD or Refresh Rate Option VGA 6 Select the appropriate timing standard for the signal Option VGA Option SD HD Color Space Option VGA Refresh Rate 50H o 60Hz iara amp e rat E YPbPr RGB Timing DMT CVT Option VGA CYT R GTF DMT The Display Monitor Timing standards and guidelines are used for lower resolu
63. amp 109 Average e 1 Figure 3 20 Displaying the Channel Delay measurement Click the Measured tab to display the measured channel delay in ns in the Results Channel Delay panel for the channel delay measurement If Relative to Reference testing is enabled see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab To create a custom reference file see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 If Limit testing is enabled see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for each signal format and color space VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 101 Viewing Measurement Results Select the min option to display the minimum channel delay values Select the max option to display the maximum channel delay values Refer to Figure 3 21 File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Channel Delay Measured Relative Reference Limits Unit ns Line Number Oo min 197 max Average 1 Figure 3 21 Displaying limit values for the Channel Delay measurement Displaying Color Bars Measurement Results Option SD HD Measured Values Relative Values 3 102 Configu
64. box appears on the screen To avoid interruptions to your testing clear all the Warning reporting Reference amp Sets the measurement or measurements options to Relative Result Display and Limit Testing Limits Relative Result Enable Relative Result Selecting Enable Relative Result Display enables the Relative to Display Display Reference testing Capture Results as This is a fast and easy way to create a reference file Uses Reference current results as the basis for a new reference file Reference Default Select Default to automatically load the Tektronix reference file Selection The only valid entry is csv The actual file can be a text file if it is formatted as a comma separated value file To get valid test results be sure to choose the appropriate reference file The correct csv reference file will have the appropriate values for each of the measurements Manual Select Manual to enable the user defined Select Reference File Select Reference File Click Select Reference File to open the file chooser to browse and select the file Without selecting the reference file the measurement will run without producing valid relative results A reference file can still be loaded after a measurement completes to produce relative results for the latest measured values Reference amp Limit Testing Enable Limits Testing Selecting Enable Limit Testing enables Pass Fail testing Limits Stop on Limit Testing Check the Stop on Limit Tes
65. brightness will change as you move the slider control Click Apply Click OK VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual EEE ae Incoming Inspection Self Tests This section contains instructions for performing a self test and functional verification of the instrument These procedures verify that the instrument is operating correctly after shipment but they do not check product specifications Make sure you have installed the instrument as described in Installation starting on page 1 5 This procedure uses internal routines to verify that the instrument functions and was adjusted properly No test equipment or hookups are required Equipment required None Prerequisites Power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warm up Perform these substeps to verify internal diagnostics 1 Display the system diagnostics menu as follows a Ifthe instrument is in the toolbar mode click Menu far right toolbar button to switch to menu bar mode b From the Utilities menu select Instrument Diagnostics to open the Instrument Diagnostics control window c Inthe Subsystem Area and Test lists ensure that you select ALL 2 Run the system diagnostics as follows a Disconnect all input signals from all four channels b Click Run in the Instrument Diagnostics control window The internal diagnostics do an exhaustive verification of proper instrument function taking five to fifteen minutes When complete the result
66. click the Run button to take the linearity measurement 64 Record the results in Table B 26 65 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Resolution should read 8 bit Table B 26 10 bit Linearity B Channel Level 2 of 4 Linearity Lower limit B Upper limit Resolution Bits 8 8 Max INL LSB 5 12 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 5 0 5 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes 66 From the TekScope application menu bar select Vertical gt Offset gt Select Ch2 gt enter 0 Volts in Offset box 67 From the TekScope application menu bar click the App software button 68 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement 69 Record the results in Table B 27 70 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Resolution should read 8 bit Table B 27 10 bit Linearity B Channel Level 3 of 4 Linearity Lower limit B Upper limit Resolution Bits 8 8 8 Max INL LSB 5 12 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 5 0 5 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes 71 From the TekScope application menu bar select Vertical gt Offset gt Select Ch2 gt enter 0 175 Volts in Offset box VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 41 Appendix B Performance Verification 72 73 74 75 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the App software button From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement Reco
67. cloth or a soft bristle brush If any dirt remains use a cloth or swab dipped in a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution Use a swab to clean narrow spaces around controls and connectors Do not use abrasive compounds on any part of the chassis Clean the On Standby switch using a dampened cleaning towel Do not spray or wet the switch directly CAUTION Do not use chemical cleaning agents that might damage the plastics used in this instrument Use only deionized water when cleaning the front panel buttons Use a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution as a cleaner and rinse with deionized water Before using any other type of cleaner consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative To prevent getting moisture inside the instrument during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator Flat Panel Display Cleaning A The display is soft plastic and must be treated with care during cleaning CAUTION Improper cleaning agents or methods can damage the flat panel display Do not use abrasive cleaners or commercial glass cleaners to clean the display surface Do not spray liquids directly on the display surface Do not scrub the display with excessive force VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual C 1 Appendix C Cleaning Clean the flat panel display surface by gently rubbing the display with a clean room wipe such as Wypall Medium Duty Wipes 05701 available from Kimberly Cla
68. down menu Format Select 2048 x 1536 resolution and 85 Hz refresh rate VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 29 Appendix B Performance Verification 10 11 12 From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Measure ment gt Clear All From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Measure ment gt H Sync On the AWG710B Load the H sync test file and setup from the floppy drive by following these steps a Load the floppy disk containing the AWG710B set and wfm files into the AWG710B b Load the pvhsyncsetup set setup file Press buttons in the following sequence setup button gt Save Restore bottom gt restore setup right gt drive right gt floppy center gt OK right gt pvhsyncsetup set middle gt OK right On the AWG710B Output the test signal from AWG710B by following these steps a Press the CH1 button and enable signal output from Channel 1 b Press the MARKER OUT button and enable signal output from MKR 1 c Press the Run button to start generating the signal From the VM5000 application menu bar run H Sync measurement Click the Run button to take the measurement to autoscale From the VM5000 application menu bar deselect disable Auto Scale select Configuration gt Operations gt Auto Scale gt deselect disable From the VM5000 application menu bar run the H Sync measurement Click the Run button to take th
69. female female adapter To do this the latching ring must be rotated to the full clockwise position as viewed from the pin side of the probe housing Then carefully insert the BNC adapter noting the location of the slots for the BNC ears NOTE Take care not to short the probe housing pins to the BNC adapter shell while inserting it Momentarily shorted pins will not damage the MIU but can cause it to change operating mode 9 Connect the cable coming from the tracking generator and 6 dB attenuator to the MIU H input BNC 10 Using Hyperterminal send the query LOAD to the MIU Verify that you receive the response load 0110000 This checks that the MIU operating mode did not change as a result of disconnecting the CH4 coaxial cable NOTE If the string is not correct send the command LOAD 0110000 to the MIU 11 Decrease the analyzer Reference Level by 34dB from the Reference Level selected in step 5 For example if the Reference Level is 6 dBm then decrease it to 40 dBm The frequency response of the H channel should be visible in approximately the same position as was the normalized display of step 6 NOTE Take care in identifying the correct signal trace On many analyzers two traces the H channel frequency response with and without normalization will be visible The proper signal trace is the one that is closest to the position of the normalized display of step 6 12 Measure the loss difference
70. for an 8 bit staircase test signal and in PNG format for a 10 bit staircase test signal If you plan to take only Linearity measurements use a Staircase Full Field test pattern Select the bitmap file that matches the format and the refresh rate of the test For example look for a 640x480 Staircase bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format You can also use a Matrix signal as a test signal For more information on the Matrix signal refer to page 2 16 For example look for a 640x480 Matrix bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format By using a staircase signal the bit resolution of the device under test can be determined The integral and differential linearity values should be close to zero under ideal conditions The Linearity of an input signal is calculated by using the RGB wide bandwidth signal path of the MIU VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information Normalized Integral Linearity Error is calculated as follows _ Vactval V idealval NormIntegLinErr LSBe where NormIntegLinErr is the Normalized Integral Linearity Error V actval is the actual voltage amplitude of the step V idealval is the ideal voltage amplitude of the step LSBc for an 8 bit DAC is given by se amplitude of 255th step Voltage amplitude of Oth en 255 Normalized Differential Linearity Error is calculated as follows NormDiffLinErr Semaine peame LSBc wher
71. format as set by Setup Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Average Sets the number of acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value Color Bars Displays the amplitude for the White Yellow Cyan Green Results in mV Magenta Red Blue and Black colors on the G B and R channels 24 measurements total Results are reported on the Measured tab and if enabled on the Relative Reference and Limits tabs H Sync Sync is the pulse occurring from 2 4 V to 5 5 V at the beginning of each line This pulse signal causes the monitor to go back to the left side of the display and trace another horizontal line of picture information This measurement measures rise time fall time overshoot undershoot settling time and monotonicity This measurement measures the steady state voltage and current amplitudes of logic levels 1 and 0 at 2 21 kQ and 301 termination H Sync Line Number Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value Measurement depends on the input signal format as set by Setup Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Average Sets the number of acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value H Sync Displays the Polarity Pos Neg Pulse Width us Results Sync Period us Frequency kHz Rise Time n
72. nearest 0 1 mV Take care to notice the dimensional units reported on the multimeter readout for the 700 mV reading the unit is probably Volts while the ground reading is probably in millivolts 10 Select OUTPUT OFF Disconnect the min loss pad from the BNC T adapter leaving the other end of the pad connected to the coaxial cable This completes the 9500B signal output amplitude determination Table B 7 Format for Luminance level measurement results 9500B Amplitude Setting Multimeter reading Table B 8 Example for Luminance level measurement results 9500B Amplitude Setting Multimeter reading DC700 1 1056V 700 1 mV Part 2 Check Amplitude Measurement Accuracy The perform the initial set up of the VM5000 as follows 1 The Part 1 procedure should have been performed just before this portion This will minimize errors from potential thermal drift in the 9500B Oscilloscope Calibrator and min loss pad You must use the same Calibrator and min loss pad from Part 1 and the ambient temperature must be within 5 C of that during Part 1 2 Ensure that the MIU is fully connected CH1 4 AUX RS 232 to the VM5000 Nothing should be connected to the five MIU input BNCs 3 Ifthe VM5000 VGA Video application is not already running start it now from the TekScope menu bar select File gt Run Application gt VM5000 VGA Video 4 In the VM5000 VGA Video application select the default setup from the VMS5000 VGA Video a
73. of setting 100 ns Trigger holdoff range 1 5 us to 12 s minimum resolution is 8 us for settings lt 1 2ms A 10 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 4 Display specifications Characteristic Description Display Type 264 mm 10 4 in diagonal liquid crystal active matrix color display Width 211 2 mm 8 3 in Length 158 4 mm 6 2 in Display resolution 640 horizontal x 480 vertical pixels Pixel pitch 0 33 mm horizontal 0 33 mm vertical Contrast ratio typical 150 1 Response time typical 50 ms black to white Display refresh rate 59 94 frames per second Display Format YT XY XYZ Displayed intensity levels Supports Windows SVGA high color mode 16 bit or 24 bit Waveform Styles Vectors Dots Intensified Samples Variable Persistence Infinite Persistence Table A 5 Input output port specifications Characteristic Description Probe Compensator Output Front panel terminals Output voltage Frequency 1 0 V from base to top 1 kHz 5 1 0 into a 10 kQ load Analog Signal Output Rear panel BNC connector provides a buffered version of the signal that is attached to the channel 3 signal input 50 mV div 20 into a 1 MQ load 25 mV div 20 into a 50 Q load Bandwidth typical 100 MHz into a 50 Q load Auxiliary Output levels Rear panel BNC connector provides a TTL compatible negative polarity pulse for each A or B trigger selectable Vout high Vout low
74. of the Warning Types Reported is selected Control Options is enabled If Log Warnings to File is checked the warnings are written to a file named Log txt Warnings are appended to the Log txt file until it reaches 1 MB in size At that point it is renamed LogOld txt and a new Log txt file is created If the new file reaches 1 MB in size it will be renamed LogOld txt and be written over the existing LogOld txt file If you wish to save the data in the LogOld txt file you must save the file under a different name before it is overwritten If Pop Up Warning Details is selected then a message box appears on the screen To avoid interruptions to your testing Clear all the Warning reporting Sets the measurement or measurements options to Relative Result Display and Limit Testing Selecting Enable Relative Result Display enables the Relative to Reference testing This is a fast and easy way to create a reference file Select Default to automatically load the Tektronix reference file The only valid entry is csv The actual file can be a text file if it is formatted as a comma separated value file To get valid test results be sure to choose the appropriate reference file The correct csv reference file will have the appropriate values for each of the measurements Select Manual to enable the user defined Select Reference File Click Select Reference File to open the file chooser to browse and select the file Without selecting
75. on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the Non Linearity measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements Setting Up the Short Time Distortion Measurement Option SD HD To set up the Short Time Distortion measurements select Results gt Short Time Distortion to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that can be changed for the measurement For Short time Distortion you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change settings for the Short Time Distortion measu
76. output Connect a 50 Q BNC cable to the other end of the attenuator Connect a second Type N to BNC adapter and 6 dB attenuator to the spectrum analyzer input and connect the other end of this attenuator to a second 50 Q BNC cable Connect the two cables together with a 50 Q BNC female female adapter Adjust the analyzer Reference Level control until the displayed signal is entirely on screen over the frequency range 1 MHz to 1800 MHz Using the analyzer Display memory store the swept display Activate the active display minus stored display mode sometimes called B minus Save A A straight line display with less than 0 2 dB ripple should appear typically at mid screen This is the frequency response with the flatness errors of the tracking generator attenuators spectrum analyzer and cables normalized out Connect two 75 50 min loss pads together using a 75 Q BNC female female adapter Insert this connection in place of the 50 Q BNC female female adapter Decrease the analyzer Reference Level by 11 dB so that the frequency response of the series connected min loss pads can be observed Measure the response at 1500 MHz relative to 1 MHz and record this value VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First Read This First in Table 4 column C1 Divide this value by 2 and enter it in column C2 The value in column C2 is the average 1500 MHz response for the two pads NOTE The display will typ
77. panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the Multiburst measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the Noise Measurement 3 74 Option SD HD To set up the Noise measurements select Results gt Noise to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that can be changed for the measurement For noise you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged You can specify the filter type and the cut off frequency of bandwidth filter To change settings for the Noise measurements VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements 1
78. reference file see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 Limit Values If Limit testing is enabled see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for each signal format and color space 3 106 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Additional Units Select the min option to display the minimum values for the measurement Select the max option to display the maximum values for the measurement Refer to Figure 3 28 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Multiburst Measured Limits de r Unit mV M Line Number YIG FraPb B Amp FrqaPvR AmpPrR zi 4 0 06 o 0 45 1 0 0 45 X o 0 0 0 o Average Figure 3 28 Displaying limit values for the Multiburst measurement The only additional unit in the Results pane for Multiburst measurement is under the Measured tab and Relative tab Displaying Noise Measurement Results Option SD HD Measured Values Configure the Noise measurements as explained in Setting Up the Noise Measurement on page 3 74 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Noise Refer to Figure 3 29 File Configuration Results Utilities Help ABO Results Noise Filter Unwelghted Bw Measured Relative Reference Limite Ea E Unweighted BW A Ba
79. right is recommended Interpreting Results For multiburst signals free of non linear distortion and with increasing burst frequencies the Frq MHz column displays the fundamental frequency of burst specified in each row The Amp dB column has the magnitude of the corresponding burst However if non linear distortion is present interpreting results may be less straight forward In many consumer set top boxes lack of a reconstruction filter with out of band rejection plus sin x x correction leads to roll off in the fundamental frequency component of the bursts even though the envelope of the bursts may be flat on average In this case the amplitude results for the highest frequency may be low by a few dB even though the waveform shows the same burst with peak to peak amplitude closer to 0 dB This indicates that the burst is no longer a pure windowed sinusoid but has other spectral content at least one alias frequency in VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 33 Option SD HD Detailed Measurement Information How Results are Calculated Noise 3 34 Signal Source Interpreting Results How Results are Calculated this example If the extra spectral content is removed by filtering the resulting sinusoid will have the amplitude shown in the results Generally if the signal has undergone processing without a required anti alias filter as in re sampling for format conversion or signal reco
80. setups Setup Only The application configures the instrument for a measurement but does not take the measurement Use this to set up customized settings Customized settings might include changes to the instrument Horizontal or Vertical front panel controls to display and measure a non supported video signal standard Click Run to try out the settings make adjustments as needed for example change the horizontal scale and then click Run again Once you are satisfied with the customizations use the Run Only setting to collect results Run Only This setting uses the current instrument and application settings to take a measurement Use this for taking measurements after you setup the instrument by using Setup Only to create custom settings Run Mode Once The application takes each selected measurement the number of times required for the average you have selected and then stops taking measurements Run Mode Continuously This setting continually takes measurements in the order the measurements are listed in the Configuration gt Measurements view Select Stop to stop measurements Once amp Report The application takes each selected measurement the number of times determined by the averaging setting then stops taking measurements and generates a report VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Menu Descriptions Menu Item Function Setting or field Description Auto Scale Enabled Select the Enabled check box to
81. tab to display the measured values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 If Limit testing is enabled see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for the supported combination of resolution refresh rate and timing standard Select the min option to display the minimum limit values for the measurement Select the max option to display the maximum limit values for the measurement Refer to Figure 3 48 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results H Sync Jitter _ on Measured Relative Reference Limits x xX min Ho of Lines Q max T Pixel Clock 100 H Sync Jitter 38 15 0 f Figure 3 48 Limit values for the H Sync Jitter measurement The only additional unit available in the Results window for the H Sync Jitter measurement is in the Measured tab and the Relative tab VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Displaying H Timing Measurement Results Option VGA Measured Values Relative Values Reference Value
82. tables the Resolution portion of the performance verification for this channel has failed 107 Determine maximum INL find the worst case INL value from Table B 30 to Table B 33 and enter the resulting value or this value plus the INL value from Table B 18 on page B 35 whichever has the largest absolute value under Max INL LSB in Table B 34 on page B 46 108 Determine maximum DNL find the worst case DNL value from Table B 30 to Table B 33 and enter the resulting value under Max DNL LSB in Table B 34 on page B 46 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 45 Appendix B Performance Verification 109 Determine monotonicity enter Yes in under Monotonic Y N if and only if the corresponding values of each of Table B 30 to Table B 33 are Yes Otherwise enter No in Table B 34 on page B 46 110 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Table B 34 10 bit Linearity R Channel All Levels Linearity R Upper limit Resolution Bits C 10 Max INL LSB 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 5 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes This completes the VM5000 Option VGA performance verification B 46 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual SS Appendix C Cleaning Exterior Cleaning Use these procedures to clean your instrument If additional cleaning is required have your instrument serviced by qualified service personnel Clean the exterior surfaces of the chassis with a dry lint free
83. the Instrument on page 1 8 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 1 7 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Installation Powering On the Instrument A On Standby gt switch Follow these steps to power on the instrument for the first time CAUTION To ensure proper operation connect the keyboard mouse and other accessories before applying power to the product the first time 1 Connect one end of the instrument power cord to the instrument and the other end to a power source 2 Push the On Standby switch to power on the instrument see Figure 1 3 for the switch location 0 0 00 000 0 j0 o w d o 0 O 000000 00 D0000 LS I Q Figure 1 3 On Standby switch location Shutting Down the Instrument 1 8 To shut down the instrument push the front panel On Standby switch The instrument preserves settings and then starts a shutdown process including a Windows shutdown to put the instrument into standby mode Avoid disconnect ing the power cord or power source to shut down the instrument NOTE If you remove power instead of using the On Standby switch to shut down the instrument the instrument will be in the factory Default Setup when powered on the next time If the shutdown process does not start immediately after pushing the
84. the maximum values Refer to Figure 3 38 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Sync Measured Relative Reference i Limits 9 min Line Number 485 Average 1 Ti Measured on CH1 Figure 3 38 Displaying limit values for the Sync measurement Displaying Ch Ch Mismatch Measurement Results Option VGA Configure the Ch Ch Mismatch measurement as explained in Setting Up the Ch Ch Mismatch Measurement on page 3 84 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Ch Ch Mismatch Refer to Figure 3 39 E File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Ch Ch Mismatch 2 Measured Relative Reference Limits Br m Line Humber m Peak Peak E 358 Average Cg 4 Figure 3 39 Ch Ch Mismatch measurement results VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 113 Viewing Measurement Results Measured Values Relative Values Reference Values Limit Values 3 114 Click the Measured tab to display the measured values in mV and Peak Peak If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 If Limit testing is enabled you can display the Limi
85. the minimum and maximum level from the five white and black bars of the active video for each of the three channels Luma Levels Line Number Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value Measurement depends on the input signal format as set by Setup Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Average Sets the number of acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value Luma Levels Displays the Max and the Min luminance of the displayed image Results in mV on the G B and R channels Results are reported on the Measured tab and if enabled on the Relative Reference and Limits tabs Noise Inj Ratio Noise Injection Ratio is the noise injected in the VGA output for the Device Under Test It is the amount of noise relative to the signal amplitude rather than the absolute amount of noise that tends to cause problems Noise Inj Ratio measures the signal to noise ratio of the three channels simultaneously Noise Inj Ratio Line Number Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value Measurement depends on the input signal format as set by Setup Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Average Sets the number of acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value Noise Inj Ratio Displays the Noise mV dB and Inj Ratio on th
86. time this manual was published Consult a current Tektronix catalog or the Tektronix Web site for additions changes and details Table 1 5 Optional Accessories Accessories Transit Case Video Display Clamp Thermal Printer Paper Probe Calibration Compensation and Deskew Adapter Requires a separate pulse generator Power Deskew Fixture Extra Front Removable Hard Drive P6101B 15 MHz 1X Passive Probe Extra P5050 500 MHz 10X Passive Probe VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Part Number 016 1937 00 013 0278 XX 016 1897 00 067 0405 XX 067 1478 00 065 0692 XX P6101B P5050 1 27 Options and Accessories Table 1 5 Optional Accessories Cont Accessories Part Number TCPA300 TCPA400 Series Current Measurement Systems TCPA300 TCPA400 requires TCPA300 TCPA400 style probe AMT75 1 GHz 75 W Adapter AMT75 AFTDS Differential Signal Adapter AFTDS K420 Scope Cart with mouse accessory tray 436 0317 XX TDS5000 Series VM5000 Option HD rackmount kit 016 1887 XX GPIB cable 3 3 frt 1 m 012 0991 01 GPIB cable 6 6 ft 2m 012 0991 00 Centronics cable 012 1250 00 1 28 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual y Operating Basics SEE a Operating Basics This section provides basic information on how to use VM5000 More detailed measurement information can be found in the Reference section Input Signal Connection Requirements Option SD HD Option VGA Use only 75 Q coa
87. to the BNC adapter shell while inserting it Momentarily shorted pins will not damage the MIU but can cause it to change operating mode 10 Decrease the analyzer Reference Level an additional 13dB from the level of step 8 a total of 24 dB from the Reference Level of step 6 The frequency response of the MIU G channel should be visible VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First 17 Read This First 18 NOTE Take care in identifying the correct signal trace On many analyzers two traces the H channel frequency response with and without normalization will be visible The proper signal trace is the one that is closest to the the position of the normalized display of step 6 11 12 13 14 15 Measure the loss difference between low frequency far left side of trace and that at 1500 MHz The measurement method will vary with analyzer model Many analyzers have amplitude cursor modes to simplify this type of measurement Usually the most accurate way to make this measurement and the method to use for an analyzer without amplitude cursor modes is to vary the analyzer Reference Level a Using the fine Reference Level adjust position the left side of the signal trace to a convenient reference line such as a graticule line or marker b Note the Reference Level reading and then adjust the Reference Level control until the signal trace at 1500 MHz aligns with the same reference line
88. until the Loading SETUP message appears 5 Inthe BIOS Setup Utility use the keyboard right arrow key to highlight the Advanced menu at the top of the screen 6 Use the arrow down key to highlight Peripheral Configuration in the Advanced screen and then press Enter 7 Use the arrow down key to highlight LAN Device in the Peripheral Configuration screen and then press Enter 8 Use the arrow up or down key to highlight Enabled and then press Enter VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 1 11 Installation 10 Press the F10 key to save and quit Confirm Save of the configuration changes when you are prompted on screen Use the Windows network setup utility to define the instrument as a network client and configure it for your network You can find the network setup utility in the Windows Start menu if you select Settings gt Control Panel and then double click Network You should consult your network adminis trator for specific instructions to make these settings Adjusting Display Contrast If you find that the instrument screen is too bright or too dark use these steps to adjust the LCD display contrast to your preference You must have a mouse attached to perform this procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pa Right click the Windows desktop Select Properties Select the Settings tab Click Advanced Select the Color tab Adjust the slider control for the desired gamma setting The screen
89. up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average az VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 85 Setting Up Measurements There are three ways to change the number Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the Ch Ch Skew measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the Color Bars Measurement 3 86 Option VGA To set up the Color Bars measurement select Results gt Color Bars to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that you can change for the measurement For Color Bars you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change the settings for the Color Bars measurement 1 On the menu bar click Results gt Color Bars 2 To change the line number click the Line Number box Line Number e 204 There are three ways to change the line number Turn the top knob on the fro
90. values are obtained for the signal noise regardless of bandwidth of the measurement devices With the 500 MHz Filter option selected the data is low pass filtered with a single pole filtered with the response shown See Figure 3 3 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information Figure 3 3 Frequency response with 500 MHz filter for Noise In Ratio measurement Signal Source The test signal used for the Noise Injection Ratio measurement is Full White which is located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM If you plan to take only Noise Inj Ratio measurements use a Full White Full Field test pattern Select the bitmap file that matches the format and refresh rate of the test For example use the 640x480 FullWhite bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format You can also use a Matrix signal as a test signal For more information on the Matrix signal refer to page 2 16 For example use the 640x480 Matrix bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format Interpreting Results When the injection ratio is below a certain threshold noise will not be perceived With the injection ratio greater than the threshold perceived image quality is degraded as a function of noise injection ratio Noise Injection Ratio in dB is less negative when the noise amplitude increases How Results are Using a Full White signal the peak to peak fluctuation in luminance voltage of Calculated at least 100 00
91. will typically read between 10 Qand 11 Q If the reading is around 75 2 check that the BNC short is fully inserted into the MIU CH1 coaxial cable BNC and that the RGB LF Path LED is illuminated 9 Remove the BNC short and reconnect the MIU CH1 coaxial cable to the VM5000 CH1 input 10 Connect the BNC T adapter to the B input BNC on the MIU 11 Disconnect the MIU CH2 coaxial cable from the VM5000 and connect the BNC short to the cable end as described in step 6 12 Check that the green LED in the RGB LF Path is still illuminated If not using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 0000000 to the MIU Verify that the LED in the RGB LF Path is now illuminated NOTE The V channel and H V LF Path LEDs will also be illuminated 13 CHECK that the Multimeter reads less than 15 0 Q NOTE The multimeter will typically read between 10 Q and 11 Q If the reading is around 75 Q check that the BNC short is fully inserted into the MIU CH2 coaxial cable BNC and that the RGB LF Path LED is illuminated VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First 7 Read This First 14 Remove the BNC short and reconnect the MIU CH2 coaxial cable to the VMS5000 CH2 input 15 Connect the BNC T adapter to the R input BNC on the MIU 16 Disconnect the MIU CH3 coaxial cable from the VM5000 and connect the BNC short to the cable end just as was done for CH1 and described in step 6 above 17 Chec
92. you to verify that a signal appears on screen that is about five divisions in amplitude or has a period of about six horizontal divisions and so on do not interpret the quantities given as limits Do not change the front panel settings unless directed to by the procedure If you change front panel settings you may obtain invalid results In this case redo the procedure from step 1 When you are instructed to press a front panel button or screen button the button may already be selected its label is lighted If this is the case it is not necessary to press the button VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Incoming Inspection 1 Set the video generator to output 1080i 60 100 for option HD color bars or 4801 60 100 color bars for option SD 2 Connect the signal generator to the VM5000 instrument as shown in the following diagram VM5000 O BNC T S Poa connector TG700 with 5 AWVG7 module O U R e chi che CHa H CH4 Tx Sync YG PaB PIR Pickoff 3 Power on the VM5000 instrument and wait for it to complete the power on process 4 Select File gt Run Application gt VM5000 HD and SD video to display the VM5000 application window 5 In the application window select File gt Recall Default to load the application default setti
93. 0 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements Option SD HD There is a different file for each signal format and color space or Option VGA There is a different file for each signal resolution refresh rate and timing standard The reference files are saved in CSV format The VM5000 includes a set of default reference files and you can create your own reference file Reference values for all measurements are in one file Each format has its own reference file The reference file contains the details shown in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Elements of the reference file Option SD HD Option VGA Format Resolution Color Space type Refresh Rate type m Name of the measurement parameters measured with the nominal values There are two ways to create a custom reference file edit an existing reference file and capture a set of measurement results to create a new reference file Using an Existing One way to create a custom reference file is to edit an existing reference file The Reference File to Create a easiest way to edit a reference file is to use a spreadsheet program such as New Reference File Microsoft Excel or OpenOffice org See Figure 3 11 Because the files are in plain ASCII format you can also edit the files with a text editor If you choose to edit files with a text editor make sure that the CSV format is maintained B DefaultRef 20p60 YPbPr csy read only OpenOffice org 1 1 0 0 x File Edit View
94. 0 application menu bar run the Video Transient measure ment Click the Run button to take the measurement 12 Enter the results in Table B 14 and verify that the measured values are within the lower and upper limits Table B 14 Video rise fall time G Channel G Channel parameters Measured result Upper limit Video Rise Time ns 0 360 Po 0 540 Video Fall Time ns 0 360 fF 050 13 Move AWG710B CH1 output and min loss pad from MIU G to MIU B input B 32 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification Check Linearity Measurement Accuracy 14 From the VM5000 application menu bar run Video Transient measurement Click the Run button to take the measurement 15 Enter the results in Table B 15 and ensure that the measured values are within the lower and upper limits Table B 15 Video rise fall time B Channel B Channel parameters Measured result Upper limit Video Rise Time ns 0 360 0 540 Video Fall Time ns 0 360 I JOS 16 Move the AWG710B CH1 output and min loss pad from the MIU B input to the MIU R input 17 From the VM5000 application menu bar take the Video Transient measure ment Click the Run button to take the measurement 18 Enter the results in Table B 16 and verify that the measured values are within the lower and upper limits 19 At this point the AWG710B may be disconnected and turned off unless further verifica
95. 0 samples is measured The noise amplitude is measured with reference to oscilloscope ground The Noise Injection Ratio measurement uses the video wide bandwidth signal path of the MIU The maximum value of the fluctuation is used for computing the Noise Injection Ratio as shown in the Figure 3 4 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 51 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information V Sync Measurement 3 52 Voltage ripple and noise Figure 3 4 Voltage ripple and noise The noise amplitude is calculated as follows Noise amplitude mV af Vpeak peak NF where Vpeak peak is the peak to peak fluctuation in the input signal NF is the peak to peak fluctuation observed with oscilloscope channel coupling set to ground j lit Injection ratio Ms i as on x 100 Vsignal amplitude The signal to noise ratio in dB is calculated using the average signal amplitude The Vertical Sync measurement is used to check synchronization signal timing This measurement measures the steady state voltage amplitudes of logic levels T and 0 When the MIU is present a current source inside the MIU automati cally presents the required load so no manual intervention is required In the absence of the MIU external 2 21 kilo ohms and 301 ohms terminations have to be manual
96. 00 mV VESA Sec 6 6 Dis Noise Injection Ratio Measurement 0 75 played value corrected Range 1 1 to 2 1 for instrument noise Specification applies Noise Injection Ratio Measurement 1 with 500 MHz band Range 2 1 to 3 6 width filter and 10 averages selected Timing Measurement Channel Skew Measurement range 35 ns 500 ps Alternate implementa tion of VESA 6 7 Any two channels H Timing ns Front and Back Porch Left 360 ps 15 ppm x and Right Border Addressable Video reading H Sync Period H and V Sync Pulse width 80 ps 15 ppm x read ns ing V Sync Period us 20 ns 15 ppm x read Read out precision is ing 1 us V Timing lines Front and Back Porch Top Read out precision is and Bottom Border Addressable Lines 1 line Functions within 10 lines of VESA reference value Frequency Measurement H and V sync Frequency and Pixel Clock 0 01 of reading Frequency Transient Response Video Rise and Fall time Measurement range 5 of reading VESA 6 8 Video Tran gt 1 3ns sient Response Uti lizes Course grille Video Rise and Fall time Measurement range 10 of reading VESA Section 6 2 800 ps to 1 3 ns 6 3 6 8 Asymmetrical specification incorpo rates acquisition sys tem rise time Video Rise and Fall time Measurement range 20 of reading 450 ps to 800 ps RGB System Rise Time 350 ps typical VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual A 23 Appendix A Spec
97. 000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Select the min option to display the minimum limit values specified for the measurement Select the max option to display the maximum limit values specified for the measurement Refer to Figure 3 46 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results H Sync ee Measured Relative Reference Limits min Line Number e 384 Average Logic 500 5500 0 Logic 500 0 500 0 Figure 3 46 Limit values for the H Sync measurement In the Result panel of the H Sync measurement the parameters are different in the absence of MIU Additional Units The only additional unit available in the Results window for the H Sync measurement is in the Relative tab Displaying H Sync Jitter Measurement Results Option VGA Configure the H Sync Jitter measurements as explained in Setting Up the H Sync Jitter Measurement on page 3 88 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt H Sync Jitter Refer to Figure 3 47 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Measured Relative Reference Limits Results H Sync Jitter Ho of Lines amp e 100 Figure 3 47 H Sync Jitter measurement results VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 119 Viewing Measurement Results Measured Values Relative Values Reference Values Limit Values Additional Units 3 120 Click the Measured
98. 0085 p p VESA 7 1 p p sync sync amplitude amplitude logic 1 Characteristic Accuracy Description 1 8 voltage logic 0 volt age Ch Ch Mismatch mV 3 mV 3 6 of read 32 step staircase sig ing nal VESA Sec 6 5 Ch Ch Mismatch 0 4 3 6 Luma Channel voltage levels Level Max Luma measured relative to Level maximum back porch 4 Linearity Resolution Monotonicity Measure ment Integral Linearity VESA 6 4 Differential Linearity 20 25 18B bi Svons comment to 0 5 LSB 10 bit VESA limits for over shoot undershoot amplitude and settle time Monotonicity checks RGB Video Monotonicity 0 25 LSB 8 bit every step on the ramp to ensure signal is 0 5 LSB 10 bit always rising Resolution Measurement Range 5 to 10 bits cae measured HV Sync Monotonic Rise and Fall Detects monotonicity Checks sync for al errors as small as 1 ways rising and al of p p sync amplitude ways falling character istic Requires VESA compliant amplitude noise rise and fall VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 14 Option VGA Video Measurements Cont Characteristic Accuracy Description Noise Measurement Noise mV Measurement Range 8 15 mV 5 25 mV Measurement of RGB noise on constant ped Noise mV Measurement Range 15 25 mV The lesser of 7 mV estal 0 to 700 mV 35 Output in mV Pk Pk ores dB below 7
99. 1 series con nected min loss pad A B 1500 MHz re sponse dB 0 6dB C2 Average c3 MIU C4 MIU 1500 MHz re 1500 MHz re 1500 MHz re sponse of sponse with sponse with C5 Average C6 Corrected single min loss min loss pad min loss pad MIU 1500 MHz MIU 1500 MHz pad dB response dB response 0 3dB 1 6dB 1 4dB 1 5dB 1 2dB C2 C1 2 C6 C5 C2 Test H H V Inputs WB Mode Bandwidth This test checks the bandwidth of the H and V inputs when the HV WB Path is active The specification is less than 3dB down at 320 MHz VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First 19 Read This First 20 The following equipment is required for the test Host VM5000 with mouse and keyboard Spectrum Analyzer with Tracking Generator 50 Q 6 dB Attenuator Qty 2 50 Q BNC cable Qty 2 Type N to BNC adapter Qty 2 50 Q BNC female female adapter Connect the MIU to the VM5000 apply power and establish communica tions using Hyperterminal as described in Test A of this procedure Using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 0110000 to the MIU Verify that the H input and HV WB Path LEDs are illuminated Set the tracking generator and spectrum analyzer controls as follows m Tracking Generator output level 0 dBm m Spectrum Analyzer Vertical scale 1 dB div m Spectrum Analyzer Reference Level 6 dBm m Horizontal scale Span 50 MHz div m Center Frequency 250 MHz 10 div di
100. 1 ns and Settling Time 2 ns of the video signal Measures the sync signal timing and voltage values The instrument measures the sync signal rise and fall times at the 10 and 90 signal amplitude levels and the sync pulse width at the 50 signal amplitude level to determine the signal timing values Sync Measure Line Number Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value ment Setup depends on the input signal format as set by Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Average 1 Sets the number of measurements acquisitions over which to calculate the average measurement value Measured on CH1 Results in better measurement accuracy when triggering on CH4 Tri Level Displays the sync signal timing values in ns and the signal levels Sync Results in mV Results that are meaningless for bi level sync appear as dashes VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 19 Menu Descriptions Option VGA If you change the Line Number or Average values for any measurement then the changed measurement will stop execution and its results will change to dashes All the selected measurement results will be invalidated any time you change the following configurations m Resolution m Refresh Rate Timing If you change a configuration that is recall a setup while running a measurement the measurement will stop execution
101. 1 5 3 0 x net of 16 waveforms acquired offset offset range x under the same setup and reading net offset ambient conditions 0 1 div x V div 0 3 mV Where net offset offset position x volts division Nonlinearity typical lt 1 LSB differential lt 1 LSB integral independently based VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 1 Channel input and vertical specifications Cont Characteristic Effective bits typical Sine wave input at the indicated fre quency and pk pk amplitude 50 mV div and 25 C Description Signal and input conditions Signal and input conditions 1 MHz 9 2 div 5 GS s 6 6 bits sample rate Sample acquisition mode 1 MHz 9 2 div 10 MS s sample rate HiRes acquisi tion mode 1 GHz 6 5 div 5 GS s sample rate Sample acquisition mode 9 0 bits 4 7 bits Table A 2 Horizontal and acquisition system specifications Characteristic Acquisition modes Fast acquisition rate Minimum record length Maximum record length Standard Option 3M installed Sample rate range real time VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Description Sample Peak detect Hi Res Average and Envelope Up to 100 000 waveforms per second with Fast Acquisition mode on Up to 130 waveforms per second with Fast Acquisition mode off 500 points Depends on number of active channels and amount of memor
102. 2 2 Option SD HD Matrix signal elements Signal Name Format Signal Name Format Signal Name Format 1 Color bars All 7 YPbPr Sweep YPbPr 13 Valid Ramp All Time 2 RGB Pulse RGB 8 YPbPr YPbPr 14 YPbPr Shallow YPbPr Bars Multiburst Ramp 3 RGB RGB 9 YPbPr YPbPr 15 RGB Shallow YPbPr Frequency Sweep Multiburst Ramp 4 RGB Time RGB 10 YPbPr YPbPr 16 Flat Field 7 5 YPbPr Sweep Multiburst 5 RGB RGB 11 RGB Crosstalk YPbPr 17 Flat Field 50 YPbPr Multiburst 6 RGB Pulse RGB 12 YPbPr YPbPr 18 Flat Field YPbPr Bars Crosstalk 100 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 17 Operating Basics Figure 2 24 shows the Option VGA Matrix test signal Table 2 3 shows the signal elements Figure 2 24 Option VGA Matrix test signal Table 2 3 Elements of Option VGA Matrix Signal Signal Name Signal Name 1 Half White and Half Black 5 Black White Black 2 Nine Colorbars 6 Full White 3 32 Steps 7 Ramp 4 Alternate White and Black 8 Half White and Half Black The addressable line number pattern of the matrix signal is based on the following equations Half White and Half Black Bars 1 9 5 Nine Color Bars 10 5 29 5 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics 32 Steps 30 5 39 5 Alternate White and Black Bars 40 5 49 5 Black White Black Bars 50 5 59 5 Full White 60 5 69 5 Staircase 70 5 89 5 Half White and Half Black
103. 4 m The Operation menu Run Mode default setting has changed from Continu ously to Once m The Report Generator Format setting now has two CSV options CSV VMS5000 and CSV Legacy m The CSV Legacy format is identical to the VM5000HD CSV format This is provided for customers who perform data reduction on the CSV file It does not include any information on new measurements m The CSV VM5000 format includes information on all the new measurements and options for example Relative to Reference and Limit Testing results are included in the report Firmware Upgrade Tektronix may offer firmware upgrade kits for the VM5000 instrument Contact your Tektronix service representative for more information refer to Contacting Tektronix at the beginning of the manual Recommended Oscilloscope Probes Table 1 1 lists the recommended oscilloscope probes to use when using the instrument as an oscilloscope Table 1 1 Recommended Probes Probe type Tektronix probe Passive 10X 500 MHz P5050 Passive 100X 250 MHz high voltage P5100 Passive 1000K 100 MHz high voltage P6015A Passive 15 MHz 1X P6101B Active DC to 1 0 GHz FET high speed digital P6243 for CMOS TTL technology Active DC to 1 5 GHz FET high speed digital P6245 for all technologies Active DC to 400 MHz FET high bandwidth differential P6246 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 1 3 Product Description 1 4
104. 5 2 kb s Upper video port DB 15 female connector connect a second monitor to use dual monitor display mode supports Basic requirements of PC99 specifications Display resolutions up to 1 920 X 1 440 IEEE 488 2 standard interface Can be configured for talk listen or controller mode Lower video port DB 15 female connector 31 6 kHz sync EIA RS 343A compliant connect to show the oscilloscope display including live waveforms on an external monitor or projector Front panel BNC connectors 3 for 3 wire CAV A fourth BNC for separate composite sync or H sync on RGBHV signals A 12 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 5 Input output port specifications Cont Characteristic Video Input Description A fifth BNC auxiliary input for V sync on RGBHV signals Trigger level range is adjustable from 8 V to 8 V The maximum input voltage is 20 V DC peak AC and input resistance is 1 5 kQ Table A 6 Data storage specifications Characteristic CD ROM Floppy disk Hard disk Description Side panel CD R W drive reads CD CD ROM CD R and CD R W disks 24X read speed 24X write speed Front panel 3 5 in USB floppy disk drive 1 44 MB capacity Standard internal hard disk capacity 80 GB External hard disk capacity refer to added options Table A 7 Power source specifications Characteristic Source voltage and frequency Power consumpti
105. 700 minus DCO Move the BNC cable from the upper CH2 connector to the upper CH 3 connector on the AWVG7 generator module Enter the digital multimeter reading in Table B 2 row DCO column CH 3 On the TG700 press the left or right arrow button to select 700 397 mV Press the ENTER button Enter the digital multimeter reading in Table B 2 row DC700 column CH 3 Move the BNC cable from the upper CH3 connector to the upper CH 2 connector on the AWVG7 generator module Enter the digital multimeter reading in Table B 2 row DC700 column CH 2 Move the BNC cable from the upper CH2 connector to the upper CH 1 connector on the AWVG7 generator module Enter the digital multimeter reading in Table B 2 row DC700 column CH 1 Subtract the DCO values from the DC700 values for each of the three channels in Table B 2 The resulting three numbers are the Blanking to White levels for each channel CH1 CH2 CH3 Check Absolute This test verifies the measurement amplitude accuracy of the three video input Amplitude Measurement channels CH1 CH2 CH3 and digitizers This checks the accuracy Accuracy specification for the Color Bars measurement Multiburst Flag amplitude and Sync Amplitude The accuracy specification for all three is 2mV 1 5 of reading B 4 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification Required equipment Prerequisites HD CAV
106. 73 XX in English and a Korean German Spanish Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese or Japanese translation if a language option was ordered VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 071 1522 XX VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Programmer Manual 071 1574 XX in PDF format on VM5000 Product Software CD VM5000 Complete Signal Set Option SD only 020 2610 XX VM5000 Signal Set Option SD HD Only 020 2611 XX VM5000 PC Graphics Test Signal Files Option VGA only 020 2634 XX 1 24 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Options and Accessories Table 1 3 Standard Accessories cont Accessory TDS5000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Quick Start User Manual English Option LO French Option L1 German Option L2 Japanese Option L5 Simplified Chinese Option L7 Traditional Chinese Option L8 Korean Option L9 Russian Option L10 Oscilloscope Analysis and Connectivity Made Easy manual with software VM5000 Product Software CD ROM includes VM5000 product software with online help VM5000 User Manual PDF VM5000 Quick Start User Manual PDF and release notes TDS5000B Series Product Software CD ROM that includes TDS5000B product software including online help TDS5000B Programmer Guide GPIB online help and PDF Performance Verification PDF release notes VISA information TDS5000B Series Operating System Restore CD ROM TDS5000B Series Optional Applications Software CD ROM Getting St
107. 8 m parity None m Stop bits 1 Flow Control None After changing the settings click OK The Hyperterminal window should be open as connection MIU Select File gt Properties The MIU Properties window will appear Select the Settings tab followed by clicking the ASCII Setup button Select Echo typed characters locally and Send line ends with line feeds Click OK to close the ASCII Setup window and then click OK to close the MIU Properties window From the keyboard type ID The MIU should identify itself returning a response similar to id miu_v1 0 If there is no response double check all electrical connections and the Hyperterminal settings described above VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First Read This First NOTE If typed keyboard characters appear in duplicate for example IIDD the MIU echo is on Turn the echo off by typing ECHO OFF If the terminal appears to operate properly save the configuration by selecting File gt Save in the Hyperterminal window For convenience place a shortcut on the Windows desktop as this terminal connection will be used throughout this Performance Verification procedure Test B RGB LF Mode DC Termination Accuracy This test verifies the accuracy of the internal 75 Q terminations connected to the G B and R inputs when the RGB LF path is active The specification for all three terminations is 75 Q 0 3 The following equipment is required fo
108. A 14 Option VGA Video Measurements A 22 Table A 15 RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit MIU A 24 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual ix Table of Contents Table B 1 Required test equipment for Option SD HD performance VERA CALION seeto eaten re terse ene tol 01a oti E Sted ets haere Rig eran es Table B 2 Measured blanking to white levels Table B 3 White bar measurement ccceeeeeevees Table B 4 Example white bar measurement values Table B 5 Delay error measurements cceeeeceees Table B 6 Required test equipment for Option VGA performance Verification 6 cece cece cc ce reece ree eee e eee EE Table B 7 Format for Luminance level measurement results Table B 8 Example for Luminance level measurement results Table B 9 Amplitude measurement results 0e000 Table B 10 Table B 11 Table B 12 Table B 13 Table B 14 Table B 15 Table B 16 Table B 17 Table B 18 Table B 19 Table B 20 Table B 21 Table B 22 Table B 23 Table B 24 Table B 25 Table B 26 Table B 27 Table B 28 Table B 29 Table B 30 Table B 31 Table B 32 Table B 33 Table B 34 Example of Amplitude measurement results Noise Floor levels of G B and R Channels Channel Skew results of G B and R channels H Sync Transient measurement results Video rise fall time G Channel
109. B Series Product Software CD ROM VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Installation Desktop Applications You can install desktop application software on the instrument The instrument has been tested with the following software products installed m Microsoft Office 98 Word Excel PowerPoint m MathCad Option SD HD only m MATLAB Option SD HD only Other software products may be compatible but have not been tested by Tektronix If the instrument malfunctions after you install software uninstall the software and then reinstall the instrument software if necessary to restore proper operation Quitting the instrument Application Before installing other desktop applications quit the instrument application To do this select the File gt Exit command Connecting to a Network You can connect the instrument to a network to enable printing file sharing internet access and other communications functions Before you make the connection do the following steps to enable network access to the instrument NOTE If you want to disable network access for the instrument perform the following procedure except substitute Disabled for the command listed in step 8 The instrument will boot faster with network access disabled Begin with the instrument power off Attach a keyboard and mouse to the instrument Power on the instrument D a As the instrument begins to boot press the keyboard F2 key repeatedly
110. BNC is V If the distance from the test PC to the MIU is greater than 3 feet these cables may be extended 8 In the VM5000 VGA Video application select Configuration gt Measure ments Press Clear All then select Ch Ch Skew VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 27 Appendix B Performance Verification Check Transient Response Measurement Accuracy 9 Run the measurement Note the G to B measurement result including sign in row 1 of Table B 12 10 Reverse the G and B cable connections at the MIU and re run the measure ment 11 Note the G to B measurement result including sign in row 2 of Table B 12 12 Subtract line 2 from line 1 in Table B 12 Divide this result by 2 and enter it in row 3 of Table B 12 13 Reverse the G and B cable connections again to restore the original MIU connections G to G B to B 14 Repeat the procedure in steps 9 through 12 for the G to R measurement 15 Repeat the procedure in steps 9 through 12 for the B to R measurement 16 Check that the net delay error row 3 is less than 2 ns for G to B G to R and BtoR 17 Remove the 3 foot VGA cable and reconnect the monitor to the Test PC Close the Microsoft Paint program Table B 12 Channel Skew results of G B and R channels Connection 1 Connection 2 Net skew error Equation 3 Equation 3 Connection 1 Connection 2 2 This test verifies the Transient Response of VM5000 The Trans
111. Backing up user files 1 9 Baseband files Matrix test pattern E 2 Buttons All 3 25 App restore hidden application 2 22 Auto Scale On Off 3 7 3 12 CSV 3 25 exit 2 23 Generate Report 2 52 2 53 hide 2 22 input signal format 2 25 Open load measurement settings 2 50 PDF 3 25 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual picture 2 22 refresh rate 2 26 RTF 3 25 Run 2 22 Run Only 3 6 Save measurement settings 2 48 Selected 3 25 Setup amp Run 3 6 3 Setup Only 3 6 3 8 Stop 2 22 sync signal trigger channel select 2 31 8 C Calibration 2 12 CD ROMs product software 1 10 Ch Ch Mismatch displaying 3 113 setting up 3 84 Ch Ch Mismatch detailed measurement information 3 40 Ch Ch Skew detailed measurement information 3 41 displaying 3 115 setting up 3 85 Changing Measurement Settings 2 45 Channel Delay detailed measurement information 3 28 displaying 3 101 setting up 3 68 Cleaning exterior C 1 flat panel display C 1 Color Bars detailed measurement information 3 29 3 42 displaying 3 102 3 116 setting up 3 69 3 86 Compatibility of the VM5000 option HD to the VMSOOOHD 1 3 compensating sync pickoff Option SD HD 2 13 Compressed elementary stream files E 5 Compressed transport stream files E 4 Configuration menu 3 5 Connecting input signals 2 3 Connecting peripherals 1 7 Connecting to a network 1 11 Control Message Reporting Log Warning to File 2 33
112. Bars Measured Relative Reference Limits c Pb B 5 0 Line Number Average 1 Figure 3 23 Displaying limit values for the Color Bars measurement Additional Units The only additional unit available in the Results panel for the Color Bars measurement is under the Relative tab VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 103 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Viewing Measurement Results Displaying Frequency Response Measurement Results Option SD HD Configure the Frequency Response measurements as explained in Setting Up the Frequency Response Measurement on page 3 70 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Frequency Response Refer to Figure 3 24 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Frequency Response ae ee eer ee Meae Location _ Measured Limits EI a e Freq 4 4 4 Y 109 Average Freq MHz e j Dist DVW Mliz Time us e 25 Figure 3 24 Displaying the Frequency Response measurement Measured Values Click the Measured tab to display the Flag amplitude mV Frequency MHz Amplitude dB Time Position us and RMS Distortion of Amp measured values Relative Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 you can display the calculated relative values by clicking t
113. Bars 90 5 100 The actual line number which user enters in the application is calculated based on the following equation Active Line Number Vertical Sync Time Back Porch Addressable Line Number according percentage For 1280x1024 resolution 85 Hz refresh rate and DMT timing standard the Vertical Sync Line is 3 Vertical Back Porch is 44 For Half White and Half Black pattern The Start Active Line Number 3 44 1 48 The End Active Line Number 3 44 97 144 The line range for Half White and Half Black for 1280x1024 at 85 Hz would be 48 144 Table 2 4 shows an example of the resolutions and the corresponding line number ranges the DMT timing standard supports at 60 Hz refresh rate for Option VGA matrix signal Table 2 4 Resolutions and line number ranges supported at 60 Hz DMT standard for Option VGA 1280x 1600x 1920x 1920x Pattern 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1024 1200 1200 1440 1 Half White and 28 73 28 84 36 108 42 138 50 163 43 156 60 196 Half Black 4 Alternate White 221 265 270 324 346 415 456 548 535 643 528 636 642 772 and Black 5 BlackWhite 269 313 330 384 423 492 558 650 655 763 648 756 786 916 Black 6 Full White 317 361 361 390 444 500 569 661 753 775 883 883 768 876 876 930 1060 7 Ramp set 457 564 576 722 722 763 957 957 fae 1123 ene 1116 1074 1348 8 Half White and 461 507 ose 627 poem 803 Ee 1065 a 1249 Caa 1242 1362 1499 Half Black VMS5000 Automatic
114. C VM5000TV Option VGA default location is C VM5000PC File list area Filename list field Lists directories folders and setup files that are in the current directory as set by Look in File name Text entry field Field in which to enter an application setup file to load and apply You can also double click on a file name in the File list area to enter the name in the File Name field Files of type Drop down list box Lists the valid setup file types The only valid entry is vmset To get valid test results be sure to choose the appropriate setup file for the signal source you are using Option SD HD For example for the Matrix signal source file Tek1080iMatrix trp be sure to use the Tek1080iMatrix vmset setup file The correct vmset setup file will have the correct line numbers for each measurement as the default Option VGA For example for the Matrix signal source file Matrix bmp be sure to use the Matrix vmset setup file The correct vmset setup file will have the correct line numbers for each measurement as the default VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 3 Menu Descriptions Menu Item Save Setup Minimize Exit Function Setting or field Description Opn fs Loads and applies the specified instrument setting file Cancel Closes exits the Recall dialog and does not load or apply any settings Saves writes the current application measurement settings to the specified file name an
115. Color Bars measurement Additional Units The only additional unit available in the Results window for the Color Bars measurement is in the Relative tab VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 117 Viewing Measurement Results Displaying H Sync Measurement Results Option VGA Configure the H Sync measurements as explained in Setting Up the H Sync Measurement on page 3 87 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt H Sync Refer to Figure 3 45 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Measured Relative Reference Limits Results H Sync Line Number 384 Reported Average 1 Figure 3 45 H Sync measurement results Measured Values Click the Measured tab to display the measured values Relative Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 Reference Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 Limit Values If Limit testing is enabled see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for the supported combination of resolution refresh rate and timing standard 3 118 VM5
116. Creating an emergency startup disk 1 9 CSV 3 25 Index 1 Index D Default application display 2 21 Description key features 1 1 product 1 1 Desktop accessing windows 2 22 Display Frequency Response measured values 3 104 3 118 reference values 3 104 3 118 relative values 3 104 3 118 DNL files Matrix test pattern E 2 Documentation related xiv DVD files Matrix test pattern E 7 Dynamic range maximize by autoscaling 3 7 3 12 E Elementary stream files Matrix test pattern E 5 Environment requirements 1 6 Exit button 2 22 Exiting the application 1 11 Exterior cleaning C 1 F File menu 3 3 Files vmset 3 3 Matrix test pattern signal source E 1 Filter settings 3 16 Firmware upgrade 1 3 Flat panel display cleaning C 1 Format Input Signal 2 24 Frequency Response detailed measurement information 3 30 displaying 3 104 setting up 3 70 Function reference 3 3 H H Sync detailed measurement information 3 43 displaying 3 118 setting up 3 87 H Sync Jitter detailed measurement information 3 45 displaying 3 119 setting up 3 88 Index 2 H Timing detailed measurement information 3 46 displaying 3 121 setting up 3 89 Help 3 26 Hide button 2 22 How to Run the Measurements 2 44 How to Select the Measurements 2 27 How to Set the Measurement Run Operations 2 28 How to Start the Application 2 20 How to View the Measurement Results 2 44 Input Matrix test pattern
117. Distortion of Amp of the video signal VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 17 Menu Descriptions Menu item Multiburst Noise Function Setting or Field Description Measures the video channel frequency response and amplitude The instrument measures the flag pulse on each channel to determine and measure the six burst Multiburst Measurement Setup Multiburst Measurement Results Measures video sig Noise Measure ment Setup Filter Noise at Cursor Position Results Line Number Average 1 frequencies with the largest amplitude Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value depends on the input signal format as set by Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Sets the number of measurements acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value Displays the flag signal value in mV for each channel in the first display row The following six rows list the frequency in MHz and amplitude in dB of each channel for each of the six burst signals nal noise using one of three filter settings Line Number Average 1 Off Unified Weighting Unweighted w Bandwidth Bandwidth Hz Cursor Hz YIG Spectrum Sets the video signal line number The default value depends on the input signal format as set by Configuration gt Format and assumes
118. ET button 6 Check the shape of the displayed waveform to determine if the sync pickoff is compensated correctly See Figure 2 21 Tk ed ee Properly compensated Under compensated Over compensated Figure 2 21 Display of waveform to determine sync pickoff compensation 7 If necessary adjust the sync pickoff Repeat as needed See Figure 2 22 ZL Se Le Figure 2 22 Adjusting the compensation VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 15 Operating Basics The Matrix Test Signal The Matrix test signal incorporates all the analog video signal requirements within one file different files are used for Option SD HD and Option VGA Using this single test file eliminates the need to change test signals when running different measurements The Matrix test signal is provided with the Signal Source Disks accessory You can select the setup file vmset that matches the format of the Matrix test signal The default line number setting is provided for each measurement type You can change the line number as needed See Appendix E Signal Source Set for a full description of the files in the Signal Source Set Figure 2 23 shows the Option SD HD Matrix test signal Table 2 2 shows the signal elements a il a muon I BEE O a wn il Hn ao ty ulti i nd AM AUALA Figure 2 23 Option SD HD Matrix signal 2 16 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics Table
119. HD Signal Source Discs 0 2 0 0 ce eee eee E 1 Baseband Test Signals CD 1 0 0 eee ec eee eens E 2 ATSC Transport Stream CD inresa oa EEE cee eens E 4 Advanced TV Elementary Streams CD Standard Definition TV Elementary Streams CD E 5 480 and 576 Line DVDs inocencia Dee ea aaia eee eee eee a E 7 Option VGA Signal Source Disc 0 ee eee eee E 8 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1 1 Instrument space requirements 000 1 6 Figure 1 2 Locations of VM5000 Option VGA connectors 1 7 Figure 1 3 On Standby switch location eee eeeee 1 8 Figure 1 4 Displaying measurement values in color bars MEASUPEMMOME css 6 5 aoe 28 Beo0d 5 heave 8 Ald 6 6 tases rte 6 beads Wags E 1 16 Figure 1 5 Format panel 0 cece cece cece eee eeee 1 18 Figure 1 6 Results Summary display eeceeeeees 1 19 Figure 1 7 Color Bars measurement results display 1 19 Figure 1 8 H Sync measurement results display 1 20 Figure 1 9 V Sync measurement results display 2 1 20 Figure 1 10 Video Transient measurement results display 1 20 Figure 2 1 Connecting the T connector to the VM5000 2 1 Figure 2 2 RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit 2 2 Figure 2 3 VGA connector to 5X cable 0 cece eee eee 2 2 Figure 2 4 Connecting the Sync P
120. Help Results menu and any one of ior ral the selected measurements Measured Relative Reference Limite Tus Line Number ns F x F otal Line Time End of Average 1 Results Color Bars Measured Jnit my Line Number Average 1 Option VGA amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Noise Inj Ratio Sp Measured Relative Reference Line Number Results H Sync sa Measured Relative Reference Limits Line Humber hi Vidth 304 5 Period Motie Reported 1 4 If you set the run operation to Continuously press the Stop button to stop taking measurements VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 43 Operating Basics Taking Measurements Across Multiple Lines 2 44 Option VGA To take measurements across multiple lines you must set the Line Select mode to Multiple Lines When the Multiple Lines mode is enabled you select the measurements and the lines on which the measurements are taken from the Multi Lines tab When Line Select is set to Multiple Lines measurement results are automatically saved to a file To view the results of multiple line measurements you must use an external application The Results Summary panel is not accessible when Multi Lines is selected 1 After setting Line Select to amp File Configuration Results Utilties Help Multiple Lines in the Opera D eee a ns Format I Operations Warnings
121. Hyperterminal LOAD You should receive a reply load 0000000 24 Connect the BNC T adapter to the H input BNC on the MIU VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First Read This First 25 Using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 0010000 to the MIU No LEDs will be illuminated but the H channel and HV LF Path are now selected 26 CHECK that the Multimeter reads less than 19 0 Q NOTE The multimeter will typically read between 10 Q and 11 Q If the reading is gt 100 9 check that the BNC short is fully inserted into the MIU CH4 coaxial cable BNC If the gt 100 92 reading persists check that the MIU is in the proper mode by sending the query via Hyperterminal LOAD You should receive a reply load 0010000 27 Remove the BNC short and reconnect the MIU CH4 coaxial cable to the VMS5000 CH4 input 28 Disconnect the BNC T adapter from the H input BNC The above check evaluates gain error by measuring the MIU series resistance that forms a voltage divider with the 1 MQ input resistance of the VM5000 The 15 0 Q G B R inputs and 19 0 H V inputs test limits ensure that the gain error does not exceed 20 ppm If desired the exact gain error can be calculated from the measured resistance Rm using the expressions G B R channels 75 0 Rm 1 0 06 75 0 Rm 75 0 Rm GainError ppm 1 0E06 Rm in Q H V channels Rm 1 0 06 Rm
122. Insert Format Tools Data Window Help x Mt Scale 86 ees 2 4 7 4 a A 5 Format 720p60 13 Color Space YPbPr j 14 Ref Channel Delay YtoPbi ns 0 YtoPr ns 0 PbtoPrins 0 19 Color Bars Y Level m Yellow 649 5 24 Cyan 551 2 Green 500 6 Magenta 199 4 gt Lil sneeet S mn 4 Sheet 1 1 Default sto Sum 700 Figure 3 11 Editing a reference file VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 63 Setting Up Measurements To customize an existing reference file 1 Open a reference file for the appropriate input signal format standard by using a spreadsheet program or a text editor Change the values in the file to those that suit your needs Save the file under a new name Remember to save the file in CSV format Capturing Measurement A second way to create a reference file is to use the Capture Results as Results to Create a New Reference button The Capture Results as Reference function saves measure Reference File ments to a reference file using the actual measured values as the reference values To create a new reference file 1 2 Select Configuration gt Reference amp Limits Select Enable Relative Result Display Configure and run the measurements to save the result values in the reference file Select Configuration gt Reference amp Limits Select Capture Results as Reference Save the file to the desired location by using the Save dialog box
123. Lines Use MIU Auto Detect Embed Screen Capture Specifies whether or not warning messages are Warning Types Reported Measurement Warnings Signal Warnings Results Warnings Description Select the Enabled check box to enable waveform autoscaling Deselect the Enabled check box to disable waveform autoscaling Last Meas is the default When selected the values from the last measurement will be used at the start of the next Auto Scale step Last Recalled when selected the values recalled with the last recalled setup will be used at the start of the next Auto Scale step If a setup File gt Recall Setup has not been recalled since the program was started it will load the Auto Scale settings from the last power up Restore Default when selected the Factory Default Auto Scaling adjusts the vertical scale units so that the input signals fill the entire graticule as much as possible without going out of range Auto Scaling occurs once for each selected measurement Auto Scaling occurs once for each selected measurement Sets measurements to be taken on a single line Sets measurements to be taken across a range of lines Uses the RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit accessory Automatically detects the V Sync polarity Embeds a screen shot of the waveform display into generated reports displayed or logged to a file Specifies the type of warnings to be reported All warnings are selected by default Clear them
124. M5000 1 2 3 B 16 o Amplitude accuracy 1 mV 4 1 2 digits better than 0 1 DC 3 GHz bandwidth Tektronix part number 012 0057 01 2 V max 0 025 50 to 75 ohms 488 2 interface card 0 5 dB 1000 2000 MHz 1 GHz bandwidth Pentium P4 1 8 GHz 20 GB HDD VGA NI PCI GPIB IEEE 0 3 dB DC 1000 MHz and Recommended Equip ment Keithley Model 2000 Fluke Wavetek model 9500B Fluke Wavetek model 9530 Tektronix part number 011 0102 03 Tektronix part number 103 0030 00 Tektronix part number 174 5126 00 Tektronix part number 011 0057 01 Tektronix part number 011 0069 03 Tektronix part number 103 0090 00 Tektronix part number 174 1480 00 Where Used 9500B signal output test Amplitude tests Amplitude tests Amplitude tests 9500B signal output test Noise Floor measurement 9500B signal output test Noise floor measurement Channel skew match Amplitude tests Tran sient Linearity Sync Absolute Amplitude measurement Channel skew match Noise floor measurement accuracy 10 bit Linearity 9500B signal output am plitude test Luminance level mea surement accuracy Transient Response Tests Linearity Test The steps to set up the VM5000 for the performance verification are From the TekScope application select File gt Run Applications gt VM5000 VGA Video Ensure that Option VGA application is launched From the VM5000 VGA Video application sele
125. N Yes Yes 41 From the TekScope application menu bar select Top menu Vertical gt Offset gt Select Ch1 gt enter 0 175 Volts in Offset box 42 From the TekScope application menu bar click on App software button 43 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement 44 Record the results in Table B 23 45 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Resolution should read 8 bit Table B 23 10 bit Linearity G Channel Level 4 of 4 Linearity G Upper limit Resolution Bits Bo 8 Max INL LSB 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 5 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes 46 Compute composite resolution If the Resolution bits value in Tables B 20 through B 23 is the same add 2 to the value and enter this value under Resolution Bits in Table B 24 If the value for Resolution bits is not the same for all tables the Resolution portion of the performance verification for this channel has failed 47 Determine maximum INL find the worst case extreme INL value from Table B 20 to Table B 23 and enter the resulting value or this value plus the INL value from Table B 17 which ever has the largest absolute value under Max INL LSB in Table B 24 on page B 39 48 Compute maximum DNL find the worst case extreme DNL value from Table B 20 to Table B 23 and enter the resulting value under Max DNL LSB in Table B 24 on page B 39 B 38 VM5000 Automatic Video
126. Reference Overview This chapter provides a detailed description of the VM5000 instrument menus and measurements m Menu descriptions Table 3 1 below lists the top level menus of the instrument and the corresponding sections in this chapter that document those menus The menu descriptions include high level descriptions of the measurements m Measurement details In depth descriptions of each measurement begin page 3 27 Table 3 1 Overview of menu descriptions File Recall Default Setup Restores default settings of the application 3 3 previously saved on the hard disk Mimms ini te application othe Windows ask ba Sets the measurement runtime options Reference amp Limits Sets the Reference and the Limit Testing related options Picture and Vectorscope Option SD HD Sets the settings related to the Picture and vectorscope display of the video signal Multi Lines Option VGA Takes each selected measurement on a range of line numbers VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 1 Reference Overview Table 3 1 Overview of menu descriptions Cont Overview of menu descriptions Menu Submenu Results Summary Channel Delay Color Bars Frequency Response Multiburst Noise Non Linearity Short Time Distortion and Sync Option SD HD Ch Ch Mismatch Ch Ch Skew Color Bars H Sync H Sync Jitter H Timing Linearity Luma Levels Noise Inj Ratio V Sync V Timing and Video Transient Option
127. Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 Reference Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 Limit Values If Limit testing is enabled you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for the supported combination of resolution refresh rate and timing standard 3 124 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Additional Units Select the min option to display the minimum limit values for the measurement Select the max option to display the maximum limit values for the measurement Refer to Figure 3 54 ee File Configuration Results Utilities Help Measured Relative Reference Limits E my Line Humber r gt B 7 max ax 770 0 770 0 511 ay ax FS lin 70 0 70 0 70 0 Results Luma Levels Average e j Figure 3 54 Limit values for the Luma Levels measurement The only additional unit available in the Results window for the Luma Levels measurement is in the Relative tab Displaying Noise Inj Ratio Measurement Results Option VGA Measured Values Configure the Noise Inj Ratio measurements as explained in Setting Up the Noise Inj Ratio Measurement on page 3 93 Take
128. Scale Clear the Enabled check box to disable waveform autoscaling Initial Values Restore Default In the initial values pane there are three settings Last Meas Last Recalled and Restore Default m Last Meas is the default When selected the values from the last measurement will be used at the start of the next Auto Scale step m Last Recalled when selected the values recalled with the last recalled setup will be used at the start of the next Auto Scale step If a setup File gt Recall Setup has not been recalled since the program was started it will load the Auto Scale settings from the last power up m Restore Default when selected the Factory Default Auto Scale starting points will be used at the start of the next Auto Scale step See page 3 7 for details VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics 6 Option SD HD Select which instrument channel has the sync signal for triggering Trigger Channel 4 If you use the wrong trigger channel and Signal Warnings is on you will get a signal warn ing See the setup diagrams and trigger requirements on page 2 3 7 Option VGA Choose the Line Line Select Select setting as appropriate In E Single Line Single Line mode each mea Multi Lines surement is made on a single line for example line 153 In Multi Lines mode measure ments are made across a range of lines for example lines 153 185 m Sing
129. Set User Manual xiii Preface Related Manuals and Online Documents This manual is part of a document set of manuals and online documentation See the following list for other documents supporting operation and service Manual name VM5000 Quick Start User Manual printed and also available on the software CD as a pdf file VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Online Help VM5000 Programmer Manual only in PDF format TDS5000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Quick Start User Manual TDS5000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Online Help TDS5000B Series Oscilloscope Online Programmer Guide TDS5000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Service Manual Description The VM5000 Quick Start User Manual provides information about installation and basic operating concepts to enable you to start using VM5000 as quickly as possible An integrated online help system which can be accessed from the VM5000 help menu located in the middle of the screen when the VM5000 application is open Documentation for GPIB commands with syntax and description and commands that are specific to the VM5000 The Quick Start User Manual provides information about installation and basic operating concepts to enable you to easily use the basic oscilloscope functionality An integrated online help system which can be accessed from the oscilloscope platform help menu located at the top right of the screen A listing of t
130. Setting or field Description Set the video input signal format The Format setting also affects other measurement settings such as the video signal line number to use when taking measurements Set the input signal format Set the input signal color space type VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 5 Menu Descriptions Menu Item Function Setting or field Description Measurements Select the video signal measurements to take You can select from one to eight measurements in any combination Measurements Channel Delay Select from one to eight measurements in any combination Color Bars When you click Run the selected measurements will be taken Frequency Response The result of the selected measurements will be included in any Multiburst report that you generate Click Utilities gt Generate Report and set Noise Measurements to Selected Non Linearity Short Time Distortion For more information see Detailed Measurement Information on Sync page 3 27 For a high level overview of measurements see Results Menu on page 3 16 Operation Set the measurement runtime options including test run mode input trigger channel and warning message display Setup And Or Setup amp Run For each selected measurement and for each measurement Run acquisition this setting automatically configures the instrument settings and takes a measurement Use this when taking multiple measurements that require different instrument
131. Test Equipment Depot User Manual 1 800 517 8431 Tektronix VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set 071 1522 02 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Table of Contents Preface yikes chakra a Wawa About This Manual Related Manuals and Online Documents 0 000 c cee eee ee General Safety Summary Environmental Considerations Getting Started Product Description Key Features 0 0 Compatibility of the VM5000 Option HD with the VMSOOOHD Firmware Upgrade Recommended Oscilloscope Probes Installation cc ccc eeeee Unpacking 000 Checking the Environment Requirements 00 00000005 Connecting the Mouse Powering On the Instrument Shutting Down the Instrument Creating an Emergency Startup Disk Backing Up User Files Installing Software Connecting to a Network Adjusting Display Contrast Incoming Inspection Self Tests cee ewes on hae i hs Functional Test Options and Accessories Options 0 eee eee eee ACCESSOFIES 1 ee ee eee eee Operating Basics Operating Basics Input Signal Connection Requirements Connecting Input Signals Signal Path Compensa
132. The Average setting interacts with your choices for the Run Mode For example if you select Once for the Run Mode and you set the averages to 2 then when you select the Run button each selected measurement will run twice and then stop On the other hand if you select Continuously for the Run Mode and 2 averages then when you select the Run button each selected measurement will run twice display results and then continue running and updating the results for every two measurements For a detailed discussion of measurements refer to page 3 27 Values in bold text in the Setting or field column in the following tables indicate default values Command Function Setting or field Description Summary The Summary window displays the status of the selected measurements when they are run It also displays the warnings if any The Summary window is useful when you run multiple measurements Ch Ch Mismatch The Ch Ch Mismatch is the difference in any steady state voltage amplitude between R G and B video outputs Ch Ch Mismatch Measurement Setup Ch Ch Mismatch Results 3 20 Line Number Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value depends on the input signal format as set by Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Average Sets the number of acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value Displays the Ch Ch misma
133. The difference between the two Reference Level settings is the 1500 MHz response relative to the low frequency response c Record this value in Table 4 column C3 Example The left side of trace low frequency end is vertically positioned using the fine Reference Level control so that it overlays the center graticule line The Reference Level reads 34 0 dBm Then the Reference Level control is decreased until the 1500 MHz portion of the trace overlays the same graticule line The Reference Level now reads 35 5 dBm The response at 1500 MHz relative to low frequency is 35 5 34 0 1 5 dB Replace the min loss pad connected to the G input with the other min loss pad With this pad in the signal path measure the uncorrected G channel 1500 MHz response using the procedure of step 11 Record this value in Table 4 column C4 Add the values of column C3 and C4 Divide this value by 2 and enter it in column C5 This is the average uncorrected G channel 1500 MHz response Now subtract the average min loss pad 1500 MHz response column C2 from the average uncorrected G channel 1500 MHz response column C5 and enter the result in column C6 This is the G channel response at 1500 MHz CHECK that the G channel response at 1500 MHz is less than 3 0 dB down Disconnect the MIU CH1 coaxial cable from the BNC female female adapter and reconnect it the VM5000 CH1 input Disconnect the MIU CH2 cable from the VM5000 Attach thi
134. U Verify that the H channel HV LF Path and 8mA LEDs are illuminated The Term On and 8 mA LEDs must be off Connect the BNC to banana adapter to the Amps input of the multimeter Orient the adapter so the BNC shell is connected to the LO terminal of the Amps input on typical adapters the banana plug connected to the BNC shell has a GND label Connect one end of the BNC cable to the BNC to banana adapter On the multimeter select DC Amps mode and 10 mA range Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the H input BNC on the MIU CHECK that the multimeter reads between 7 85 and 8 15 mA Using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 0010011 to the MIU Verify that the H channel HV LF Path and 8mA LEDs are now illumina ted The Term On and 8 mA LEDs must be off 10 CHECK that the Multimeter reads between 7 85 and 8 15 mA 11 Using Hyperterminal send the command RESET to the MIU 12 Disconnect the BNC cable from the H input BNC VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First 11 Read This First Test F RGB WB Mode Input Return Loss This test checks the Input Return Loss of the 75 Q G B and R inputs when the RGB WB Path is active The specification is gt 27 dB from 1 MHz to 100 MHz and gt 21 dB from 100 MHz to 250 MHz The following equipment is required for the test Host VM5000 with mouse and keyboard Spectrum Analyzer with Tracking Generator Return Loss Bridge 6 dB
135. VGA Utilities Generate Report Help Help Topics About VM5000 3 2 Function Page Displays the result summary for all the measurements 3 16 Adjusts the individual measurement settings and display the results Adjusts the measurement specific settings and display the results Configures the report generation related setting and manually generate reports to a specified file format Opens the VM5000 online help system Displays the application version number VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual SSS ET Menu Descriptions File Menu Menu Item Recall Default Setup Recall Setup The following tables list each menu item and its functions Items in bold face are the default application settings when you first start the application or after you do a Recall Default or Recall Setup operation Recalling a setup file changes the configuration current measurements will stop execution and the results appear as dashes CAUTION To avoid losing unsaved measurement results generate a report before you recall the default setup or another vmset setup file Function Setting or field Description VM5000 recalls loads and applies the default settings of the application Recalls loads and applies application settings that have been previously saved on the hard disk Look in Drop down menu Specifies the directory listed in the File list area Option SD HD default location is
136. ace Unit MIU meets its warranted performance specifica tions Prerequisites m Before running this procedure verify that the host VM5000 passes internal system diagnostics VM5000 Utilities menu m Running Signal Path Calibration is not required m Both the host VM5000 and the MIU should have a minimum 20 minutes warm up time m Associated test equipment should also be warmed up according to the manufacturer s instructions prior to making measurements m This procedure assumes measurements are conducted at an ambient temperature between 18 C and 28 C The seven checks below are independent of one another so if only some specifications are of interest then only those sections of the procedure need be performed VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First 1 Read This First Required Equipment Table 1 Equipment required for performance verification Description VM5000 with mouse and keyboard Digital Multimeter Spectrum Analyzer with Tracking Generator Return Loss Bridge 75 50 Min loss pad 6 dB Attenuator 50 Q BNC Cable Type N to BNC adapter 75 Q BNC female fe male adapter Quantity Recommended required Minimum requirement equipment Where used Tektronix VM5000 TDS5104x or Tektronix VM5000 with All tests TDS 5054x oscilloscope provides power 119 6298 XX Mouse and and mode control 119 6633 XX Keyboard At least 5 1 2 digits with a 4 wire Ohms Keithley mo
137. ack White Black required to test for compliance with the VESA Test procedure which is located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM The Black White Black test signal contains a black pattern 10 followed by a white pattern 80 and this is again followed by a black pattern 10 Because some graphics cards insert a border around the picture this test signal facilitates border detection If you plan to take only H Timing measurements use a Black White Black Full Field test pattern Select the bitmap file that matches the format and the refresh rate of the test For example use the 640x480 BlackWhiteBlackBars bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format You can also use a Matrix signal as a test signal For more information on the Matrix signal refer to page 2 16 For example use the 640x480 Matrix bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format Interpreting Results The H Timing Results must match the values specified by the standards depending on the timing standard selected How Results are In H Timing if any borders are detected their width is measured A border is Calculated considered present if there are pulses around SAV or EAV with heights of at least 15 of the white level Edges of the white band are detected and addressable video width is estimated by considering the white band is 80 of the addressable portion of the H sync pulse width Sync period is measured by detecting the edges in the sync signal VMS5000 Automatic Vide
138. acking Refer to the tables beginning on page 1 23 for a list of the options and accesso ries shipped with this instrument Remember to fill out and send in the customer registration card VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 1 5 Installation Checking the Environment Requirements Site Considerations A Operating Requirements 1 6 Read this section before starting any installation procedures This section describes site considerations power requirements and ground connections for your instrument The instrument is designed to operate on a bench or on a cart in the normal position on the bottom feet For proper cooling make sure that there is at least three inches 76 20 mm of clearance on the left side of the instrument See Figure 1 1 If you need to access the instrument CD RW drive you will also need at least 5 1 inches 129 54 mm of clearance on the right side of the instrument 76 20 mm 3 00 in gt a 482 60 mm 19 00 in CEE O O O O O 5 lo jo jo 330 20 mm 4 99909 13 00 in 00 O Figure 1 1 Instrument space requirements CAUTION To ensure proper cooling keep the bottom and left side of the instrument clear of obstructions The specifications in Appendix A list the power source temperature humidity and altitude operating requirements for the instrument VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement
139. active picture Border is the period during which a background colored border is displayed in order to allow the image to extend beyond the limits Addressable Lines is the period during which active video image information is transmitted Front porch is the portion of the video signal between the end of the active picture and the leading edge of the horizontal sync Sync pulse width is the period of the active sync pulse The test signal used for the V Timing measurement is Half White amp Half Black Bars required to test for compliance with the VESA Test procedure which is located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM The Half White amp Half Black bars test signal contains a white bar and a black bar If you plan to take only V Timing measurements use the Half White amp Half Black Full Field test pattern Select the bitmap file that matches the format and the refresh rate of the test For example use the 640x480 HalfWhiteHalf Black bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format You can also use a Matrix signal as a test signal For more information on the Matrix signal refer to page 2 16 For example use the 640x480 Matrix bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format The V Timing Results must match the values specified by the timing standard selected The V Timing measurement requires a test pattern with lines that are half white and half black The first and the last addressable lines are required to be in this pattern a
140. ailed results for a specific measurement If you change the Line Number or Average values for any measurement or if you change the Filter configuration in the Noise measurement then the changed measurement will stop running and its results will change to dashes All the selected measurement results will be invalidated any time you change any of the following configurations m Format m Color Space m Trigger If you change a configuration while running a measurement or a setup the measurement or setup will stop The Average setting interacts with your choices for the Run Mode For example if you select Once for the Run Mode and you set the averages to 2 then when you select the Run button each selected measurement will run twice and then stop On the other hand if you select Continuously for the Run Mode and 2 averages then when you select the Run button each selected measurement will run twice display results and then continue running and updating the results for every two measurements For a detailed discussion of measurements refer to page 3 27 The following table lists the measurements that appear in the Results menu and details the values that appear on the Results page for each measurement Bold values in the Setting or Field column in the following tables indicate default values Menu item Function Setting or Field Description Summary Shows the status during and after the selected measurements are measured in the summ
141. ake the linearity measurement 12 Record the measured result in Table B 17 13 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limit Table B 17 8 bit Linearity measurement results G channel Linearity Lower limit G Upper limit Resolution Bits 8 8 Max INL LSB 5 12 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 25 0 25 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes 14 Connect the AWG710B CH1 output to the B input of the MIU 15 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement 16 Record the measured result in Table B 18 17 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limit Table B 18 8 bit Linearity measurement results B channel Linearity Lower limit B Upper limit Resolution Bits 8 8 Max INL LSB 5 12 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 25 0 25 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes 18 Connect the AWG710B CH1 output to the R input of the MIU 19 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement 20 Record the measured result in Table B 19 21 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limit VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 35 Appendix B Performance Verification Table B 19 8 bit Linearity measurement results R channel Linearity R Upper limit Resolution Bits Bo 8 Max INL LSB 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 25 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes 10 bit DNL Monotonicity and Resolution measurement G Channe
142. ale to female BNC 50 Q co ax cable BNC to dual banana adapter 75 Q 50 to 75 Q terminations Min loss pad BNC T connector Figure B 6 Setup to determine 9500B signal output amplitude a Connect the 9530 Active head to channel 1 of the 9500B Oscilloscope Calibrator b Connect a female female BNC adapter to the 9530 head output Connect a 50 Q coaxial cable to the other end of the BNC adapter c Connect a 50 Q to 75 Q min loss pad to the open end of the coaxial cable VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification NOTE The female side of the min loss pad must be the 50 side d Connect the other end of the min loss pad to the BNC T adapter e Connect a 75 Q precision terminator and the BNC female to dual banana adapter to the other ends of the BNC T adapter f Connect the dual banana adapter to the Volts input of the multimeter Check that the adapter is oriented so that the coaxial shield is connected to the low side of the Volts input On most adapters this is marked with a small tab labeled GND 2 Configure the 9500B for 50 Q output Positive DC waveform Direct Entry mode and 1 10 volt amplitude a On the 9500B press the CHANNEL SELECT button b Press the LOAD button to select 50 Q output impedance c Press the EXIT button d Press WAVEFORM e Select POSITIVE DC On the 9500B this is the fourth waveform from
143. all Default Setup VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 31 Appendix B Performance Verification 4 From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Format panel select 2048 x 1536 resolution and 85 Hz refresh rate click OK in case a warning message pops up regarding this format selection 5 From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Measure ment gt Clear All 6 From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Measure ment gt Video Transient 7 From the VM5000 application menu bar deselect Disable Configuration gt Operations panel gt Sync polarity gt Auto Detect 8 From the VM5000 application menu bar deselect Disable Configuration gt Warnings gt Pop Up Warning Details 9 On the AWG710B Load the H sync test file and setup from the floppy drive as follows Load the pvvidtranssetup set setup file Press buttons in the following sequence setup button gt Save Restore bottom gt restore setup right gt drive right gt floppy center gt OK right gt pvvidtranssetup set middle gt OK right Wait for file loading to complete 10 On the AWG710B Generate a test signal by using the following steps a Press the CH1 button to enable signal output from Channel 1 b Press the MARKER OUT button to enable signal output from MKR 1 and MKR 1 c Press the Run button to start generating the signal 11 From the VM500
144. an display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 If Limit testing is enabled you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for the supported combination of resolution refresh rate and timing standard VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 115 Viewing Measurement Results Select the min option to display the minimum limit values Select the max option to display the maximum limit values Refer to Figure 3 42 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Measured Relative Reference Limits Q min Line Number max e Results Ch Ch Skew 235 Configure Average e 1 Figure 3 42 Limit values for the Ch Ch Skew measurement Displaying Color Bars Measurement Results Option VGA Measured Values Relative Values 3 116 Configure the Color Bars measurements as explained in Setting Up the Color Bars Measurements on page 3 86 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Color Bars Refer to Figure 3 43 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Color Bars j a f f Meas
145. and FRONT PANEL ENABLE buttons simultaneously to return the generator to normal operating mode 3 After it is finished loading press MODULE repeatedly to display AWVG7 4 Press FORMAT repeatedly to display 1080 59i GBR 5 Press ENTER NOTE Press and hold the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button to unlock the front panel 6 Press COLOR BAR repeatedly to display 100 Color Bars 7 Start the VM5000 application File gt Applications gt VM5000 8 Select File gt Recall Default 9 Select Configuration gt Format and select RGB Color Space 10 Select Configuration gt Operation and select Channel 4 as the trigger Select lt b gt Configuration lt b gt gt lt b gt Warnings lt b gt and then deselect lt b gt Measurement Warnings lt b gt 11 In the Color bar measurements view change the Averages setting to 64 12 Select the VM5000 Run button The color bar measurement results table should appear with continuously updated measurements 13 Record the VM5000 measurement value for the white bar measurement for each of the three channels in row 4 of Table B 3 Table B 3 White bar measurement CH1 Y G CH2 B Pb CH3 R Pr AWVG7 Blanking to White level DC700 DC0 from Table B 2 Lower white limit value equation 1 Upper white limit value equation 2 White measurement B 6 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification Table B 3 White bar measuremen
146. and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change the settings for the Luma Levels measurement 1 On the menu bar click Results gt Luma Levels 2 To change the line number click the Line Number box Line Number GL feo There are three ways to change the line number Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 91 Setting Up Measurements m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average E E 3 92 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the Luma Levels measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the Noise Inj Ratio Measurement Op
147. ange the line number click the Line Number box Line Humber ig N There are three ways to change the line number Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average a There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the Linearity measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the Luma Levels Measurement Option VGA To set up the Luma Levels measurement select Results gt Luma Levels to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that you can change for the measurement For Luma Levels you can choose the line on which the measurement is made
148. apture Result as Reference saves measurements to a reference file using the actual measured values as the reference values For more details see page 3 64 4 Select Enable Limit Testing to Limit Testing enable pass fail testing When fd Enable Limit Testing limit testing is enabled the choices under Limits Selection are used to specify the limits file used By default the VM5000 application automatically selects a limits file from a set of supplied templates matched to the selected signal format For more details see page 3 64 Stop on Limit Testing Failure Limits Selection Default l anual BEE CUMS Fie When you select the Stop on Limit Testing Failure option the test stops when the limit testing fails VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 35 Operating Basics Displaying the Input Signal as a Picture The VM5000 will display a picture of the input signal for Options SD HD and VGA D a 1 Click the picture button 2 This launches the video monitor Option SD HD window The instrument dis Tektronix MS000 Video Monitor plays the picture Click the imize b d th oe AA Option VGA Tektronix M5000 ideo Monitor 2 36 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics Changing Picture Display Settings Option SD HD You can change the settings for the Picture and Vector displays as follows 1 Select Configuration gt Picture amp
149. arted with OpenChoice book and Software Developer s Kit CD ROM 30 day evaluation copy LabVIEW CD ROM Calibration Certificate Documenting NIST Traceability 2540 1 Compliance and IS09001 Registration Option HD Test signal files ATSC transport MPEG ES TG700 DNL Bitmap on CD ROM Sync pick off accessory Option SD VM5000 DVD Signal Set VM5000 MPEG and Baseband Signal Set Sync pick off accessory VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Part number 071 1355 XX 071 1352 XX 071 1358 XX 071 1356 XX 071 1360 XX 071 1361 XX 071 1359 XX 071 1401 XX 020 2449 XX 020 2565 XX 063 3692 XX 063 3759 XX 020 2450 XX 020 2513 XX 020 2476 XX 020 2611 XX 012 1680 XX 020 2610 00 020 2611 00 012 1680 00 1 25 Options and Accessories 1 26 Table 1 3 Standard Accessories cont Accessory Option VGA PC graphics bitmap test signal files on CD ROM VGA to 5X BNC cable 3 foot VGA to 5X BNC cable 6 in RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit Termination accessory kit BNC to Binding Post Adapters 2 Power Cord North America Option A0 Universal Euro Option A1 United Kingdom Option A2 Australia Option A3 240V North America Option A4 Switzerland Option A5 Japan Option A6 China Option A10 No power cord or AC Adapter Option A99 Optional Wheel Mouse Mini Keyboard Front Cover Accessory Pouch Optional Applications Software for Windows Based Oscilloscopes CD ROM and manual
150. ary panel This is useful when multiple measurements are selected to run Channel Delay Measures the time variation between the three video channels The instrument measures the crossings of all three channels Channel Delay Measurement Setup Line Number Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value depends on the input signal format as set by Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Average 1 Sets the number of acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Menu Descriptions Menu item Function Setting or Field Description Results ns Displays the time variation in nanoseconds from channel 1 to channel 2 from channel 2 to channel 3 and from channel 3 to channel 1 Color Bars Measures all eight color levels of the three video channels The instrument locates and measures the back porch signal of each channel and then measures each channel s color values relative to that channel s back porch level Color Bar Line Number Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value Measurement depends on the input signal format as set by Setup Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Average 1 Sets the number of measurements acquisitions over which to calcula
151. asured from the 90 to the 10 amplitude points of a negative going transition 3 56 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information Overshoot refers to the rise above the steady state value in a positive going transition Undershoot refers to the fall below the steady state value in a negative going transition Settling time measured from the end of the overshoot or undershoot to the point where the amplitude of the video ringing is down to 5 of the final steady state value To make use of the full bandwidth and get highest sampling rate with the instrument each channel is acquired separately at 5 gigasamples per second Signal Source The test signal used for the Video Transient measurement is Alternate White and Black bars required to test for compliance with the VESA Test procedure which is located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM The Alternate White and Black bars test signal contains a series of alternating white and black bars There are nine bars in this test signal If you plan to take only the Video Transient measurement use the Alternate White and Black bars Full Field test pattern Select the bitmap file that matches the format and the refresh rate of the test For example use the 640x480 AlternateWhite amp BlackBars bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format You can also use a Matrix signal as a test signal For more information on the Matrix signal refer to pag
152. asurement 0 000 eee Setting Up the NonLinearity Measurement 0 0 00 e eee eee Setting Up the Short Time Distortion Measurement 0 Setting Up the Sync Measurement 0 0 cece eee eee eee Configuring the Device Under Test for Option VGA 04 Setting Up the Ch Ch Mismatch Measurement 00000 Setting Up the Ch Ch Skew Measurement 0 0 0 e eee eee Setting Up the Color Bars Measurement 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee Setting Up the H Sync Measurement 00 0 eee ee eee eee eee Setting Up the H Sync Jitter Measurement 0 0 00 e eee eee Setting Up the H Timing Measurement 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee Setting Up the Linearity Measurement 0 0 0c eee eee eee eee Setting Up the Luma Levels Measurement 0 0000 eee eee Setting Up the Noise Inj Ratio Measurement 0 000 eee Setting Up the V Sync Measurement 00 cece eee eee eee eee Setting Up the V Timing Measurement 0 0 0c ee eee eee ee OOTOSCODDNADDADMAAOAAINAIANNANYNADSD I o WOaANKBWRrPTOANADMAHPRP DOAN ARPWOW O OW WWWWWW WW WWW WW WWW WW WW Ww I Setting Up the Video Transient Measurement 0 0000 3 Viewing Measurement Results cece cece e cece e ee eeee 3 Displaying the Results Summary 00 00 cece eee eee eee 3 99 Displaying Channel Delay
153. asurement See Figure 2 16 H Syne Please connect 301 Ohms Figure 2 16 Appearance of the pop up warning when making H Sync measurement Table 2 1 identifies which signal from the Device Under Test DUT should be connected to which input connector on the VM5000 and the terminator that should be used for each signal Table 2 1 Required connections of the VGA signal VM5000 and the terminator VGA signal Device Under Test Green Blue Red H Sync V Sync VM5000 Input Connector Terminator CH 1 75 Q CH2 75 Q CH3 75 Q CH 411 2 21 KQ and 301 Q AUX None V Sync signal is connected to this channel only when making a V Timing or V Sync measurement The VM5000 will prompt you for this connection change if necessary Signal Path Compensation 2 12 Use this procedure if the temperature has changed more than 55 C since the last signal path compensation Perform the signal path compensation once a week Failure to do so may result in the instrument not meeting warranted performance levels at those volts div settings 1 Prerequisites Instrument powered on for 20 minutes and all input signals removed 2 Select Instrument Calibration VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics 3 Ifthe status is Warm up wait until the status changes to Temp Click Calibrate to start the calibration Calibration may take 10 to 15 minutes See Figure 2 17 Calibration Instructions Calibr
154. ate Program Track Ratio 1 16 9 480 Line 480i 59 94 2 4 3 576 Line 576i 1 16 9 2 4 3 To use the DVD insert the appropriate DVD into the player then select the appropriate program track for the ratio Figure E 4 shows the typical setup for testing DVD players CH1 Files on DVD CH2 VM5000 CH3 Figure E 4 Using DVD signals NOTE The DVD files are in interlace format The playback device must be set to progressive mode 480p or 576p before sending signals to the VM5000 instrument VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual E 7 Appendix E Signal Sources Package Contents Option VGA Signal Source Disc PC Bitmap Graphics Test E 8 Signal Files CD ROM The Option VGA Signal Source package consists of one CD that contains Full Field Matrix test pattern signal source files in BMP format for all the measure ments except the 10 bit Linearity measurement which are in PNG format See page 2 16 for more information on the Matrix test pattern The Test Signals disc Tektronix part number 020 2634 XX contains files for generating test signals The disc contains the following m The FullFieldSignals folder that contains a set of test pattern sub directories to take a measurement Select the pattern depending on the measurement selected Once the pattern sub directory is opened you can see a list of files in BMP format Select the file depending on the video format set You can open the file wi
155. ation Status Pas Vonage Pass Calibrate Frequency Pass Trigger Pass Figure 2 17 Calibration instruction 4 If after calibration the status indicator does not display Pass recalibrate the instrument or have the instrument serviced by qualified service personnel NOTE Signal Path Compensation is the only calibration that is accessible to you Sync Pickoff Compensation for Option SD HD To properly compensate the sync pickoff follow these steps 1 Prerequisites instrument powered on for 20 minutes and all input signals removed 2 Connect the Sync Pickoff cable to CH1 and CH4 as shown See Figure 2 18 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 13 Operating Basics 0 0 omw ow 0 0 Ss 3 Ss I a So 00 O0000 14 ore Figure 2 18 Attaching Sync Pickoff for compensation adjustment 3 Attach the Sync Pickoff BNC connector to the BNC to minigrabbers connector Pomona Electronics model number 3789 See Figure 2 19 Figure 2 19 Connecting to the probe compensation connector 4 Connect the minigrabbers to the Probe Compensation connector VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics 5 Push AUTOSET See Figure 2 20 os D E C HORIZONTAL POSITION ea A Figure 2 20 Location of AUTOS
156. ation 3 Connection 1 Connection 2 2 18 19 20 Connect the BNC T Cable to the VM5000 CH1 and CH3 inputs Repeat the procedure in steps 14 through 17 for the G R measurement Connect the BNC T Cable to the VM5000 CH2 and CH3 inputs Repeat the procedure in steps 14 through 17 for the B R measurement Check that the net delay error row 3 is less than 1 ns for G B G R and B R This completes the VM5000 Option SD HD performance verification VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification Option VGA Performance Verification This procedure verifies that the measured signal characteristics meet the warranted specifications of the product Table A 14 in Appendix A Specifica tions The System Performance Verification procedure does the following m Establish a reference point for the test equipment being used before proceeding with the measurements Look at worst case warranted transient and amplitude characteristics of Video and Sync signals This will cover Video Transient H Sync V Sync and Luma Levels measurements m Characterize Noise Linearity and inter channel measurements Prerequisites The prerequisites for the performance verification are m The Oscilloscope Calibrator Fluke Wavetek 9500B VM5000 instrument and Arbitrary Waveform Generator AWG710B require a minimum 20 minute warm up time before doing any performance verification t
157. ation for all channels VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 7 Appendix B Performance Verification Check Frequency This test verifies the frequency response accuracy of the three VM5000 video Response Measurement input channels CH1 CH2 CH3 and digitizers This directly checks the Accuracy Multiburst measurement accuracy and indirectly the Noise measurement up through 30 MHz The Multiburst accuracy specification is 0 5dB up through 10MHz and 0 75dB from 10 to 30 MHz HD CAV Television Test Signal generator Tektronix TG700 with AWVG7 module 75 Q BNC cables 4 75 Q precision BNC terminations 4 Connector BNC T 4 The test signal generator must warm up for at least 20 minutes before doing this test Required equipment Prerequisites NOTE The AWVG7 must meet its frequency response specification of 1 0 09 dB to 20 MHz 2 0 17dB to 28 MHz and 3 0 26dB to 30 MHz If you are uncertain about the test signal generator calibration status perform the AWVG7 frequency response performance verification described in the AWVG7 Service Manual 1 Connect the instrument to the test signal source Refer to Figure B 3 while doing the following steps a Connect 75 Q BNC cables to the upper CH1 CH2 and CH3 AWVG7 outputs b Connect the other end of each cable to a BNC T connector and a 75 Q termination c Connect the BNC T connector to the VM5000 so that the cable from the
158. ation of lower accuracy than the 75 Q terminations that are provided with the instrument See Figure 2 7 VM5000 Signal source Tektronix MTX100 Video device under test DUT 5 ON Modulator gt OSS Opci YIG P B P R Sync a om C CHI I e Y G P B P R Sync I BNC T connector 75 Q Termination Figure 2 7 Connection of 4 wire video with separate composite sync NOTE Verify that the trigger channel is set to channel 4 the default setting If the trigger setting Configuration gt Operation is not set to channel 4 you will see signal warning messages and will be unable to take measurements 2 6 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics Option VGA Setup 1 RGBHV Measurement 012 1685 00 RGBHY Figure 2 8 Use the following diagrams to determine the optimum input signal setup for your measurement needs This is the preferred setup for testing PC and play out device video See Figure 2 8 Use the RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit to connect the PC Interface Unit video card to the VM5000 Using the RGBHV MIU provides the most accurate measurement results RS 232 C port in back Measurement Interface Unit gt VM5000 PC VGA Out D connect
159. ation program that came with the TG700 to move the setup files over your network from the PC to the TG700 instrument Figure E 1 shows a typical test signal setup using the TG700 instrument as the signal source MPEG Y transport P stream TG700 DNL TG700 P Compression Modulator VM5000 baseband files Figure E 1 Using TG700 baseband test signals VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual E 3 Appendix E Signal Sources Package Contents ATSC Transport Stream CD The ATSC Transport Streams disc Tektronix part number 063 3806 XX contains files for playout on an MPEG player such as the Tektronix MTX100 MPEG Recorder and Player to generate Matrix pattern compressed ATSC transport stream test signals for 480 720 and 1080 standards Table E 5 lists the available image format standard trp setup files Table E 5 Available MXT100 trp signal setup files Image format Field rate MTX100 setup file s 480i 59 94 M480i4x3A trp M480i16x9A trp 480p 59 94 M480p4x3 trp M480p16x9 trp 720p 59 94 M720p59 trp 1080i 59 94 M1080i59 trp The disc also has WFMS directory that contains bmp format screen captures from the Tektronix WFMNLE Software Waveform Monitor showing individual lines and channels of the Matrix test signal 1 minute video loop for a particular format To use the MTX100 trp setup files insert the disc into the MTXO0 Refer to the MTX100 MPEG Recorder and Player User manual for information on loading ins
160. ave vmset v VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics Recalling Measurement Settings 1 Select File gt Recall 2 The application displays the Recall dialog box and lists all the instrument setting files present in the default directory Option SD HD default directory C VMS5000TV Option VGA default directory C VMSOO0PC File __ Recall Default Setup l Save Setup Minimize Option SD HD VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 49 Operating Basics 2 50 Select the Look in drop down list to navigate to a different directory other than the default location Select a file from those listed Enter a file name in the File name box or select a file from the list Select Open to load the settings file and configure the instrument BBB Phase 4 tests v Eg BE Test Results 5 Noise w unified weighting fltr wmset E Tertos0imaticumset a Tekds0phatrix vmset ES Teer20p Matrix vmset She Recall vmset v Cancel VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics Saving Measurement Results Reports You can use the Generate Report feature to save your measurement results 1 Select Utilities Utilities gt Generate Report gt TER Gianna 2 The instrument displays the Utilities Generate Report view Option SD HD Utilities Generate Report Format Repo
161. between low frequency far left side of trace and that at 320 MHz The measurement method will vary with analyzer model Many analyzers have amplitude cursor modes to simplify this type of measurement Usually the most accurate way to make this measurement and the method to use for an analyzer without amplitude cursor modes is to vary the analyzer Reference Level a Using the fine Reference Level adjust position the left side of the signal trace to a convenient reference line such as a graticule line or marker Note the Reference Level reading VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First 21 Read This First b Adjust the Reference Level control until the signal trace at 320 MHz aligns with the same reference line The difference between the two Reference Level settings is the 320 MHz response relative to the low frequency response The left side of trace low frequency end is vertically positioned using the fine Reference Level control so it overlays the center graticule line The Reference Level reads 40 25 dBm Then the Reference Level control is decreased until the 320 MHz portion of the trace 1 2 div right from 250 MHz center screen value overlays the same graticule line The Reference Level now reads 41 75 dBm The response at 320 MHz relative to low frequency is 41 75 40 25 1 5dB 13 CHECK that the H channel response at 320 MHz is less than 3 0 dB down 14 Using Hyperterminal s
162. binations m Tracking Generator output level 0 dBm m Spectrum Analyzer Reference Level 20 dBm m Vertical scale 10 dB div 10 div display m Horizontal scale Span 50 MHz div 10 div display m Center Frequency 250 MHz 10 div display m Resolution BW RBW 3 MHz 6 A signal display should appear approximately 0 5 divisions below the analyzer Reference Level mark This is the Return Loss of the bridge with the test port open nominally OdB The display will typically have some vertical ripples across the 500 MHz span due to amplitude flatness errors in the tracking generator Disconnect the BNC cable from the analyzer input and check that the signal display moves down at least 4 divisions 40dB If it doesn t check that all of the analyzer attenuators are set to their minimum value and or decrease the RBW setting Reconnect the BNC cable 7 Record the signal amplitudes at the 100 MHz and 250 MHz points in Table 3 row R1 These are the OdB return loss reference values They will be approximately 24 dBm with the typical bridge Many analyzers have markers that readout the frequency and amplitude of the marker position which makes this task easier and more precise Alternately the Reference Level can be slightly adjusted until the signal display aligns with a conve nient graticule mark most analyzers have a fine Reference Level adjustment mode 8 Connect the bridge to the G input of the MIU If the recommended brid
163. can be taken with any of the patterns in the Matrix signal located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM Horizontal Sync polarity is detected by looking at the signal level after skipping a nominal pulse width duration It is considered to be positive if the signal level VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information is less than one volt If not the polarity is negative H Sync edge and corner characteristics are determined by detecting the edge of the H sync signal A smaller rise fall time value indicates a higher quality signal The overshoot and undershoot amplitude and settling time should be zero under ideal conditions When H Sync monotonicity is Yes in the results panel it indicates that the incoming signal does not change its sign during the rise fall period How Results are The Scope trace is triggered by the trailing edge of the H Sync pulse Transient Calculated and pulse width measurements are made on the H Sync pulse at the end of the specified line Sync levels are measured with reference to oscilloscope ground and reported at two different conditions m When the H Sync signal or channel is terminated by a 2 21 KQ resistor m When the H Sync signal or channel is connected to a current source of 8 mA 8 mA is connected when H Sync level is high 8 mA when H Sync level is low Horizontal Sync amplitude is determined by averaging the points that lie between 30 and 90
164. cen ke ee Pew al testa canes 3 1 Menu Descriptions EEEE DEEE TREET ete eee 3 3 File Meni in nema aaaea nee hie deen EAs Oe ea ee eds 3 3 Configuration Menu secre reis 0 eee ee eee eee 3 5 Results Menu rs stas rar Etan cates boa Saws mee wh ae Caw awa een SAWS 3 16 Utilities Menu esis dete wad wate Log dee edie Gag ets eons 3 25 Help Menu scri nawtiawh ik Meee tae Wee eee WAS RSS a eas Ba 3 26 Option SD HD Detailed Measurement Information 3 27 Matrix Signals and Line Numbers 0 0 0 cece ee eee eee 3 27 PAV CEA ITN A A EE ga Bou ais E GN See ag peng BCI aa tgee ea Wa aged EENET 3 27 Charine Clay a Slack tales Aiea ashes a N Bac a tata RG tae oe 3 28 Color Bache ate ee e N ET OR PRIOR ORE SPE aN 3 29 Fr quency Response science ee GAO WRB N cB E SAS 3 30 Multi bursty is cb sores ht eae Fassel ee ecg eA 3 33 NOISE 8 a8 Steet eases TG alse Bose Faecal A 3 34 INOMEANCATIGY etann hee Tae a rs ase BA cee a eG tale BS 3 35 Short Time Distortion 0 0 0 Tana eee cee ceca 3 35 SV INC 68 dae eso Sia wane hr Sa caph Ge eee os aca ge es caesar amen Sassen Winans 3 37 Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information TOE 3 39 Matrix Signals and Line Numbers 0 0 c eee eee ee eee 3 39 AVe SME fein Sis BETA i Td ET Oia Ea ae ae Bae I TGN 3 39 Ch Ch Mismatch Measurement 0 0 00 cece ce eee eee eee 3 40 Ch Ch Skew Measurement 0 cee eee A ee eee 3 41 Color Bars Measurement
165. ct File gt Recall Default setup This ensures that the configuration parameters are in the default state VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification Windows based PC To perform measurements on the VM5000 you must provide an appropriate video signal to the VM5000 You accomplish this by displaying a bitmap file on the PC in which the DUT is operating The preferred bitmap file when taking multiple measurements is the Matrix signal If you need to take only one measurement you can use a full field test pattern rather than the Matrix signal All the necessary Matrix signals and full field test pattern bitmaps for perfor mance verification are located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM 1 Set the resolution to 1024x768 and refresh rate to 60 Hz 2 Copy the following files from the Test Signal Files CD ROM to a floppy disk pvvidtranssetup set pvlinearltysetup set pvhsyncsetup set Linearity NoStepsOrS yncVolts2kx1pSkat85HzDoubled wim 2kx1p5kx85TransientPv VoltsOffset200m VDoubled wim 2kx1p5kx85HsyncTransientTest VoltsPosDoubled wim Performance Verification Procedures Check Luminance Level Measurement Accuracy This test verifies the amplitude measurement accuracy of the three video input channels CH1 G CH2 B CH3 R checking the specification for the Color Bar and Luma Level measurements The accuracy is checked at the nominal White and Black level points 700 mV and 0 V r
166. d directory All of the Save dialog functions are the same as those for the Recall dialog except for the Save button Save Saves the application measurement settings to the specified file directory as set by Look in and file name as entered in the File name field as file type vmset Minimizes the application to the Windows task bar Opens the application Exit dialog box VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Menu Descriptions Configuration Menu Menu Item Format Option SD HD A Function Format Color Space In the configuration menu you can set the format of the input signal select one or more measurements set the setup mode run mode set the warning options enable reference and limit testing and set Picture and Vector display parameters All the selected measurement results will appear as dashes any time you change any of the following configurations m Format m Color Space m Trigger If you change a configuration while running a measurement or a setup the measurement or setup will stop Recalling a setup file changes the configuration current measurements will stop and results appear as dashes CAUTION To avoid losing unsaved measurement results generate a report before changing any configuration parameters other than selecting measurements or turning warnings on or off Bold values in the Setting or field column in the following tables indicate the default value
167. d on CH1 When the triggering is set to channel CH1 the Measured on CH1 check box is not available The next time the Sync measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Configuring the Device Under Test for Option VGA To perform measurements on the DUT you must provide an appropriate video signal to the VM5000 You accomplish this by displaying a bitmap file on the PC in which the DUT is operating The preferred bitmap file when taking multiple measurements is the Matrix signal All the necessary Matrix signal and full field test pattern bitmaps required to test for compliance to the VESA Test Procedure Evaluation of Display Graphics Subsystems Version 1 Rev 1 are located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM 1 Set the resolution refresh rate and timing standard of the DUT to the required values corresponding to the selected matrix signal 2 On the PC containing the DUT display the contents of the Test Signal Files CD ROM 3 Display the contents of either the Matrix or Full Field folder If you plan to take multiple measurements open the Matrix folder If you plan to take only one measurement open the Full Field folder and select the appropriate test pattern using Table 3 3 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 81 Setting Up Measurements Table 3 3 Matching measurements to the appropriate Full Field test pattern Measurement Test Pattern Ch Ch Mismatch 32 step Staircase Ch
168. dapter to the G input BNC on the MIU CHECK that the Multimeter reads between 74 840 and 75 160 Q Connect the BNC T adapter to the B input BNC on the MIU CHECK that the Multimeter reads between 74 840 and 75 160 Q Connect the BNC T adapter to the R input BNC on the MIU CHECK that the Multimeter reads between 74 840 and 75 160 Q Disconnect the BNC T adapter from the R input BNC Test C RGB LF Mode and HV LF Mode DC Gain This test checks the gain error of the G B and R channels when the RGB LF Path is active and of the H and V channels when the HV LF Path is active The specification for all five channels is 1 0 0 002 20ppm when driven from a 0 Q source and with a 1 MQ load provided by the VM5000 The following equipment is required for the test Host VM5000 with mouse and keyboard Digital Multimeter BNC female to dual banana adapter Qty 2 50 Q BNC cable Qty 2 50 Q BNC female female adapter Qty 1 BNC T adapter Qty 1 BNC shorting cap Qty 1 Connect the MIU to the VM5000 apply power and establish communica tions using Hyperterminal as described in Test A of this procedure Connect the two BNC to banana adapters to the Multimeter one to the Ohms input the other to the Ohms Sense input Orient the adapters so the BNC shell is connected to the LO terminal of each input note on typical adapters the banana plug connected to the BNC shell has a GND label Con
169. del 2000 Tests B C D E mode and DC current mode Ohms accuracy better than 0 02 at 75 Q 0 1 at 2200 Q and 2 at 15 Q DC current accuracy better than 0 1 at 8 mA 50 minimum frequency range Agilent Technologies model Tests F G H 1 1800 MHz minimum Reference Level E4403B option BTG range 0dBm to 65 dBm 0 3 dB Reference Level accuracy 20 dBm to 60 dBm 1 dB div and 10 dB div display modes response normalization mode displayed noise floor less than 120 dBm 100 Hz RBW minimum RBW range 300 kHz to 3 MHz marker and center frequency accuracy better than 0 02 Tracking generator 50 Q output level 0 dBm output flatness 2 dB or better 1 to 1500 MHz 75 Q test port Minimum directivity 40dB Wide Band Engineering Co Test F 1 300 MHz 50 Q RF input output ports models A57TGAC or BNC female 75 Q test port BNC male AS7TUC with options 75 Ohm conversion 75 Q male BNC test port 50 2 female BNC RF in out ports BNC Male on 75 Q end BNC female on JFW Industries model Test G 50 Q end Attenuation loss 5 7 dB 0 5 dB 75Z 3G BNC 1 1500 MHz VSWR 1 2 1 or better 1 1500 MHz 50 Q through style with male BNC on one Tektronix part number Tests F G H end and female BNC on the other VSWR 011 0069 03 JFW Indus 1 20 1 or better 1 1500 MHz Insertion loss tries 51FPG 006 BNC 6 0 dB 0 5 dB 1 1500 MHz RG 58 male BNC connectors length 43 Tektronix part number All tests inches 012 0057
170. e NormDiffLinErr is the Normalized Differential Linearity Error actvalnstep is the actual voltage amplitude of the Nth step V actvalnprestep is the actual voltage amplitude of the previous N 1 th step The Normalized Integral Linearity Error and the Normalized Differential Linearity Error are calculated for each step The step at which the maximum Normalized Integral Linearity Error and the Normalized Differential Linearity Error observed is displayed in the Linearity results window Luma Levels Measurement Luma corresponds to the sensitivity of human vision to each of the RGB primaries standardized for video The Luma Levels measurement reports the minimum and maximum level from the five white and black bars of the active video for each of the three channels Signal Source The test signal used for the Luma Levels measurement is Alternate White and Black Bars required to test for compliance with the VESA Test procedure which is located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 49 Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information Interpreting Results How Results are Calculated The Alternate White and Black bars test signal contains alternating white and black bars There are five white and black bars in this pattern If you plan to take only Luma Levels measurements use the Alternate White and Black Bars Full Field test pattern Select the bitmap file that matches the format and the
171. e or less A 15 Appendix A Specifications Table A 10 Certifications and compliances Category EC Declaration of Conformity EMC FCC A 16 Standards or description Meets intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Union EN 61326 Emissions 1 3 4 EN 61326 Immunity 1 4 IEC 61000 4 2 IEC 61000 4 3 IEC 61000 4 4 IEC 61000 4 5 IEC 61000 4 6 IEC 61000 4 11 EN 61000 3 2 EN 61000 3 3 1 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions Electrostatic Discharge Immunity 4 kV contact discharge 8 kV air discharge RF field immunity 3 V m 80 MHz to 1 GHz 80 amplitude modulated with a 1 kHz sinewave 2 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity 1 kV on AC mains 500 V on I O AC Surge Immunity 500 V differential mode 1 kV common mode RF Conducted Immunity 3 V 150 kHz to 80 MHz amplitude modulated with a 1 kHz sinewave 2 AC Mains Voltage Dips and Interruption Immunity 100 reduction for one cycle Power Harmonic Current Emissions Voltage Changes Fluctuations and Flicker Use low EMI shielded interconnect cables equivalent to the following Tektronix cables GPIB cable 012 0991 01 012 0991 02 or 012 0991 03 RS 232 cable 012 1213 00 or CA part number 0294 9 Centronics Cable 012 1214 00 or LCOM part number CTL3VGAMM 5 VGA Cable Under theses conditions the specif
172. e 2 16 For example use the 640x480 Matrix bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format Interpreting Results A numerically smaller rise fall time value indicates a higher quality signal The overshoot and undershoot amplitude and settling time should be zero under ideal conditions How Results are The MIU is set to the high bandwidth path for Video The Alternate White and Calculated Black bar pattern is used for measuring video transients Measurements are made on the middle white bar The results are compensated for the MIU transient characteristics Rise time is the time taken for the signal to rise from 10 to 90 of steady state level Overshoot Undershoot settling time is the time taken for the signal to reach 5 of its steady state value VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 57 ee Setting Up Measurements There are three ways set up the VM5000 to take measurements taking measure ments taking measurements relative to a reference and taking measurements with limit testing The differences between the three ways of taking measure ments are Taking measurements displays only the results of the measurements Taking measurements relative to a reference displays the results of the measurements taken and the difference between the measured value and a reference value Taking measurements with limit testing displays the results of the measure ments taken and a Pass Fail indication of whether the taken measurement
173. e 3 79 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Short Time Distortion Refer to Figure 3 35 File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Short Time Distortion _ Measured Line Number 165 Average 1 Figure 3 35 Displaying the Short Time Distortion measurement Click the Measured tab to display the Rise Time Fall time Overshoot Undershoot and Settling Time If Relative to Reference testing is enabled see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab To create a custom reference file see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 If Limit testing is enabled you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for each signal format and color space VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 111 Viewing Measurement Results Select the min option to display the minimum values Select the max option to display the maximum values Refer to Figure 3 36 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Short Time Distortion Measured Relative Reference Limits 9 min Line Number e 105 Averag
174. e G B and R Results channels of the video signal Results are reported on the Measured tab and if enabled on the Relative Reference and Limits tabs V Sync This measurement measures the steady state voltage and current amplitudes of logic levels 1 and 0 at 2 21 KQ and 8 mA termination It also measures rise time fall time overshoot undershoot settling time and monotonic ity V Sync Average Sets the number of acquisitions over which to calculate an Measurement average measurement value Setup V Sync Displays the Polarity Pos Neg Pulse Width us Results Sync Period ms Frequency Hz Rise Time ns Fall Time ns Overshoot Undershoot Overshoot S T ns Undershoot S T ns Monotonic Rise Y N Monotonic Fall Y N Logic Level 1 mV 2 2k and 8 mA and Logic Level 0 mV 2 2k and 8 mA Results are reported on the Measured tab and if enabled on the Relative Reference and Limits tabs VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 23 Menu Descriptions Command V Timing Video Transient 3 24 Function Setting or field Description V Timing comprises of the vertical sync pulse the back porch the addressable lines the front porch top border and bottom border V Timing Measurement Setup V Timing Results Average Sets the number of acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value Displays the Bac
175. e MIU input Check that the 9500B Amplitude setting matches the entry recorded in Table B 7 on page B 20 9500B Amplitude Setting DC700 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 21 Appendix B Performance Verification 10 On the 9500B turn off ground mode and select OUTPUT ON The CH1 oscilloscope trace should move from approximately 1 5 div below graticule center to 3 5 div above 11 Now select the CH1 Mean voltage measurement a From the Tekscope menu bar select Measure gt Measurement Setup The measurement menu appears b A listing of enabled measurements appears in the Measurements table Press the Clear button as needed until no measurements are listed c Under Source Ch tab select Channel 1 Under the Ampl tab select Mean Mean Ch1 should appear in the Measurements table d Under Setup press the Statistics button Under Measurement Statistics press Mean Press Close to clear the menu The TekScope graticule should appear full screen with a Mean C1 voltage readout on the right The entry preceded by the u symbol is the Average Mean voltage measurement for CH1 G channel 12 Record the Average Mean measurement value to the nearest 0 1 mV In Table B 9 Measured White level in the G column 13 Temporarily turn off the measurement statistics Measure gt Statistics gt Off 14 Select ground on the 9500B The scope trace will drop down t
176. e e 1 Figure 3 36 Displaying limit values for the Short Time Distortion measurement Displaying Sync Measurement Results Option SD HD Configure the Sync measurements as explained in Setting Up the Sync Measure ment on page 3 80 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Refer to Figure 3 37 File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Sync M IM _ _ __ Measured Relative Reference Limits Line Number T ns 485 Average 1 Figure 3 37 Displaying the Sync measurement Measured Values Click the Measured tab to display the measured Sync values Relative Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab 3 112 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Reference Values Limit Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab To create a custom reference file see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 If Limit testing is enabled see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for each signal format and color space Select the min option to display the minimum values Select the max option to display
177. e enabled All four channel buttons must be glowing 5 Press the Autoset button on the VM5000 You should see the signals from all four channels on the display with some visible activity 6 Launch the VM5000 application from the TekScope menu bar by selecting File gt Run Application gt VM5000 VGA Video 7 Inthe Format Panel Configuration gt Format select the 800 x 600 resolution and 60 Hz refresh rate Leave the Timing standard as the default that is DMT If the VGA display card generates signals using a different Timing Standard change the Timing selection accordingly Refer to Figure 1 5 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 1 17 Incoming Inspection amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Configuration Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits Resolution Refresh Rate Timing 100z DNT eg 120Hz wc iS d R Configure GTF User Defined Format User Defined Format 2 OHz Ado Egit pelete Figure 1 5 Format panel 8 In the Measurements panel Configuration gt Measurements select the following measurements m Color Bars m H Sync m V Sync m Video Transient Leave the settings in other configuration panels at their default values 9 Press the Run button 10 If the VM5000 is functioning normally the four selected measurements will be executed without any warning message s The results should be displayed on the correspond
178. e end to the digital multimeter with a BNC T connector 75 Q precision termination and BNC female to dual banana adapter DMM o o TG700 with S a BNC to Dual banana AWVG7 module 75 Q Termination O O cH3 CH2 CHI BNC T connector Figure B 1 Signal output amplitude test hookup 2 On the TG700 press the MODULE FORMAT and FRONT PANEL ENABLE buttons simultaneously and then release the MODULE and FORMAT buttons Continue to hold the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button to display Factory Startup Mode 3 Enable the DAC Gain GBR 0 mV calibration signal as follows a Press the MODULE button to display the AWVG7 main menu b Press the up or down arrow button to select CALIBRATION c Press the left or right arrow button to select DAC Gain GBR d Press the ENTER button e Press the left or right arrow button to select 0 mV f Press the ENTER button 4 Enter the digital multimeter reading in Table B 2 row DCO column CH1 5 Move the BNC cable from the upper CH1 connector to the upper CH 2 connector on the AWVG7 generator module 6 Enter the digital multimeter reading in Table B 2 row DCO column CH 2 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 3 Appendix B Performance Verification 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Table B 2 Measured blanking to white levels DC700 measured DCO measured Blanking to white level DC
179. e measurement Enter the results in Table B 13 and verify that the measured values are within the lower and upper limits Table B 13 H Sync Transient measurement results H Sync parameter Lower Limit Measured result Upper limit Pulse Width us 0 576 0 578 Sync Period us 7 297 7 299 Rise Time ns 1 840 2 300 Fall Time ns 1 840 2 300 B 30 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification Video Transient Measurement Required equipment Prerequisites Min loss pad RS CH1 MKR1 CH1 50 to 75 Q AWG710B Arbitrary Waveform Generator 50 Q SMA cables 3 SMA to BNC adapters 3 50 75 Q min loss pad 1 AWG710B and VM5000 including MIU must warm up for at least 20 minutes before doing this test AWG710B MKR 1 Figure B 11 Setup to perform Transient and Linearity measurements The steps for checking the Video Transient measurement are as follows 1 Make connections as shown in Figure B 11 a Connect Channel 1 of the AWG710B to the G input of the MIU through 50 Q to 75 Q min loss pad b Connect the MRK 1 output from the AWG710B to the H input of the MIU c Connect the MRK 1 output from the AWG710B to the V input of the MIU 2 Ifthe VM5000 Option VGA application is not already running launch by selecting File gt Run Application gt VM5000 VGA Video 3 From the VM5000 application menu bar select File gt Rec
180. each of the three channels G B R b The flag amplitude for each channel should be 420 0 mV 8 3 mV c The frequency Frq MHz should be within 0 05 MHz of the nominal 20 22 24 26 28 and 30 MHz This test verifies the noise floor of the three VM5000 video input channels CH1 CH2 CH3 and digitizers Noise floor affects the linearity of the noise measurement between 60 and 70 dB The 76 dB Noise Floor specification ensures a noise floor error contribution of less than 1 dB for a 70 dB noise measurement Together with the Amplitude Accuracy Check A and Frequency VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification Response Check B checks this indirectly checks the Noise measurement accuracy Required HD CAV Television Test Signal generator Tektronix TG700 with equipment AWVG7 module 75 Q BNC cable 1 75 Q precision BNC terminations 4 Connector BNC T 1 Prerequisites The test signal generator must warm up for at least 20 minutes before doing this test 1 Connect the instrument to the test signal source Refer to Figure B 4 while doing the following steps a Connect a 75 Q BNC cable to the CH1 AWVG7 outputs b Connect the other end of the cable to the VM5000 CH 4 input and a 75 Q termination using a BNC T connector c Place 75 Q terminations on the VM5000 CH1 CH2 and CH3 inputs
181. ears where you can view the pass fail status of individual measurements Refer to Figure 3 65 for Option SD HD Refer to Figure 3 66 for Option VGA amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Frequency Response Measured I Limits Line Number Meas Location x e Freq 4 2 2 v 229 Average Freq Miz amp 1 10 Dist BY MHz Time uS e mp d 100 x MS amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results H Sync 5 Measured Relative Reference Limits Puls Line Humber 204 Average A Figure 3 66 Displaying Pass Fail results Option VGA To display Pass Fail results for an individual measurement 1 Enable limit testing as described on page 3 64 2 Select Configure gt Measurements Select the measurements you wish to run 3 Click the Run button to take the measurements 4 Select the measurement you wish to view from the Results menu Results appear in green text if the measurement falls between the maximum and minimum limits Results appear in red text if the measurement falls above the maximum limit or below the minimum limit VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 133 Appendices a ee Appendix A Specifications All specifications are guaranteed unless labeled typical Typical specifications are provided for your convenience but are not guaranteed m The instrument must have been calibrated in an ambient temperature between 20
182. easured Line Humber ise HS Average OOt Settling i oot Settling Time ms Figure 1 10 Video Transient measurement results display 1 20 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Incoming Inspection Possible Errors and Troubleshooting Tips If there is any problem associated with the MIU or its connections the following error message appears Error occurred in configuring the MIU Perform the following steps to isolate the problem 1 To further localize the problem check the results display For example if there is no signal on the G channel the corresponding results will not be displayed So check the G channel cables and their connection at the input side of the MIU Between the MIU and VM5000 check the Ch 1 cable and its connections 2 If expected results still do not appear there might be some internal problem in the MIU 3 Other warning messages can be due to an incorrect signal or no signal If the warning is due to no signal carry out the checks specified in step 1 above If the warning is due to an incorrect signal ensure that the VGA card is set to the same resolution refresh rate and timing standard as selected in the Format panel of the application and that the appropriate BMP file is used VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 1 21 REE Options and Accessories This section lists the product options standard accessories and optional accessories that are available
183. easurement For Sync you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change settings for the Sync measurements 1 Select Results gt Sync 2 To change the setting for Line Number click the Line Number box Line Humber Fo There are three ways to change the number Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value Select the Measured on CH1 check box to take the measurements on channel CH1 for better measurement accuracy This option is available only if triggering on CH4 which is the default M Measure
184. ect sunshine rain or direct wind Pollution Degree 4 Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through conductive dust rain or snow Typical outdoor locations Pollution Degree 2 as defined in IEC 61010 1 A2 Rated for indoor use only VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual A 17 Appendix A Specifications Table A 10 Certifications and compliances cont Category Standards or description Safety Certification Compliance Equipment Type Test and measuring Safety Class UL61010 CSA 22 2 No 1010 1 EN61010 1 Class 1 as defined in IEC 61010 1 A2 grounded product IEC 1000 4 3 RF field immunity 3 V m 80 MHz to 1 GHz 80 amplitude modulated with a 1 kHz sinewave Performance criteria The noise floor of the VM5000 with MIU is degraded up to 30dB while exposed to 3 V m electric fields This degradation is a function of both the electric field frequency and polarization see Figure A 1 for a graph of typical behavior For critical VM5000 Noise measurements in an environment where electric field levels are unknown it is recommended that the VM5000 Noise Floor be determined This will show if any impairment is present for Noise measurements See the VM5000 Option VGA Performance Verification for this procedure on page B 24 Typical Mi5000 Opt YGA Noise Floor increase with 3 Vim Electric Field fully cabled with MIU 75 Ohm source impedance eH polarization 1 s V Polarization
185. eed to connect the cable to the VM5000 using the supplied precision terminations Depending on which measurements you take you may need to manually change terminations while taking measurements VGA connector to 5X cable Figure 2 3 VGA connector to 5X cable VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics Connecting Input Signals 3 Wire Analog Video with Composite Sync Setup 1 Option SD HD Use the following diagrams to determine the optimum input signal setup for your measurement needs This is the preferred setup for testing 3 wire component analog video signals Y G Pb B Pr R with the composite sync signal on Y G This setup uses the Sync Pickoff accessory to derive the trigger signal from the Y G signal on CH1 The triggering source is set to Channel 4 This configuration provides more accurate low level noise measurements below 60 dB at 30 MHz bandwidth than setup 2 Figure 2 4 shows how to connect the Sync Pickoff to the instrument This method of connecting to the instrument allows you to make more accurate noise measurements on CH 1 while triggering on CH 4 without adding additional cabling from CH1 to CH4 The additional cabling could adversely impact frequency response and multiburst measurements Connect to CH1 input Sync Pickoff 75 Q Precision 012 1680 00 BNC Male to Male end line termination 1 DA 011 0102 03
186. ement Results Option VGA Configure the Video Transient measurements as explained in Setting Up the Video Transient Measurement on page 3 96 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Video Transient Refer to Figure 3 61 ee File Configuration Results Utilities Help if Measured Relative Reference Limits ix a G B 4 Results Video Transient Line Humber vi se vim 611 z eM as Average 4 Figure 3 61 Video Transient measurement results Measured Values Click the Measured tab to display the measured values Relative Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 Reference Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 Limit Values If Limit testing is enabled you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for the supported combination of resolution refresh rate and timing standard 3 130 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Select the min option to display the minimum limit values Select the max option to display the maximum limit values Ref
187. enable waveform autoscaling Deselect the Enabled check box to disable waveform autoscaling In the selection Initial Values there are three settings Last Meas Last Recalled and Restore Default Last Meas is the Initial Values Last Meas default When selected the values from the last measurement will Last Recalled be used at the start of the next Auto Scale step Last Recalled Restore Default when selected the values recalled with the last recalled setup will be used at the start of the next Auto Scale step If a setup File gt Recall Setup has not been recalled since the program was started it will load the Auto Scale settings from the last power up Restore Default when selected the Factory Default Auto Scaling adjusts the vertical scale units so that the input signals fill the entire graticule as much as possible without going out of range Auto Scaling occurs once for each selected measurement If you are using custom instrument settings for example changes to Vertical or Horizontal settings made from the instrument front panel or from remote GPIB commands you should turn Auto Scaling Off If you are sure your signal is set up correctly and you want to make further measurements in a high speed production line set Auto Scale to Off Trigger Channel 4 This setting sets the input channel on which to trigger the Channel 1 instrument Refer to the setup illustrations starting on page 2 2 for appropriate trigger channel settin
188. end the command LOAD 0100000 to the MIU This selects the V channel and the HV WB path No LEDs will be lit on the MIU 15 Move the cable connected to the H input BNC to the V input BNC The V channel frequency response should appear on the analyzer Its position and appearance should be similar to the H channel response observed above If not verify that the MIU is in the proper mode by sending the query LOAD You should receive the reply load 0100000 If the string is not correct send the command LOAD 0100000 16 Repeat the procedure of step 12 above to measure the V channel 320 MHz response 17 CHECK that the V channel response at 320 MHz is less than 3 0 dB down 18 Remove the cable from the V input Disconnect the MIU CH4 coaxial cable from the BNC female female adapter Reconnect the MIU CH4 coaxial cable to the VM5000 CH4 input This completes the 012 1685 xx RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit MIU Performance Verification 22 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com
189. enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average az VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the Channel Delay measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the Color Bars Measurement Option SD HD To set up the Color Bars measurements select Results gt Color Bars to display the result panel The results pane for the measurement shows the settings that can be changed for the measurement For color bars you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change settings for the Color Bars measurements 1 Select Results gt Color Bars 2 To change the setting for Line Number click the Line number box Line Humber ag G There are three ways to change the number m Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When i
190. equency Response _ o e Meae Location Measured Relative Reference Line Number z e Freq 4 4 4 Y S mV MHz uS 229 Average Freq MHz e 1 10 Dist BW MHz Time uS Infinity C vfi nity Infinity 100 M o NaN NaN Exit Figure 3 26 Displaying additional units for the Frequency Response measurement VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 105 Viewing Measurement Results Displaying Multiburst Measurement Results Option SD HD Configure the Multiburst measurements as explained in Setting Up the Multiburst measurement on page 3 73 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Multiburst Refer to Figure 3 27 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Measured Relative Reference Limits aV i zie Unit mY Line Maier 7 6 qY G AmpYiG FroPb B AmpPb B FraPnR AmpPrR 7 133 s FI fe x Results Multiburst Average C 1 Figure 3 27 Displaying the Multiburst measurement Measured Values Click the Measured tab to display the Flag mV Burst1 Burst2 Burst3 Burst4 Burst5 and Burst6 values Relative Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab Reference Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab To create a custom
191. er m Set the Filter option to Unified Weighting to measure the noise using the psychovisual weighting established by CCIR Recommendation Rec 576 2 adjusted for the selected video format m Set the Filter option to Unweighted Bandwidth to remove high frequency noise from your signal To change the cut off frequency of the filter bandwidth this option is available only if the filter type selected is Unweighted Bandwidth Bandwidth Hz CE Click the box below Bandwidth Hz There are three ways to change the number Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the Noise measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements Setting Up the Noise Spectrum Measurement Option SD HD To set up the Noise Spectrum measurement select Results gt Noise to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that can be changed for the measurement For noise spectrum you can choose the Cursor and select a channel G B or R To change settings for the Noise Spectrum measurements
192. er band width frequency To change settings for the Frequency Response measurements 1 Select Results gt Frequency Response VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements 2 To change the setting for Line Number click the Line Number box Line Humber Fo There are three ways to change the number m Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average ME There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value When Meas Location is set to Freq 4 4 4 the measurement uses the same frequency for the measurement location on all three signals CH1 Y G CH2 Pb B and CH3 Pr R VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 71 Setting Up Measurements 3
193. er than they should Because of the instrument average results this problem is avoided The maximum average value you can set in the Results screen is 64 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 39 Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information Ch Ch Mismatch Measurement Signal Source Interpreting Results How Results are Calculated 3 40 The Ch Ch Mismatch measurement measures the difference in any steady state voltage amplitude between R G and B video outputs The amplitude difference of all the 32 steps is measured between two channels The maximum amplitude difference is shown as the result The test signal used for Ch Ch Mismatch measurement is a 32 Step Staircase required to test for compliance with the VESA Test procedure which is located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM The 32 Step Staircase test signal contains a pattern where each step is equal to 1 32 of the maximum input voltage 700 mV for R G and B channels The PC color setting must be set to True Color mode If you plan to take only Ch Ch Mismatch measurement use a 32 Step Staircase Full Field test pattern Select the bitmap file that matches the format and the refresh rate of the test For example look for the 640x480 32Steps bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format You can also use a Matrix signal as a test signal For more information on the Matrix signal refer to page 2 16 For example look for the 640x480 Ma trix bmp This fi
194. er to Figure 3 62 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Video Transient Measured Relative Reference Limits min Line Humber amp ma ideo Fall Time n Ti Average 4 Figure 3 62 Limit values for the Video Transient measurement VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 131 Viewing Measurement Results Displaying Pass Fail Results 3 132 To display Pass Fail results the user must enable Limit Testing Note that results that Pass appear in green and results that Fail appear in red You can display the Pass Fail results for more than one measurement in the results summary Refer to Figure 3 63 for Option SD HD Refer to Figure 3 64 for Option VGA amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Warnings Channel Delay Figure 3 63 Displaying Pass Fail results in results summary for Option SD HD amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Status Warnings Status Warnings H Sync Noise Inj Ratio E Y Sync Linearity Video Transient EE H Timing H Sync Jitter Timing Color Bars Ch Ch Mismatch Ch Ch Skew Luma Levels Figure 3 64 Displaying Pass Fail results in results summary for Option VGA VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results To display the pass fail results for a specific measurement select it from the Results menu After selecting a measurement the results display for that measurement app
195. es By integrating automated measurement algorithms and a high speed wide bandwidth signal acquisition platform into one instrument Tektronix offers a reliable means to make fast objective and accurate video measurements Product verification activities that previously took hours or days to complete can now be completed in seconds or minutes Offering near plug and play video measurement capability even unskilled operators can reliably assess PC video output signal quality As a fully integrated video analyzer the VM5000 offers configuration menu settings that can readily be recalled or copied eliminating complicated oscillo scope set ups tedious manual measurements and time consuming results correlation exercises Product quality is enhanced because test results can be reliably generated easily replicated with other VM5000 instruments and readily communicated across a global engineering supply or sales organization The VM5000 runs the Windows operating system which provides for easy operation with minimal training time A 10 4 in 264 mm color display provides a bright clear and crisp display of waveforms and measurement results VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Product Description Compatibility of the VM5000 Option HD with the VM5000HD If you are upgrading an existing VMS000HD some default settings have changed The changes are as follows m The default trigger channel has changed from CH1 to CH
196. espectively The specification is 3 mV 1 5 of the reading Required Fluke Wavetek model 9500B equipment Oscilloscope Calibrator 9530 Active head Keithley Model 2000 multimeter 50 Q co axial cable 75 Q precision BNC termination Connector Dual Banana BNC Adapter Female Female BNC T connector Min loss pad 50 to 75 Q Prerequisites The oscilloscope calibrator and multimeter must warm up for at least 20 minutes before doing this test Part 1 Determine the 9500B signal output amplitude The MIU G B and R inputs are specified for a 75 Q source To adapt the 50 Q output of the 9500B calibra tor a 50 to 75 Q minimum loss min loss pad is used The min loss pad inserts loss between the calibrator and 75 Q MIU inputs The Part 1 procedure VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 17 Appendix B Performance Verification determines the proper calibrator voltage setting to produce 700 mV across a precision 75 Q load You will need this information for Part 2 This procedure assumes that you are using a Fluke Wavetek 9500B Oscilloscope Calibrator If you are using a different test signal source modify the steps according to your particular setup NOTE Make sure that the 9500B Oscilloscope Calibrator and the multimeter have had a warm up period of at least 20 minutes 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure B 6 Fluke Wavetek 9500B Oscilloscope Calibrator CH1 9530 Active head Fem
197. ests m Perform the VM5000 instrument internal system diagnostics in the Utilities menu The instrument must pass the diagnostics before you can verify performance m Perform the VM5000 instrument Signal Path Compensation SPC proce dure The instrument must pass the SPC before you can verify performance Required Equipment The Option VGA performance verification requires the equpiment shown in Table B 6 Table B 6 Required test equipment for Option VGA performance verification Quantity Recommended Equip Description Required Minimum Requirement ment Where Used VM5000 with MIU Test 1 Tektronix VM5000HD or Tektronix VM5000 All checks Signal CD cables mouse TDS5104x and keyboard _ Arbitrary Waveform Gener 2 GHz Analog bandwidth rise Tektronix AWG710B with Transient and Linearity ator time better than 300 ps Option 02 tests VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 15 Appendix B Performance Verification Table B 6 Required test equipment for Option VGA performance verification Cont Quantity Required Minimum Requirement E accuracy 0 to 2 5 volts Description Digital Multimeter Oscilloscope Calibrator Active Head 50 ohms coaxial cable 75 ohms Terminators BNC T Connector 3 feet VGA to 5x BNC cable Min Loss Pad Windows based PC 6 dB Attenuators Connector Dual Banana BNC adapter Female to Female 50 Q SMA cable male both ends co axial cable Initial Setup V
198. et the needs of video professionals developing testing and manufacturing the next generation of Digital Television reception and play out devices PC and play out devices the instrument incorporates the power features and functionality needed in R amp D QA and Production Test applica tions It enables manufacturers to ensure that DTV video signal Option SD HD and PC video signal Option VGA quality is up to the challenge of high performance displays as well as enabling clear differentiation between input signal and display device impairments VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 1 1 Product Description 1 2 You can use the VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set for the following purposes E R amp D m Compliance and certification testing m Quality Audit testing m Automated production test m Off air video systems testing The VM5000 automates a variety of component analog video measurements which verify the integrity and quality of DTV video signals Option SD HD and PC video signals Option VGA The VM5000 automatically assesses conformance of selected video signal parameters to applicable EIA 770 3 SMPTE 274M and 296M standards Option SD HD or the VESA version 1 revision 2 standard Option VGA The VM5000 also automates measurement of other industry standard video parameters that quantify the performance of PCs or other consumer video reception and play out devices with component analog interfac
199. etermined the measure ment cycle begins This polar ity test is performed at the be ginning of every measurement cycle To prevent this test from running at the beginning of ev ery measurement cycle take any measurement once with Auto Detect selected Once a measurement cycle has been completed with Auto Detect selected you can deselect Auto Detect The VM5000 re members the polarity of the sync signals Any time you change the format set up for the device under test you should complete a measurement with Auto Detect selected Ta Auto Detect Report Mode Embed Screen Capture to include a snapshot of the waveform display in the results report in RTF format only E Embed Screen Capture VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics Setting the Measurement Warnings 1 On the menu bar click Option SD HD Option VGA Configuration gt Warnings Configuration Results Configuration Format Format Weasurements Measurements Operation Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits Picture amp vector Reference amp Limits Molt Lines 2 The instrument displays the Warnings view These settings Warning Types Reported Control Options control how the instrument sets up the Warning Types Reported and the Control Options when you select the Run button fd Measurement varnings Cd Pop Up vrarning Details M Signal vvarnings W Log Warnings To File
200. ettings might include changes to the instrument Horizontal or Vertical front panel controls to display and measure a non supported video signal standard Click Run to try out the settings make adjustments as needed for example change the horizontal scale and then click Run again Once you are satisfied with the customizations use the Run Only setting to collect results Run Only This setting uses the current instrument and application settings to take a measurement Use this for taking measurements after you setup the instrument by using Setup Only to create custom settings Run Mode The application takes each selected measurement the number of times required for the average you have selected and then stops taking measurements Continuously This setting continually takes measurements in the order the measurements are listed in the Configuration gt Measurements view Select Stop to stop measurements Once amp Report The application takes each selected measurement the number of times determined by the averaging setting then stops taking measurements and generates a report VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 11 Menu Descriptions Command Warnings Function Auto Scale Initial Values Line Select RGBHV MIU Sync Polarity Report Mode Setting or field Enabled Initial Values Last Meas Last Recalled Restore Default Last Meas Last Recalled Restore Default Single Line Multi
201. etween the bridge test port and the MIU input BNCs connect them to the test port leaving the other side open Note the analyzer signal level This is the 0 dB Return Loss value Now attach the Reference 75 Q load It is important that this load have a female BNC If the load has a male BNC then adapt it with the 75 Q BNC female female adapter Check that the analyzer signal level has decreased from the 0 dB Return Loss value by at least 37 dB at 100 MHz and by at least 31 dB at 250 MHz If these Return Loss values are achieved then the test setup is OK If Return Loss does not exceed 37 dB at 100 MHz and 31 dB at 250 MHz first check the analyzer signal to noise floor Momentarily disconnect the coaxial cable from the analyzer input and check that the display drops at least 10 dB If the drop is less than 10 dB try decreasing the analyzer RBW setting If the signal to noise floor is at least 10 dB then the problem is either with the bridge or with the adapters cables used on the 75 Q test port If adapters or cables are used on the bridge test port remove them and connect the Reference 75 Q load directly to the test port If the test port is a female BNC then use the Precision 75 BNC male male adapter between the test port and the Reference 75 Q load Again check the Return Loss If values of at least 37 dB at 100 MHz and 31 dB at 250 MHz are now achieved the problem is with the adapters cables being used on the test port If these values a
202. files for a DVD player E 7 for MTX100 E 4 for TG700 E 2 for transport stream multiplexor E 5 Input signal See Matrix test pattern Measurements detailed information Input signal connection requirements 2 1 Input Signal Format 2 24 Input Signal Format View 2 24 Input signal setups Option SD HD 3 wire composite sync 2 3 2 5 4 wire with separate sync 2 6 Input signal setups Option VGA RGBHV measurement interface unit 2 7 VGA connector to 5X cable 2 9 Installation 1 5 incoming inspection procedure 1 13 software installation 1 10 Installing system software D 1 Interpreting results See Measurements detailed information Introduction to this manual xiii K Key features 1 1 L LCD display contrast 1 12 Limits 2 34 Line Number 3 16 3 20 Line Number defaults in vmset file 3 3 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Index Linearity detailed measurement information 3 48 displaying 3 122 setting up 3 90 Loading saved measurement setups 2 49 Luma Levels detailed measurement information 3 49 displaying 3 124 setting up 3 91 Manuals part numbers 1 24 1 27 related xiv Matrix signal line numbers 3 27 3 39 Matrix test pattern formats E 1 picture 2 16 Matrix test signal matching setup file 3 3 Measurement Result Display 3 99 Pass Fail Results 3 132 Measurement Results Display result summary display 3 99 Measurement Settings Changing 2 45 Measurement Setups reca
203. for the instrument Options Table 1 2 Instrument options Hardware 18 Touch screen interface Rackmount kit FHD Front panel removable hard drive Az Scope Cart 655 4920 00 Thermal Printer 1P Mounting 016 1946 XX TDS5000B Series Rackmount Kit 1R Series Communications mask testing CP2 2 TDSCPN2 ANSI ITU telecom pulse compliance testing software This requires option SM n Software HD component analog video measurements amp format support includes test signal package sD 8 SD component analog video measurements amp format support excludes test signal package VGA S RGBHV Video Measurements and VESA Compliance Tests TDSDVD Optical storage analysis software ET3 TDSETS Ethernet compliance test software J2 TDSDDM2 Hard disk drive measurements software J3E TDSJITSE Jitter and timing analysis software essentials JA3 TDSJIT3 V2 0 Advanced Jitter and timing analysis software JT3 TDSJIT3 V2 0 Essentials Jitter and timing analysis software PW3 TDSPWR3 Power measurements software VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 1 23 Accessories Accessories This section lists the standard and optional accessories The accessories listed in Table 1 3 are shipped standard with the instrument Please specify the power plug and the manual language option when ordering Table 1 3 Standard Accessories Accessory Part number VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Quick Start User Manual 071 15
204. g at front and back porch times Signal Source You can use the matrix signal or you can use a signal with signal amplitude greater than 7 5 at the beginning and end of active video in order to measure front porch and back porch times Interpreting Results The amplitudes are measured relative to back porch Selecting either 1080 or 720 formats will display the tri level sync results Selecting either 480 or 576 will display the bi level sync results How Results are The amplitudes are measured relative to back porch Calculated he The times are taken as the time between half amplitudes of adjacent transitions For example Neg Sync Width is the measured time between the half amplitude of the falling or leading edge of negative sync and the half amplitude of the rising or trailing edge of negative sync In the absence of sufficiently large greater than 7 5 video signal the width of front porch and back porch may not be found In this case the measurement of the respective porch widths will not be valid The Sync relative to reference value is calculated as follows Result measured value reference value VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 37 ie aE Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information For a high level procedure on how to take a measurement refer to page 2 23 For a high level overview of all the measurements refer to the table beginning on page 3 16 The following information app
205. ge is used it will have a male BNC allowing direct connection to the MIU BNCs Record the signal amplitudes at 100 MHz and 250 MHz in Table 3 row R2 Calculate the Return Loss using the expression Return Loss dB 0dB RL reference value dBm MIU input value dBm Record this value in Table 3 row R3 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First 13 Read This First NOTE Increasing return loss means less reflected power so the display on the analyzer will move in the direction of increasing dB loss toward the bottom of the display screen NOTE If a bridge with a female BNC test port is used then some type of cable or adapter will be required to connect the bridge to the MIU input BNCs If the adapter is not truly 75 Q at the test frequencies it will severely impact the Return Loss measurement See Optional steps 11 to 14 below Table 3 Input return loss worksheet R1 0 dB RL reference value bridge test port open dBm R2 MIU input value bridge test port connected to MIU input dBm R3 MIU input return loss dB R3 R1 R2 Example 14 100 MHz 250 MHz G input B input R input G input B input R input 9 CHECK that the Return Loss Table 3 row R3 is greater than 27 7 dB at 100 MHz and 21 7 dB at 250 MHz With the bridge test port open the analyzer measures 23 4 dBm at 100 MHz and 24 5 dBm at 250 MHz With the bridge connected
206. gs Warning Measurement Warnings Set the warning messages to pop up dialog boxes on the Types Reported Signal Warnings instrument screen while taking measurements All warning Results Warnings messages are selected by default Clear them to disable warning messages Measurement warnings include the most general information about potential problems in taking the measurement Signal warnings appear if signals either change or are absent If there are some valid results Results Warnings lets you know that some of the displayed results may not be valid Results Warnings also shows you the types of test results that are included in the report you have just generated If warnings are selected message boxes may appear on screen requiring you to click OK To avoid interruptions to your testing Clear all the Warning reporting VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 7 Menu Descriptions Menu Item Function Control Options Reference amp Limits Relative Result Display Reference Selection Reference amp Limit Testing Limits Limit Selection 3 8 Setting or field Pop Up Warning Details Log Warnings to File Enable Relative Result Display Capture Results as Reference Default Manual Select Reference File Enable Limits Testing Stop on Limit Testing Error Default Description Control Options determines whether warnings are displayed or logged to a file When any one
207. h Ch Skew measurement also displays the pixel clock in the Results window that is the channel to channel delay as a percentage of the pixel clock period Ch Ch Skew incurs a slight color shift at the edge of the white bar Visually it appears as a focus error Signal Source The test signal used for the Ch Ch Skew measurement is the Alternate White and Black Bars required to test for compliance with the VESA Test procedure which is located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM There are nine bars in the Alternate White and Black bars test signal If you plan to take only Ch Ch Skew measurement use an Alternate White and Black bars Full Field test pattern Select the bitmap file that matches the format and the refresh rate of the device under test For example look for an 640x480 AlternateWhite amp BlackBars bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format You can also use a Matrix signal as a test signal For more information on the Matrix signal refer to page 2 16 For example look for a 640X480 Matrix bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format Interpreting Results The ideal value of Ch Ch skew is 0 ns A positive number indicates that the first signal arrives later than the second signal For example G to B delay of 4 03 ns means that the signal in the G channel is delayed 4 03 ns relative to B If the signals of the three channels are highly correlated the loop delay will be approximately zero Delay1 Delay2 Delay3 0
208. he configuration current measurements will stop execution and results appear as dashes in the Results window A CAUTION To avoid losing unsaved measurement results generate a report before you change any configuration parameters other than selecting measurements or turning warnings on or off Bold values in the Setting or field column in the following tables indicate the default value Function Set the video input video signal line nu Resolution Refresh Rate Timing User Defined Format Setting or field 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x1024 1600x1024 1600x1200 1920x1080 1920x1200 1920x1440 2048x1536 2048x2048 50 Hz 60 Hz 65 Hz 70 Hz 72 Hz 75 Hz 76 Hz 85 Hz 100 Hz 120 Hz DMT CVT CVT R GTF User Defined Format List box Add Description signal format The Format setting also affects other measurement specific settings such as the mber to use when taking measurements Sets the video signal resolution for the input signal you intend to measure Sets the refresh rate for the signal that you intend to measure Note that all refresh rates are not available at all times the selectable refresh rate depends on the currently selected resolution Sets the timing standard available for the input signal that you intend to measure Sets the user defined formats available for the input signal that you intend to measure Lists the User Defined Formats available Creates a new U
209. he Relative tab Reference Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab To create a custom reference file see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 Limit Values If Limit testing is enabled see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for each signal format and color space 3 104 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Select the min option to display the minimum values specified for the measure ment Select the max option to display the maximum values specified for the measurement Refer to Figure 3 25 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Frequency Response eee ee Measured Limits EE z e Freq 4 4 4 Y 9 min 109 Average Freq MHz e 1 2 Dist BW Miz Time us 25 Figure 3 25 Displaying limit values for the Frequency Response measurement Additional Units The only additional unit in the Results panel for Frequency Response measure ments is under the Relative tab In the results display the readout Infinity indicates that there was an attempt to divide a result by zero and NaN indicates that there was an attempt to divide zero by zero Refer to Figure 3 26 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Fr
210. he measurement results page 2 41 5 Use the Utilities gt Generate Report menu to save the measurement results to a file page 2 51 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 23 Operating Basics Setting the Input Signal Format 1 On the menu bar click Configuration gt Format Option SD HD Configuration Option VGA Configuration Results Measurements Measurements SBRT Operations Wamings j Reference amp Limits EUS Picture amp Vector Reference amp Limits Ao Lines Option SD HD File Configuraton Results Utilites Help gt Configuration Nee ______ Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits Picture amp Vector 2 The Format panel appears gt Format Color Space O YPbPr 868 Configure Option VGA File Configuration Results Utlliies Help Configuration Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits Resolution Refresh Rate Timing 1690x110 1440 40Hz Tere BLUEN 9 DK eon S OCVTR Configure or User Defined Format 2 24 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics 3 Select one of the standard video formats or define your own for mat using the User Defined Format option function Option VGA All the resolutions are select able regardless of theselected timing standard or refresh rate Option VGA To add
211. he programming commands and other information related to controlling the oscilloscope functionality over GPIB A description of how to service the instrument to the module level This optional manual must be ordered separately xiv VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual a a General Safety Summary To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures While using this product you may need to access other parts of the system Read the General Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions related to operating the system Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and certified for the country of use Connect and Disconnect Properly Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and markings on the product Consult the p
212. he two 6 dB 2x attenuators and the min loss pad added as shown in Figure B 12 on page B 40 From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Operation gt Setup And Or Run gt Run Only From the TekScope application menu bar select Vertical gt Offset gt Select Ch2 gt enter 0 350 Volts in Offset box From the TekScope application menu bar click the App software button VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 39 Appendix B Performance Verification 58 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement AWG710B CH1 MKR1 MKR1 50 Q 6 dB attenuator 50 Q 6 dB attenuator 50 to 75 Q Min loss pad RS Figure B 12 Setup to perform Linearity measurement 59 Record the results in Table B 25 60 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Resolution should read 8 bit Table B 25 10 bit Linearity B Channel Level 1 of 4 Linearity B Upper limit Resolution Bits Po 8 8 Max INL LSB i Ss 5 12 5 12 Max DNL LSB rss 0 5 0 5 Monotonic Y N E Yes Yes B 40 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification 61 From the TekScope application menu bar select Vertical gt Offset gt Select Ch2 gt enter 0 175 Volts in Offset box 62 From the TekScope application menu bar click the App software button 63 From the VM5000 application menu bar
213. ically have some amplitude ripple Estimate the midpoint of the ripple and use this as the measurement point Typical 1500 MHz loss for a series connected pair of good quality matching pads will be less than 1 dB Table 4 RGB WB mode bandwidth worksheet GCH BCH RCH Equations C1 series con nected min loss pad A B 1500 MHz re sponse dB C2 Average C3 MIU 1500 MHz re 1500 MHz re C4 MIU 1500 sponse of sponse with MHz response C5 Average C6 Corrected single min loss_ min loss pad with min loss MIU 1500 MHz MIU 1500 MHz pad dB pad B dB response dB response cece Cd ICBC aye _ ce c5 c2 9 Disconnect the 50 Q cables from the series connected min loss pads Separate the two min loss pads Connect one of the min loss pads male end to the MIU G input BNC Connect the other female end of the pad to the cable coming from the 6 dB attenuator and tracking generator output Attach a 50 Q BNC female female adapter to the open end of the cable going to the 6 dB attenuator on the analyzer input Disconnect the MIU CH1 cable from the VM5000 Attach this cable to open end of the BNC female female adapter To do this the latching ring must be rotated to the full clockwise position as viewed from the pin side of the probe housing Then carefully insert the BNC adapter noting the location of the slots for the BNC ears NOTE Take care not to short the probe housing pins
214. ications are amended as follows 1 mV division to 1 V division lt 0 2 division waveform displacement or lt 0 4 division increase in peak to peak noise Radiated emissions may exceed the levels specified in EN 61326 when this instrument is connected to a test object 4 Tested in accordance with EN 61326 Annex D Radiated and conducted emissions do not exceed the levels specified in FCC47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B for Class A equipment VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 10 Certifications and compliances cont Category EC Declaration of Conformity Low Voltage U S Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing Canadian Certification Additional Compliance Installation Overvoltage Category Pollution Degree Descriptions Pollution Degree Standards or description Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal of the European Union Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC EN 61010 1 A2 1995 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use UL3111 1 First Edition Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment CAN CSA C22 2 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement No 1010 1 92 control and laboratory use IEC61010 1 A2 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Termi
215. ickoff to the instrument 2 3 Figure 2 5 Connection of 3 wire video with composite sync Set p L serrate oa ee disw Seal aiceiag a E cece Shae ererwte Giada ce a 2 4 Figure 2 6 Connection of 3 wire video with composite sync DSOCUP 2 soo asGiad ciate a ce EN E see Nia aud tara glace lean Slade 2 5 Figure 2 7 Connection of 4 wire video with separate composite SV TNC e acbve aia rata oe sebesWavand ovoue SMe rene erase onnavent avec tuaveve 3 2 6 Figure 2 8 Connection of the PC video card to the VM5000 using RGBHYV Measurement Interface Unit 0 0 e eee 2 7 Figure 2 9 Connection of the DUT to the RGBHV Measurement Interface Units sc asitive neen ea ete ETO EE Seesaw 9h E 2 8 Figure 2 10 Connection of the RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit to the VM5000 seinne i E EE E 2 8 Figure 2 11 Connecting the RS 232C cable between the Measurement Interface Unit and the VM5000 2 9 Figure 2 12 Selection of the Use MIU option on the Configuration gt Cpe atime tabasson in nies 60 Riese a aw ates d ove Uw gel Sew eave Seba la 2 9 Figure 2 13 Connecting the VGA to 5X cable to the input channel 2 10 Figure 2 14 Building the 2 21 KQ and 301 Q terminations 2 11 Figure 2 15 Connecting the PC video output signals to the VM5000 2 11 Figure 2 16 Appearance of the pop up warning when making H Sync measurement ccc ccc cece eee ree eees 2 12 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual vV
216. ient Response determines the bandwidth of the test system Tektronix specifies the bandwidth at the probe tip when the recommended accessories are used The specification for sync and video transient measurements is shown in the following table for reference Characteristic Range Accuracy Video Rise and Fall time gt 1 3 ns 5 of reading measurement 800 ps to 1 3ns 10 of reading 450 ps to 800 ps 20 of reading Sync Rise and Fall measure gt 5ns 5 of reading men 2nsto5ns 11 of reading VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification Required AWG710B Arbitrary Waveform Generator equipment 50 Q SMA cables 2 SMA to BNC adapters 2 Prerequisites AWG710B and VM5000 including MIU must warm up for at least 20 minutes before doing this test H Sync Measurement The steps to perform H Sync measurements are as follows AWG710B CH1 MKR1 MKR1 Figure B 10 Setup to measure H Sync transient response accuracy 1 Make connections as shown in Figure B 10 a Connect Channel 1 of the AWG710B to the H input of the MIU b Connect MRK 1 of the AWG710B to the V input of the MIU 2 Ifthe VM5000 Option VGA application is not already running launch it by selecting File gt Run Application gt VM5000 VGA Video 3 From the VM5000 application menu bar select File gt Recall Default Setup 4 From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Pull
217. ifications Table A 14 Option VGA Video Measurements Cont Characteristic Description Sync Rise and Fall time Measurement range 5 VESA Section 7 1 7 4 gt 5ns Displayed results cor rected for H V mea Sync Rise and Fall time Measurement range 11 surement system 2nsto5ns bandwidth limitations RGB and HV Sync Overshoot and Under 2 of reading typi shoot Amplitude Settle time 0 1 ns cal RGB and HV Sync Overshoot and Under 1 of reading typi shoot Amplitude Settle time 1 10 ns cal RGB and HV Sync Overshoot amp Undershoot T rise typical VESA 6 3 Settling Time Amplitude gt 5 Jitter Measurement H Sync Jitter ns 100 ps 15 ppm H VESA 7 5 Requires Sync period 14 of VESA compliant am reading plitude noise rise and H Sync Jitter of Pixel Clock Period lt 4 AREST Measurement Range lt 200 MHz PCF H Sync Jitter of Pixel Clock Period lt 7 5 Measurement Range 200 to 400 MHz PCF Table A 15 RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit MIU Specification Specification Pre Reference Informa Characteristic Wideband Mode cision LF Mode tion DC Gain RGB Channels 0 1 3 typical 1 0 0 002 VM5000 automatical ly compensates for Wideband mode at tenuation HV Channels 0 01 5 typical 1 0 0 002 DC Termination Po RGB Channels 75 Q nominal 75 Q 0 3 HV Channels 2 2 KQ 3 2 2 KQ 1 5 Bandwidth RGB Channels lt 3 dB down at DC to 10 MHz typi 1 500 MHz ca
218. ignal or you can use a signal with all eight valid color bars on the line There is no requirement for the order of the bars except for the bias that black will be searched after to the right of blue Each of the bars should be at least 1 24 of the active line time in duration The Color Bars measurement measures the amplitude level relative to back porch of each of the eight colors white yellow cyan green magenta red blue black for each active channel Therefore this measurement makes eight measurements on three channels for 24 total measurements The software assumes Y is on Channel 1 Pb is on Channel 2 and Pr is on Channel 3 NOTE Some signals intentionally reverse or change the order from the tradition al color bar test signal order Because the bars are measured regardless of order if channel inputs are swapped especially in the case of RGB the resulting input will consist of valid color levels for all eight bars but the order will be incorrect First the bars are identified using the relative amplitudes of the three channels and the specification for the selected format and colorimetry The amplitudes are calculated using waveform averaged values within each identified bar relative to back porch Thus it is important to ensure that the sync signal is within the captured data window for valid measurements For example if a manual setup is performed not only are all eight bars required on the waveform disp
219. ignal format select one or more measurements and configure the run options before you run a measurement 1 Select the Run button The instrument begins taking measurements and displays the measurement results for the recently taken measurement Option SD HD amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Sync Measured Relative Reference Limits Line Number Total Line Time Average 1 Option VGA amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Noise inj Ratio MM Measured Relative Reference Limits Line Number G B mv dB Inj Ratio Average 10 IA 500 Mhz Fitter VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 41 Operating Basics 2 The instrument displays the Option SD HD Results Summary window ep when two or more TAEA fu measurements are selected The Fail BAINZ results are displayed as Pass or Fail if Limit Testing is enabled Fila Configuration Resulte Utilities Help Ea a Option VGA File Configuration Rasults Utilities Help 000 P Status Warnings Status Warnings H Sync Noise Inj Ratio V Sync Linearity V Timing H Sync Mter Color Bars Ch Ch Mismatch Fa l l Ch Ch Skew z e uae 2 42 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics 3 To view the detailed results for Option SD HD the measurements select the amp File Configuration Results Utilities
220. ill give the best accuracy The measurement shows deviations from linear increase in the test signal as a percentage of the largest increase per time found In the case of steps results are deviations in step amplitudes in the test signal as a percentage of the largest step found In the case of ramps using six equal time intervals across the ramp results are deviations from linear increase in the test signal as a percentage of the largest increase per time found The Non Linearity relative to reference value is calculated as follows Result measured value reference value The Short Time Distortion measurement measures the rise and fall time overshoot and undershoot settling time on the rising edge and the settling time on the falling edge Short time distortions produce fuzzy vertical edges Short time distortion can be measured with any signal that has a T rise time white bar and pulse section of the matrix signal The pulse is used for the K2T measurement the bar is used for the other measurements A T rise time bar has a 10 to 90 rise time of nominally 100 ns Many common test signals have 2T rather than T rise times and are not suitable for this measurement Also note that T rise time signals will suffer significant distortion when passed through a TV transmitter as they contain spectral components that will be removed by the transmitter 5 or 6 MHz lowpass filter Short time distortion measurements made VMS5000 Automa
221. imum limit values for the measurement Refer to Figure 3 50 File Configuration Results Utilities Help Measured Relative Reference Limits min G R Line Humber max Back Porch us 98 1 296 C3 Left Border 1 Q j 0 0 ab of 10 852 Results H Timing 613 abl Average e r 1 Figure 3 50 Limit values for the H Timing measurement Displaying Linearity Measurement Results Option VGA Measured Values Relative Values 3 122 Configure the Linearity measurements as explained in Setting Up the Linearity Measurement on page 3 90 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Linearity Refer to Figure 3 51 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Linearity Measured Relative Reference Limits G B Line Humber a s59 196 0 192 0 Average e 191 0 191 0 1 Figure 3 51 Linearity measurement results Click the Measured tab to display the measured values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Reference Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 Limit Values If Limit testing is e
222. ing result panels for example Results gt H Sync Because multiple measurements are selected the Results Summary panel will appear Some representative screen shots are shown in the Figures 1 6 through 1 10 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Incoming Inspection File Configuration Results Utilities Help Status Warnings Video Transient Color Bars Done Figure 1 6 Results Summary display 11 To view results for individual measurements go to their respective screens For example to see the results of the color bars measurement select Results gt Color Bars The results shown in Figure 1 7 through Figure 1 10 are typical results Your results may vary amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Color Bars ps Measured Unit mY Line Humber 145 Average Figure 1 7 Color Bars measurement results display VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 1 19 Incoming Inspection lle Configuration Results Utilities Help Results H Sync Measured Polarit Pul 120 Sync P Line Number Average ES Overshoot Pulse Width Unders i Syne Period ms Oversnoot 5 Undershoot 8 T Line Humber Average Pes Logie Level 1 my 3179 005 2827 381 Logic Level o mv _ 922 039 Figure 1 9 V Sync measurement results display File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Video Transient M
223. ing status appears in the diagnostics control window 3 Verify that no failures are found and reported The instrument should pass all tests If any failures occur record the failure information VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 1 13 Incoming Inspection Functional Test Option SD HD 4 Run the signal path compensation routine as follows a From the Utilities menu select Instrument Calibration to open the Instrument Calibration control window b Click Calibrate to start the routine c Confirm signal path compensation returns passed status Signal path compensation may take up to ten minutes to run Verify that the word Pass appears in the Status text box 5 Click Close to quit the Instrument Calibration control window This procedure uses the output from a video signal generator TG700 or equivalent to verify the VM5000 SD and HD video application functionality Two functional tests are described one for option HD and another for option SD If you have both options either test alone will verify functionality adequately VM5000 75Q precision BNC terminations 3 BNC T connectors 3 A TG700 video generator with either a AWVG7 for HD or AVG7 for SD or equivalent generator Equipment required NOTE These procedures verify that the application features operate They do not verify that they operate within limits Therefore when the instructions in these functional tests call for
224. ing warnings on or off Command Function Setting or field Description Generate Report You can save measurement results in three popular data formats Format RTF Use RTF Rich Text Format to create results data that you can incorporate into documents fh CAUTION To avoid losing unsaved measurement results generate a report before Use PDF Portable Document Format to create PDF files of the measurement data for distribution and viewing CSV VM5000 Option CSV VM5000 contains measurement results and some more SD HD information The Legacy format includes only the information on or measurements that were available in the VM5000HD software CSV Option VGA Results for newer measurements only appears in the CSV VM5000 format CSV Legacy CSV Legacy Original format for VM5000 It is provided for Option SD HD compatibility for customers that use an Excel spreadsheet macro to process the file File Name Text entry field Field in which to enter the report file name Option SD HD C VM5000TV TekO rtf Option VGA C VM5000PC Reports TekO rtf Selects the location to which to write save the report Get Default Sets the report write directory to the default location and name Option SD HD C VM5000TV TekO rtf Option VGA C VM5000PC Reports TekO rtf Option SD HD Text entry field Adds a brief note into the report file You can enter up to Report Heading 46 characters Option VGA Description Meas
225. ion Bits wns is o B 42 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification Table B 29 10 bit Linearity B Channel All Levels Cont a a C Monotonic Y N 10 bit DNL Monotonicity and Resolution measurement R Channel The steps for checking the 10 bit DNL Monotonicity and Resolution measurement R Channel are as follows 81 Make connections as shown in Figure B 11 on page B 31 Setup to perform Transient and Linearity measurements Use the MIU R input instead of G a Connect the Channel 1 output of the AWG710B to the R input of the MIU through the 50 Q to 75 Q min loss pad b Connect the MRK 1 output of the AWG710B to the H input of the MIU c Connect the MRK 1 output of the AWG710B to the V input of the MIU 82 From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Operation gt Setup And Or Run gt Setup And Run 83 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement It may take a few minutes for the measurement to complete 84 Connect the AWG710B CH1 output to the R input of the MIU with the two 6 dB attenuators and min loss pad added as shown in Figure B 12 on page B 40 85 From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Operation gt Setup And Or Run gt Run Only 86 From the TekScope application menu bar select Top menu Vertical gt Offset gt Select Ch3 gt en
226. is averaged Average amp EEE There are three ways to change the average m Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements The next time the Ch Ch Mismatch measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the Ch Ch Skew Measurement Option VGA To set up the Ch Ch Skew measurement select Results gt Ch Ch Skew to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that you can change for the measurement For Ch Ch Skew you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change the settings for the Ch Ch Skew measurement 1 On the menu bar click Results gt Ch Ch Skew 2 To change the line number click the Line Number box Line Humber FF There are three ways to change the line number Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop
227. isplayed The measurement continue to run only when Spectrum is displayed Aspect ratio Auto Set the width to height ratio of the picture frame to auto mode Auto is the default This setting can be either HD or SD depending on the input format selected 4X3 Set the width to height ratio of the picture frame to 4 3 16X9 Set the width to height ratio of the picture frame to 16 9 Graticule Auto Set the graticule of the vector display to auto mode Auto is the default setting in Graticule This setting can be either HD or SD depending on the input format selected is Set the graticule of the vector display to SD colorimetry Set the graticule of the vector display to HD colorimetry Scale Auto Set the scale of the vector display to auto mode 75 Set the scale of the vector display to 75 bars 100 Set the scale of the vector display to 100 bars Line Number Set the Line Number for the line select in the Picture display or the one line displayed in the Vectorscope display Option VGA All the selected measurement results will appear as dashes any time you change any of the following configurations m Resolution m Refresh Rate m Timing Standard VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 9 Menu Descriptions Command Format If you change a configuration while running a measurement or a setup the measurement or setup will stop Recalling a default setup or recalling setup using setup file changes t
228. isplaying Pass Fail Results 20 0 cee cee eee 3 132 Appendices Appendix A Specifications eee eee eees EEEE A 1 Option SDHD iio a een dns ba aay AAE bee haw oe A 19 Option VGA ox sce son waa med Sens Ug CaaS Coe BAe Don eae wee oe A 22 Appendix B Performance Verification 0 eeeeeeeee B VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual iii Table of Contents Index Option SD HD Performance Verification 0 000 e ee eee eee B 1 PREC QUISIICS Siar E ohne il gee eo gates p ute Veet E A olan od pitas B 1 Required Equipment sic te aen E nie Wi aera Miele wud inte ore ale A Weel ee ge ere B 1 Option SD HD Procedure virrassa n a EAEE A A AR B 2 Option VGA Performance Verification 0 unnn B 15 Prerequisites 2 ais st cltpiea Ave cteeheie aye aint pita uncle eed pve Wreinlaed tieraW olsen hievanlere B 15 Required Equipment servet ar r E E e Miele ad Siete ore ale Wipers Weel nee gears B 15 Dna SCUUp asa Moses E E Onl tte acta eee eeve E ier olsen Sievadere B 16 Performance Verification Procedures 00 0 ec cee eee eee eee B 17 Appendix C Cleaning 0 cc cece cece cece cece cece eeeee C 1 Exterior Cleaning lt 3 c 5 44 4 pie ee aig Meee BINS Sate C 1 Flat Panel Display Cleaning asisas oriire ra Ea TEO rA eee C 1 Appendix D Rebuilding the Hard Drive TE ER D 1 Appendix E Signal Sources Package Contents 6 E 1 Option SD
229. ith less than two cycles is not recommended Frequency Response measurements are made with a sweep signal by measuring the peak to peak amplitude of the sweep signal at a specified point The sweep input must begin with a reference flag The point at which the measurement is made is selectable as Freq 4 4 4 Freq 4 2 2 or Time If Time is selected the measurement is made on all three channels of the sweep signal at the specified time If Frequency 4 4 4 is selected the specified Frequency is found on all three channels If Frequency 4 2 2 is selected the specified Frequency is found on Channel 1 and one half the specified frequency is found on Channels 2 and 3 This is the same for both formats YPbPr and RGB After the specified point is found on the input sweep signal five results are measured m The frequency is measured at the specified time if time is selected otherwise the specified frequency is found and displayed in MHz m The time is measured at the specified frequency if frequency is selected otherwise the input time is displayed in us VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option SD HD Detailed Measurement Information m The amplitude of the input signal is measured relative to the flag on the input signal and the result is displayed in dB m The flag amplitude is measured and displayed in mV m The RMS Distortion is measured as the vector sum of all additional sinusoidal components normalized by the amp
230. k Porch Line Top Border Line Addressable Lines Line Bottom Border Line and Front Porch Line on the G B and R channels and the Sync Pulse Width Line Results are reported on the Measured tab and if enabled on the Relative Reference and Limits tabs Video Transients are the video signals that endure for a brief time Use the Video Transient measurement to check synchronization signal timing and amplitude It also measures video rise time fall time overshoot undershoot and settling time Video Transient Measurement Setup Video Transient Results Line Number Average Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value depends on the input signal format as set by Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Sets the number of acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value Displays the Video Rise Time ns Video Fall Time ns Video Rise Time Video Fall Time Overshoot Undershoot Overshoot Settling Time ns and Undershoot Settling Time ns on the G B and R channels Results are reported on the Measured tab and if enabled on the Relative Reference and Limits tabs VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Menu Descriptions Utilities Menu you recall a setup file or change any configuration parameters other than selecting measurements or turn
231. k R 720p 59 94 x x fx xx 1080p 24 X xe e Baseband Test Signals CD The Baseband Test Signals disc Tektronix part number 063 3794 XX contains files for generating baseband test signals There is one directory m The TG700 directory contains setup dnl files for generating Matrix test signals using the Tektronix TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Table E 3 lists the analog image format standard dnl setup files Table E 4 lists the digital image format standard dnl setup files Table E 3 TG700 DNL analog signal format files Image signal format Signal file name 480 525 total lines 59 94 AVG7 RGB 525159G DNL 525159Y DNL aes 525P59G DNL 525P59Y DNL 576 625 total lines AVG7 625150G DNL 625i50Y DNL RGB 625p50G DNL 625p50Y DNL 720p 50 AWVG7 720p50G DNL 720p 59 94 AWVG7 720p59G DNL E 2 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix E Signal Sources Package Contents Table E 3 TG700 DNL analog signal format files Cont Image signal format Field rate Signal file name 1080i 50 AWVG7 RGB 1080i50G DNL 1080i50Y DNL 59 94 AWVG7 1080i59G DNL 1080i59Y DNL 1080p 24 AWVG7 1080p24G DNL 1080p24Y DNL Table E 4 TG700 DNL digital signal format files Image signal format Field rate Signal file name 720p 50 720P50D DNL 59 94 720P59D DNL 1080i 50 1080150D DNL 59 94 1080159D DNL 1080p 24 1080P24D DNL To use the TG700 dnl setup files copy the required file or files to a PC Then use the communic
232. k that the green LED in the RGB LF Path is still illuminated If not using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 0000000 to the MIU Verify that the LED in the RGB LF Path is now illuminated NOTE The V channel and H V LF Path LEDs will also be illuminated 18 CHECK that the Multimeter reads less than 15 00 NOTE The multimeter will typically read between 10 Q and 11 Q If the reading is around 75 check that the BNC short is fully inserted into the MIU CH3 coaxial cable BNC and that the RGB LF Path LED is illuminated 19 Remove the BNC short and reconnect the MIU CH3 coaxial cable to the VMS5000 CH3 input 20 Connect the BNC T adapter to the V input BNC on the MIU 21 Disconnect the MIU CH4 coaxial cable from the VM5000 and connect the BNC short to the cable end just as was done for CH1 and described in step 6 above All of the LEDs on the MIU will be extinguished but the MIU is still powered for the H and V channel measurements 22 Using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 0000000 to the MIU No LEDs will be illuminated but the V channel and HV LF Path are now selected 23 CHECK that the Multimeter reads less than 19 0 Q NOTE The multimeter will typically read between 10 Qand 11 Q If the reading is gt 100 9 check that the BNC short is fully inserted into the MIU CH4 coaxial cable BNC If the gt 100 92 reading persists check that the MIU is in the proper mode by sending the query via
233. l HV Channels lt 3 dB down at DC to 10 MHz typi 320 MHz cal VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 15 RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit MIU Cont Reference Informa Specification Specification Pre Characteristic Wideband Mode cision LF Mode tion RGB Channels Input Return Loss 1MHz to 100MHz 27 dB RL is equiva lent to 7 5 Q varia tion from 75 Q 100MHz to 250MHz 21dB RL is equiva lent to 15 Q varia tion from 75 Q HV channels Input 3 pF typical Capacitance Current Source 8MA 2 5 Current sources pro Loads HV Channels 8mA 2 5 vide loads for Voh and Vol testing of H and V sync signals VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual A 25 eS Se eee eee Appendix B Performance Verification Use the procedures in this appendix to verify that your VM5000 meets it warranted characterics There are two major sections to this appendix The first section contains the performance verification for Option SD HD The second section contains the performace verification for Option VGA Option SD HD Performance Verification This Performance Verification checks that the VM5000 meets its video measure ment specifications Table A 11 in Appendix A Specifications Prerequisites The prerequisites for the performance verification are m The test signal generator and VM5000 instrument require a minimum 20 minute warm up time before doing a
234. l The steps for checking the 10 bit DNL Monotonicity and Resolution measurement are as follows 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 B 36 Make connections as shown in Figure B 11 on page B 31 a Connect the CH1 output of the AWG710B to the G input of the MIU through the 50 Q to 75 Q min loss pad b Connect the MRK 1 output of the AWG710B to the H input of the MIU c Connect the MRK 1 output of the AWG710B to the V input of the MIU On the VM5000 Click the Run button to take the linearity measurement It may take a few minutes for the measurement to complete Connect the AWG710B CH1 output to the G input of the MIU with the two 6 dB 2x attenuators and min loss pad added as shown in Figure B 12 on page B 40 From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Operation gt Setup And Or Run gt Run Only From the TekScope application menu bar select Vertical gt Offset gt Select Ch1 gt enter 0 350 Volts in Offset box From the TekScope application menu bar Click on App software button From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement Record the results in Table B 20 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Resolution should read 8 bit VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification Table B 20 10 bit Linearity G Channel Level 1 of 4 Linearity
235. lay but the entire horizontal blanking area to the right of the VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 29 Option SD HD Detailed Measurement Information Frequency Response 3 30 Signal Source Interpreting Results signal being measured is also required to locate the sync signal and the associat ed back porch The Color Bars relative to reference values are calculated as follows mV Result measured value reference value measured value reference value Result j x 100 reference value The Frequency Response measurement technique provides the most accurate representation of display performance Frequency response is measured on a sweep signal not a burst This measurement evaluates a system ability to uniformly transfer signal components of different frequencies without affecting their amplitudes The amplitude variation can be expressed in dB or percent The reference amplitude 0dB 100 is typically the flag Frequency response problems can cause a wide variety of aberrations in the picture The flag amplitude measurement is a reference signal amplitude Amplitude is measured with reference to the flag amplitude Use a sweep signal with a flag on the front of the signal You can also use the matrix signal or any multiburst signal with a reference flag preceding the bursts The more cycles present in each burst the more robust and generally more accurate the measurement will be A burst w
236. lay3 is Pb to Pror BtoR The more the loop delay deviates from zero the less the three signals mutually correlate High loop delay corresponds to different types of signals among the three channels because of differences either in distortions or in the inherent source signal as in some live program material for example Loop delay greater than Sns will generate a warning if warnings are enabled VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option SD HD Detailed Measurement Information How Results are Calculated Color Bars Signal Source Interpreting Results How Results are Calculated The maximum cross correlation of transitions is found between each pair of channels The location of the maximum is the delay in time Generally one may think of the calculation of the delay as the average match of transitions weighted by the amplitude of each transition The Channel Delay relative to reference value is calculated as follows Result measured value reference value Measuring GBR color bars from a set top box can be used to verify the correct colorimetry conversion Likewise conversion from 1080i 720p to 480p colorimetry in YPbPr can be verified The Color Bars measurement also can be used to check individual channel gain In addition it can be used as a crude check of linearity since severe clipping or other non linear distortions will alter the measurement results from the ideal You can use the matrix s
237. layed trigger Trigger After Time Trigger on n Event Range Delay time 16 ns to Event count 1 to 107 250 s Minimum time between arm 2 ns from the end of the 2 ns between the A trigger A Event and trigger time period to the B trigger event and the first B trigger B Event typical event event Minimum pulse width B event width 1 ns typical Maximum frequency typical B event frequency Advanced trigger timing For vertical scale settings 10 mV div and lt 1 V div Minimum recognizable Minimum rearm time to event width or time recognize next event Glitch type Minimum glitch width 1 ns 2 ns 5 of glitch width setting Runt or window type Minimum runt width 2ns 2 ns Runt or window type time Minimum runt width 2 ns 8 5 ns 5 of runt width qualified setting Runt or window type logic Minimum runt width 2 ns 8 5 ns 5 of runt width qualified setting A 8 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 3 Trigger specifications Cont Characteristic Description Width type Minimum difference 2 ns 5 of upper limit between upper and lower setting limits 1 ns Timeout type Minimum timeout time 2 ns 5 of timeout set 1ns ting Transition type Minimum transition time 8 5 ns 5 of transition 600 ps time setting Pattern type typical Minimum time the pattern is 1 ns true 1 ns Logic Not applicable 1ns Events Delay 1 ns single channel No
238. le Line takes each selected measurement on the line specified in the Line Number field of the Results window Multi Lines takes each selected measurement across a range of lines You acquire measure ments across multiple lines by specifying the starting and the ending line numbers When Multi Lines is selected the Generate Report button in the Utilities gt Generate Report panel is not selectable Also when Multi Lines is selected in the Run Mode operation settings only Once amp Report is selectable and report is generated based on the configuration set in the Utilities gt Generate Report The Results Summary panel is not accessible when Multi Lines is selected For more information see Taking Measurements Across Multi Lines on page 2 44 8 Option VGA Select Use MIU to automatically route H and V E gt signals to the CH 4 output depending on the selected measurements RGBHY MIU TA Use MIU VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 31 Operating Basics 2 32 10 In the Report Mode pane select 9 Option VGA The specified Sync Polarity polarities for the H Sync and V Sync signals vary between the timing standards In the absence of the MIU and with Auto De tect selected the VM5000 will prompt you to connect the H and V Sync signals to deter mine the polarities If you use the MIU the VM5000 will au tomatically determine the H and V Sync polarities Once the sync signal polarities are d
239. le has a 32 Step Staircase which is suited to the Ch Ch Mismatch measurement The maximum limit for the Ch Ch Mismatch is 6 of any voltage over the full range in accordance with the VESA specifications The ideal value of Ch Ch mismatch result should be 0 mV A positive value indicates that the step voltage of the first channel is greater than that of the second channel A negative value indicates that the step voltage of the first channel is less than that of the second channel For example 8 923 mV mismatch between G to B channel indicates that the step voltage of the G channel is less than the step voltage of the B channel For a given step the voltage amplitude is measured with reference to the back porch The amplitude is measured for two channels say G and B The amplitude difference of two channels is calculated and displayed as the result The results are reported as a percentage by dividing the calculated result by Vmax steady state typically 700 mV VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information Ch Ch Skew Measurement Ch Ch Skew is the phase relationship time delay among R G and B video outputs of the graphics subsystem In addition Ch Ch Skew is a function of the relative cable lengths for each of the channels The Ch Ch Skew measurement is used to verify the relative timing of the three video channels Nominal Ch Ch Skew is zero between all the channels The C
240. lies to all the measurements Matrix Signals and Line Numbers Averaging The matrix signals that are included with the Signal Source Set refer to page E 1 provide appropriate signals for all the measurements Refer to the Readme txt files on the Signal Source Set for extensive information about the files provided When using Tektronix supplied matrix test signals if a vmset file is provided for that format of matrix test signal be sure to use the default line numbers in the associated vmset file File gt Recall Otherwise under most circumstances use the instrument default line numbers File gt Recall Defaults For example click File gt Recall and then navigate to where you have saved the setup file Tek vmset The line numbers in this setup file may be used for all formats such as 640X480 800X600 1024X768 1280X1024 1600X1200 and 1920X1200 60 75 and 85 Hz in RGB For the equivalent matrix test signal the Signal Sources disk supplies bmp files The device under test generates the signal that the VM5000 analyzes The higher the average the lower the variance of the measurement in the presence of noise or other transient signal components Set the average higher if you would like to reduce the fluctuations in the measurement results The instrument averages results not input waveforms If on the other hand the Noise waveforms were averaged instead of the Noise results the noise results would appear low
241. litude of the fundamental sinusoid at the specified time location How Results are If a time is specified the instantaneous frequency within the context of a 3 us Calculated raised cosine window centered at this time is measured along with frequencies and amplitudes of nonlinear distortion If a frequency is specified the same algorithm used in the multiburst measurement is used for measuring flag amplitude and relative sinusoidal signal amplitude along with frequencies and amplitudes of nonlinear distortion If Freq 4 4 4 is specified the specified frequency is used for all channels If Freq 4 2 2 is specified the specified frequency is used for Y and 1 2 the input frequency is used for Pb and Pr The Flag Amplitude mV is calculated as the peak to peak amplitude of the flag signal Freq MHz calculated is the frequency specified in the Meas Location MHz Time us is calculated at the Meas Location MHz The frequency response distortion result is calculated as the percent ratio of the square root of the sum of the squares of the additional spectral components above the noise floor Relative to Reference Calculation The Relative to Reference values for mV Hz us units are calculated as follows Frequency Result Frequency measured Frequency reference Time Result Time measured time reference Flag Result Flag measured flag reference Amplitude Result Amplitude measured in dB Amplitude reference in dB
242. ll 2 49 save 2 47 Measurement steps overview 2 23 Measurements 2 36 detailed information 3 27 3 39 how to set the measurement warnings 2 33 how to set the run operations 2 28 measurements to report 2 52 3 25 overview 3 16 report formats 3 25 reports 2 51 saving results reports to a file 2 51 select 2 27 set 2 34 Measurements Setup 3 59 capture measurements to create new reference file 3 64 create custom reference file 3 62 customizing limit file 3 66 take just measurements 3 59 take measurements with limit testing 3 64 take relative to reference measurements 3 60 use existing reference file to create new reference file 3 63 Menu bar 2 22 Menu descriptions 3 3 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Minimizing the application and main display 2 22 MTX100 files Matrix test pattern E 4 Multiburst detailed measurement information 3 33 displaying 3 106 setting up 3 73 Multiplexor files Matrix test pattern E 5 Network access 1 11 Noise detailed measurement information 3 34 displaying 3 107 setting up 3 74 Noise Inj Ratio detailed measurement information 3 50 displaying 3 125 setting up 3 93 NoiseSpectrum setting up 3 77 Non Linearity detailed measurement information 3 35 displaying 3 109 setting up 3 77 0 On Standby switch 1 8 Online help 3 26 Open Load Measurement Settings Button 2 50 Opening vmset files 3 3 Operating requirements 1 6 Optimizi
243. lue to limit values The limit values are maximum and minimum values that are stored in limit files NOTE The default reference file or default limits file is provided as is without warranty of any kind and is intended to be used as a template only WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE EXPLICITLY DISCLAIMED 1 Select Configuration gt Reference amp Limits 2 The instrument displays the Relative Result Display and the Limit Testing in the Configuration display view 2 34 Option SD HD Configuration Format Measurements Operation Warnings Reference amp Limits Picture amp Vector Relative Result Display i Enable Relative Result Display Capture Results as Reference Reference Selection SElECL RETETENCE kileni Configuration Results Option VGA Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Lirnits Motines Limit Testing J Enable Limit Testing IE Stop on Limit Testing Failure Limits Selection Default 9 Manual Select Limits File VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics 3 When you select Enable Relative Result Display Relative Result Display the Enable Relative Result Display VMS5000 enables Reference Selection to select a Reference Selection Detault BOE E ee Ole Cl Reference File reference file For more details see page 3 60 C
244. ly presented The user is prompted to change the termination from 2 21 kilo ohms to a 301 ohms termination for measuring the level when drawing maximum current This measurement characterizes the rise time fall time overshoot undershoot and settling time shown in the Figure 3 5 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information Amplitude A Vmax steady state Vmin steady state Figure 3 5 Signal definitions V Sync where a Vmin steady state amplitude before transition b Rise Time c Overshoot d Settling time e Fall time f Settling time g Undershoot The measurement also characterizes the Monotonicity of the H Sync pulse Variations in the sync pulse voltage may cause instability in the displayed image or for extreme cases may even prevent the monitor from locking on to the correct scan frequency Rise time is measured from the 10 to the 90 amplitude points of a positive going transition Fall time is measured from the 90 to the 10 amplitude points of a negative going transition Overshoot refers to the rise above the steady state value in a positive going transition Undershoot refers to the fall below the steady state value in a negative going transition Settling time is measured from the end of the overshoot or undershoot to the point where the amplitude of the video ringing is less than or equal to 5 of the final stead
245. m m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 4 Select the 500 MHz Filter to ensure accuracy and compliance with VESA specifications With the filter off you can run the measurement over a bandwidth greater than 500 MHz T 500 MHz Filter The next time the Noise Inj ratio measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the V Sync Measurement Option VGA To set up the V Sync measurement select Results gt V Sync to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that you can change for the measurement For V Sync you can choose the number of times the measurement is averaged To change the settings for the V Sync measurement 1 On the menu bar click Results gt V Sync 3 94 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements 2 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the V Sync measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting
246. m Viewing Measurement Results Measured Values Click the Measured tab to display the measured values Relative Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 Reference Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 Limit Values If Limit testing is enabled you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for the supported combination of resolution refresh rate and timing standard Select the min option to display the minimum limit values for the measurement Select the max option to display the maximum limit values for the measurement Refer to Figure 3 60 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Timing Measured Relative Reference Limits s S min G B Line Humbers max Back Porch Line 39 0 39 0 gy Bo e 10 1 0 3 A i e 1025 0 1025 0 En i 10 10 Average 20 20 VTiming Signal th Line 40 Waa 4 Figure 3 60 Limit values for the V Timing measurement VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 129 Viewing Measurement Results Displaying Video Transient Measur
247. measurement results table should display with continuously updated measurements VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 9 Appendix B Performance Verification Check Noise Floor Measurement Accuracy 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Change the Averages setting to 64 Check the following a The six Multiburst packet Amp dB readings 1 2 4 6 8 and 10 MHz should be less than 0 5 dB for each of the three channels G B R b The flag amplitude for each channel should be 420 0 mV 8 3 mV c The frequency Frq MHz should be within 0 05 MHz of the nominal 1 2 4 6 8 10 MHz Select the VM5000 Stop button to halt measurement Press the TG700 Multiburst button repeatedly to display Multi burst 10 20 MHz Select the VM5000 Run button Check the following a The six Multiburst packet Amp dB readings 10 12 14 16 18 and 20 MHz should be less than 0 5 dB for each of the three channels G B R b The flag amplitude for each channel should be 420 0 mV 8 3 mV c The frequency Frq MHz should be within 0 05 MHz of the nominal 10 12 14 16 18 20 MHz Select the VM5000 Stop button to halt measurement Press the TG700 Multiburst button repeatedly to display Multiburst 20 30 MHz Select the VM5000 Run button Check the following a The six Multiburst 20 22 24 26 28 and 30 MHz packet Amp dB readings are less than 0 5 dB for
248. ment results you want to display You can choose to display a summary of all results or select a single measurement to see complete results for that measurement Displaying the Results Summary The results summary panel is displayed automatically if more than one measure ment has been selected for execution When only a single measurement is selected the results panel corresponding to the selected measurement gets displayed automatically However the results summary can be manually selected at any point of time by selecting Results gt Summary With the Multi Line measurements enabled the results summary is not available A Results Summary window displays the Status and Warnings for the selected measurements and the status for unselected measurements is displayed as Refer to Figure 3 18 for Option SD HD Refer to Figure 3 19 for Option VGA amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Warnings Figure 3 18 Displaying the results summary Option SD HD ee File Configuration Results Utilities Help Status Warnings Status Warnings H Sync Noise Inj Ratio xX Sync Linearity aa H Timing Video Transient aa Timing H Sync Jitter Color Bars Ch Ch Mismatch Ch Ch Skew Luma Levels Figure 3 19 Displaying the results summary Option VGA VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 99 Viewing Measurement Results 3 100 The Results Summary displays the current status of the mea
249. ms of the change If a resolution is selected and the currently selected timing standard is not available for the selected resolution the timing standard will automatically change to a supported timing standard in the order of CVT DMT and GTF A message informs you of the change Selecting the Measurements 1 On the menu bar click Configuration gt Measurements 2 Select from one to eight measurements Option SD HD OR one to twelve measurements Option VGA in any combination Option SD HD Configuration Option VGA Configuration Results Format Measurements E gt Operation Warnings Warnings Reference amp Limits Reference amp Limits Picture amp Vector Multi Lines Option SD HD gt i Channel Delay W Noise W color Bars W Non Linearity Frequency Response i Short Time Distortion W Multiburst E Syne Option VGA E W H Timing W Noise Inj Ratio W Timing O Linearity W Video Transient gf HH Sync Jitter VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 27 Operating Basics Setting the Measurement Run Operations 1 Select Configuration gt Operation 2 The instrument displays the Operations window These settings control how the instrument sets up and acquires measurements when you click Run 3 Select how the instrument sets up and runs the measurements 2 28 Option SD HD Option VGA Configuration Configuration Results Format Format Measu
250. n the TG700 press the Module button repeatedly to display AWVG7 Press FORMAT repeatedly to display 1080 59i GBR Press ENTER ee US Press Multiburst repeatedly to display Multiburst 10 20 MHz NOTE Press and hold the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button to unlock the front panel 6 Start the VM5000 application File gt Applications gt VM5000 7 Select File gt Recall Default 8 Select Configuration gt Format and select RGB Color Space VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 13 Appendix B Performance Verification 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 While still in Configuration gt Measurements select the Channel Delay check box and deselect the Color Bars check box Select Configuration gt Operation a Deselect all the Warning Reporting boxes b Select Channel 4 as the trigger Select Results gt Channel Delay Change the Averages setting to 64 Select the VM5000 Run button The Channel Delay measurement results table should appear with continuously updating measurements Note the G B measurement results including sign in row 1 of Table B 5 Reverse the BNC T Cable connections on CH1 and CH2 Note the G B measurement results including sign in row 2 of Table B S Subtract line 2 from line 1 in Table B 5 Divide this result by 2 and enter it in row 3 of Table B 5 Table B 5 Delay error measurements Connection 1 Connection 2 Net delay error equation 3 Equ
251. nabled you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for the supported combination of resolution refresh rate and timing standard Select the min option to display the minimum limit values for the measurement Select the max option to display the maximum limit values for the measurement Refer to Figure 3 52 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Linearity Measured Relative Reference Limits min G Line Humber max Eor s 859 Average Figure 3 52 Limit values for the Linearity measurement VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 123 Viewing Measurement Results Displaying Luma Levels Measurement Results Option VGA Configure the Luma Levels measurements as explained in Setting Up the Luma Levels Measurement on page 3 91 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Luma Levels Refer to Figure 3 53 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Measured Relative Reference Limits x xXx Results Luma Levels Unit m Line Humber G B i e 544 Average 1 Figure 3 53 Luma Levels measurement results Measured Values Click the Measured tab to display the measured values Relative Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the
252. nals on this product may have different installation overvoltage category designations The installation categories are CAT III Distribution level mains usually permanently connected Equipment at this level is typically in a fixed industrial location CAT II _Local level mains wall sockets Equipment at this level includes appliances portable tools and similar products Equipment is usually cord connected CATI Secondary signal level or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated Pollution Degree 1 No pollution or only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Products in this category are generally encapsulated hermetically sealed or located in clean rooms Pollution Degree 2 Normally only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be expected This location is a typical officefhome environment Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of service Pollution Degree 3 Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that becomes conductive due to condensation These are sheltered locations where neither temperature nor humidity is controlled The area is protected from dir
253. nd then select the Run button again Once you are satisfied with your customizations use the Run Only setting to collect results Setup Only is not selectable for certain measurements like H Sync V Sync Noise Inj Ratio V Timing and Video Transient as they need multiple settings for the oscillo scope and MIU Run Only Takes a measurement using the existing instrument configuration Designed for taking measurements with custom settings see Setup Only description above 4 Select how the application acquires measurements run mode m Once takes each selected measurement the number of times determined by the averaging setting then stops taking measurements Continuously continually takes measurements You must select the Stop button to stop measurements m Once amp Report takes each selected measurement the number of times determined by the averaging setting presents the report and stops taking measurements VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 29 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Operating Basics 2 30 5 Auto Scale fits the signal within Auto Scale the available vertical scale T Enabled Auto Scaling adjusts the vertical scale units so that the input signals fill the graticule as much as possible Auto Scaling occurs once for each selected measurement Select the Enabled checkbox to enable waveform Auto
254. nd they indicate the beginning and end of the addressable video If any non black lines are detected before the beginning of the addressable video or after the end of it they are considered part of the top or bottom border respec tively Beginning five lines before the first addressable line as per the standard 15 lines are scanned to detect the first addressable line With the start of addressable video the scan begins again at five lines before the nominal end of the address VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 55 Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information able video and continues on for 15 lines The MIU is set to use the low bandwidth path for Video and Sync Video Transient Measurement Use the Video Transient measurement to check the transient characteristics of the video The measurement characterizes the video rise time fall time overshoot undershoot and settling time as shown in the Figure 3 6 Amplitude A 4 Vmax Vmax T steady state Vmin steady state Figure 3 6 Signal definitions Video transient where a Vmin steady state amplitude before transition b Rise Time c Overshoot d Settling time e Fall time f Settling time g Undershoot Video Transient measurement reports the result of the middle bar the third white bar Rise time is measured from the 10 to the 90 amplitude points of a positive going transition Fall time is me
255. ndwidth Hz Line Number mv 37 1M s dB Fs 436 Average Noise at Cursor Position i Cureor Hz e N e Spectrum my PriR Y Figure 3 29 Displaying the Noise measurement Click the Measured tab to display the measured amplitude level values VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 107 Viewing Measurement Results Relative Values Reference Values Limit Values Displaying Noise Spectrum 3 108 If Relative to Reference testing is enabled see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab To create a custom reference file see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 If Limit testing is enabled see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for each signal format and color space Select the min option to display the minimum amplitude level values Select the max option to display the maximum amplitude level values Refer to Figure 3 30 File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Noise Filter Unified weighing Measured Relative Reference Limits G Pb B Pr R Bandwidth Hz A 0 7 Line Number se x lad dB 0 0 60 0 60 0 4 En zA
256. nect a BNC cable to each BNC to banana adapter Connect the other end of each cable to the BNC T adapter This connects Ohms input and Ohms Sense input in parallel at the BNC T adapter On the Multimeter select 4 wire Ohms mode and 100 Ohms range Connect the BNC T adapter to the G input BNC on the MIU VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First Read This First 6 Connect the BNC shorting cap to one end of the BNC female female adapter Disconnect the MIU CH1 coaxial cable from the VM5000 Note that the MIU Fault LED is now illuminated This is normal indicating that the CH1 coaxial cable has been disconnected from the VM5000 Connect the MIU CH1 coaxial cable to the open end of the BNC female fe male adapter with shorting cap To do this the latching ring must be rotated to the full CW position as viewed from the pin side of the connector Carefully insert the BNC adapter noting the location of the slots for the BNC ears This connection shorts the center conductor to the shield so that the series resistance through the MIU can be measured 7 Check if the green LED in the RGB LF Path is illuminated If not using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 0000000 to the MIU Verify that the LED in the RGB LF Path is now illuminated NOTE The V channel and H V LF Path LEDs will also be illuminated 8 CHECK that the Multimeter reads less than 15 0 Q NOTE The multimeter
257. ng for production line testing auto scale Off 3 7 Option SS E 1 Optional accessories 1 27 Options 1 23 All 2 52 Auto Scale enabled 2 30 Continuously 2 29 3 12 CSV Legacy 2 52 CSV VMS5000 2 52 Last Meas 2 30 Last Recalled 2 30 Line Select 2 31 Multi Lines 2 31 Once 2 29 3 11 Once amp Report 2 29 PDF 2 52 Restore Default 2 30 RTF 2 52 Index 3 Index Run Mode 2 29 Run Only 2 29 3 11 Selected 2 52 Setup amp Run 2 29 3 11 Setup Only 2 29 3 11 Single Line 2 31 Out of range preventing by autoscaling 3 7 3 12 P PDF 2 52 3 25 Performance verification functional tests 1 14 self tests 1 13 Peripherals connecting 1 7 Picture 2 36 Powering off 1 8 Powering on 1 8 Probes supported 1 3 Product accessories See Accessories description 1 1 models 1 1 unpacking 1 5 Product features 1 1 Q Quitting the application 1 11 R Rebuilding the Hard Drive D 1 Recall Measurement Setups 2 49 Recommended accessories 1 27 Reference 2 34 Reinstalling the system software D 1 Related documentation xiv Release notes 1 10 Report Mode 2 32 Reports viewing on the MS Windows desktop 2 22 Restore the application when hidden 2 22 Results appear as dashes 3 5 3 9 Results menu 3 16 RTF 2 52 3 25 Run button 2 22 Run Mode interactions with Average setting 3 16 3 20 option 2 29 Run Only 3 11 Run Only button 3 6 Index 4 Run Only Option 2 29
258. ngs 6 In the application window select Configuration gt Format to display the Format view 7 Select the 1080i 60 HD or 4801 60 SD button 8 In the application window select Configuration gt Operation to display the Operation view VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 1 15 Incoming Inspection 9 In the application window select the Run button to start the application measurement process The instrument begins taking measurements and displays a Color bars measurement view listing measurement values similar to those as shown ColorB Results ColorBars Measured ii e a Unit mY Pb B Line Number White 0 04 Yellow 350 24 Cyan 77 89 Green 11 270 15 Magenta 265 63 Red 79 82 Blue 347 46 Black z 1 0 37 Average Figure 1 4 Displaying measurement values in color bars measurement 10 Select the Picture button to display the VM5000 Video Monitor Window Verify that a color bars signal appears Option VGA This procedure uses the output of a PC Display Card to verify the functionality of the VM5000 Option VGA measurement set comprising the VM5000 Option VGA RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit MIU and associated cables Equipment required VM5000 Option VGA RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit VGA to 5 BNC cable part number 174 5126 XX PC with VGA Display Card 1 16 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Incoming Inspection NOTE These procedure
259. nstruction each burst may contain one or several frequency aliases In such cases burst frequencies that increase with each burst of the input signal may contain burst frequencies in nearly any order in the output of the device under test For example in the 480p rendering of an ATSC 1080i multiburst signal 5 MHz is rescaled to 4 85 MHz 10 MHz to 9 71 but 15 MHz 20 MHz 25 MHz and 30 MHz become any number of frequencies including 12 44 MHz 7 58 MHz 2 73 MHz and 2 12 MHz respectively These frequency aliases and respective amplitudes are measured and displayed in order 2 12 MHz 2 73 MHz 4 85 MHz 7 58 MHz 9 71 MHz 12 44 MHz The six largest peaks are found in the spectrum of signal on the pedestal These frequencies are displayed in order from lowest to highest For each of these frequencies the maximum magnitude of the cross correlation between the signal within the pedestal area and a windowed complex sinusoid is found This gives the amplitude The unweighted noise within the nominal bandwidth of the video signal is measured to ensure that the video quality is not reduced by random errors such as those that cause snow You can use the matrix signal or you can use any flat line or line pedestal signal As a rule of thumb errors generally become visible when the signal to noise dB measurement ranges in the low 40s However the degree of visibility depends on many factors including spectral distribution of the noise
260. nt panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average a There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the Color Bars measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the H Sync Measurement Option VGA To set up the H Sync measurement select Results gt H Sync to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that you can change for the measurement For H Sync you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change the settings for the H Sync measurement 1 On the menu bar click Results gt H Sync 2 To change the line n
261. number of times the measurement is averaged To change the settings for the Video Transient measurement 1 On the menu bar click Results gt Video Transient 2 To change the line number click the Line Number box Line Number am There are three ways to change the line number Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average amp FE There are three ways to change the average VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements m Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the Video Transient measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 97 Tee Viewing Measurement Results Use the Results menu to select the measure
262. ny performance verification tests m Perform the VM5000 instrument internal system diagnostics in the Utilities menu The instrument must pass the diagnostics before you can verify performance m Perform the VM5000 instrument Signal Path Calibration SPC procedure The instrument must pass the SPC before you can verify performance Required Equipment The Option SD HD performance verification requires the equpiment shown in Table B 1 Table B 1 Required test equipment for Option SD HD performance verification Item number and description Minimum requirements Example Purpose HD CAV Television Test Signal Tektronix TG700 with AWVG7 All tests generator one required module Digital Multimeter 5 1 2 digits better than 0 1 Fluke 8842A or AWVG7 signal output test one required DC accuracy 0 1 V Fluke model 45 75 Q BNC Cable 42 inches 106 68 cm long Tektronix part number All tests four required 012 0074 00 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 1 Appendix B Performance Verification Table B 1 Required test equipment for Option SD HD performance verification Cont Item number and description Minimum requirements Example 75 Q precision BNC 0 025 Accuracy Tektronix part number terminations four required 011 0102 03 Connector Dual Banana Female BNC to dual banana Tektronix part number one required 103 0090 00 Connector BNC T Male BNC to dual female BNC Tektronix part number four re
263. o Measurement Set User Manual 3 47 Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information Linearity Measurement 3 48 Signal Source Interpreting Results How Results are Calculated Linearity is a measure of how well the device under test performs analog to digital and digital to analog conversions Linearity consists of the Resolution Integral linearity Differential linearity and Monotonic measurements The integral linearity is the actual nth value compared to the ideal nth value normalized to the ideal LSB command voltage LSBc Differential linearity is the difference between the DAC output voltage measured in the nth value and that of the previous value n 1 normalized to the ideal LSB command voltage LSBc Resolution refers to the number of distinct vertical levels in the video signal based on the steps Resolution is represented as a bit For a 256 level DAC the resolution is reported as eight bits For levels greater than 128 and less than 256 the resolution reported is eight bits Monotonicity is the property whether or not the video signal is continuously rising or falling without any inflection points Monotonicity is decided by determining the progression of the successive gray levels The test signal used for the Linearity measurement is the Staircase which is located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM The Staircase test signal contains a pattern ranging from black to white The file is available in BMP format
264. o approxi mately 1 5 div below graticule center 15 Turn Mean measurement statistics back on Measure gt Statistics gt Mean 16 Record the Average Mean measurement value to the nearest 0 1mV in Table B 9 Measured Black level in the G column NOTE The oscilloscope readout may be in micro volts uV if the value is near zero 17 Move the min loss pad and cable from the MIU G input to the MIU B input 18 Repeat steps 10 through 16 for the B channel NOTE Settings are for CH2 rather than CH1 and B in place of G 19 Move the min loss pad and cable from the MIU B input to the MIU R input 20 Repeat steps 10 through 16 for the R channel VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification NOTE Settings are for CH3 rather than CH1 and R in place of G 21 In Table B 9 subtract the Measured Black Levels row 2 from the Measured White Levels row 1 and enter the results in row 3 These are the Measured White to Black Amplitude values for each channel 22 Calculate the Upper and Lower White limit values and the Upper and Lower Black limit values using the equations shown in Table B 9 NOTE The equations reference the DC700 and DCO multimeter values from Table B 8 on page B 20 For these calculations make sure you use the multimeter values from Table B 7 on page B 20
265. of the original pulse such as repeated pulses from reflections for example ringing etc Ideally the signal beyond 2T before and after the center of the pulse is practically zero Linear distortions can cause deviations from zero The greatest perceptual deviation from zero is used as the K2T measurement Perceptually a low amplitude pulse far from the original pulse is more noticeable than the same pulse very close to the original Therefore signal amplitude deviations are weighted accordingly A reference signal deviation far from the pulse is used CCIR specifies 4 of the test pulse amplitude as the reference deviation amplitude K 04 Measurements of the undershoot and overshoot at the edge of a T rise bar are not generally calculated as a percent of the transition amplitude but in terms of an amplitude weighing system that yields results in percent SD This weighing is necessary because the amount of distortion depends not only on the distortion amplitude but also on the time the distortion occurs with respect to the transition The Short Time Distortion relative to reference value is calculated as follows Result measured value reference value VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option SD HD Detailed Measurement Information Sync This measurement is used to check synchronization signal timing and amplitude including the relative position of the start and end of active video interpreted by lookin
266. of the pulse width Sync pulse width is determined by detecting the edges of the sync signal The position difference between the two edges is shown as the result Rise time is the time taken for the signal to rise from 10 to 90 of steady state level Overshoot Undershoot settling time is the time taken for the signal to reach 5 of its steady state value H Sync frequency is derived from pulse time value H Sync Jitter Measurement Horizontal Sync Jitter is the time between the superimposed image of the second sync pulse over the first or triggered edge Jitter is the variation of a digital signal s significant instants such as transition points from the ideal positions in time Use the H Sync Jitter measurement to measure the Horizontal Sync Jitter See Figure 3 2 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 45 Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information Signal Source Interpreting Results How Results are Calculated Max period gt Min period o Figure 3 2 Jitter in H Sync period The test signal used for the H Sync Jitter measurement can be any of the available patterns in the Matrix signal which is located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM A low numeric value of the H Sync jitter indicates a higher quality of incoming signal The peak to peak H Sync Jitter is calculated as follows Max SyncPeriod value Min SyncPeriod rate 2 Jitter peak peak
267. olor Space HD f x Alz Configure Option VGA Fle Edb Vertical HoizjAcq Trig Display Cursors Mesure Math Ubltes Help E gt Configuration d urem Format Measurements Operations V Ve R E Resolution f Timing Configure User Defined Format BB User Defined Format v add Edit Delete cat A VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 21 Operating Basics The VM5000 Application User Interface 2 22 1 al Pd Menu bar The menu bar allows you to configure the different parameters of the application Use the menu bar to display the results information in the Results window Application view The main application window displays the configuration controls and the measurement results Run Button Click Run to run the selected measurements and to display the results Stop button Click Stop to stop running the selected measurements Option SD HD ie File Configuration Results Utilities Help Configuration Seo Meanirement Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference Limits Picture amp Vector Format Color Space Alz 9 YPbPr 7 RGB Configure Signal Configuration Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference BL imits i x Resolution Refresh Rate Timing 1600x102 i440 50Hz 72Hz 100K2 ONT B 2 80 CVT En CVT R Configure CTF 70H 35Hz User Defined Format
268. on Fuse rating Nonvolatile memory retention Overvoltage Category VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Description 100 to 240 Vams 10 47 Hz to 63 Hz CAT Il or 115 Vans 10 360 to 440 Hz lt 220 Watts Internal to power supply not serviceable by user CMOS settings stored for a period of 3 years without instrument connection to power mains Calibration settings and error log entries stored for 1 million cycles or 20 years Overvoltage Category II as defined in IEC61010 1 A2 A 13 Appendix A Specifications Table A 8 Mechanical specifications Characteristic Weight Benchtop configuration Rackmount kit Dimensions Benchtop configuration Rackmount configuration Option 1R Cooling Required clearances Construction material Description 24 75 lbs 10 2 kg oscilloscope only 56 5 lbs 25 6 kg when packaged for domestic shipment 5 Ibs 2 3 kg rackmount conversion kit 8 lbs 3 6 kg kit packaged for domestic shipment Height 14 2 in 360 7 mm Height feet extended 14 25 in 362 mm Width 17 6 in 447 mm Depth 11 35 in 288 3 mm Height 10 5 in 267 mm Width 19 in 483 mm Depth 9 1 in 231 mm Fan forced air circulation with no air filter Top 0 in 0 mm Bottom 0 25 in minimum or 0 in 0 mm when standing on the feet Left side 3 in 76 mm Right side 0 in 5 in 126 mm required to access CD ROM Front 0 in 0 mm 0 in 0 mm Chassis parts c
269. on of a band limited video signal across the frequency spectrum For example a frequency roll off decrease in amplitude with increasing frequency is seen with video from an analog to digital converter that lacks a reconstruction filter with sin x x correction In this example quality is reduced by things like loss of detail in the video or color shifts in details Deviations in frequency from the reference test signal frequency for example a 30 MHz burst is rendered as a 20 MHz burst may indicate things such as a frequency shift due to format change frequency aliasing due to digital and or analog re sampling and or frequency aliasing due to the lack of a proper reconstruction filter The flag amplitude measurement can be used to verify the channel gain across a wider frequency range than each burst Burst amplitudes are measured relative to the flag amplitude Signal Source You can use the matrix signal or you can use any multiburst signal with a reference flag preceding the bursts The more cycles present in each burst the more robust and generally more accurate the measurement will be A burst with less than 2 cycles is not recommended The frequencies are always displayed from lowest to highest regardless of the order of burst frequencies in the multiburst signal To avoid confusion regarding the correspondence between the results burst numbering and the signal burst ordering a signal with increasing burst frequencies from left to
270. on about the files provided The higher the average the lower the variance of the measurement in the presence of noise or other transient signal components Set the average higher if you would like to reduce the fluctuations in the measurement results The instrument averages results not input waveforms If on the other hand the Noise waveforms were averaged instead of the Noise results the noise results would appear lower than they should Because of the instrument average results this problem is avoided VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 27 Option SD HD Detailed Measurement Information Channel Delay 3 28 Signal Source Interpreting Results The channel delay measurement is used to verify relative timing of the three channels of video Nominal channel delay is zero between all channels Deviations from zero correspond to decreased video quality For example the greater the delay between channels the more likely the edges in video will be perceived as distorted Using a narrow band signal the delay at a particular frequency band can be measured and thus group delay can be obtained In addition channel delay is a function of relative cable lengths for each of the channels Thus if a splitter is used at the video source output delay due to cable length mismatch can be measured You can use the matrix signal or you can use a signal with high cross correlation between each pair of channels to be tes
271. onstructed of aluminum alloy front panel constructed of plastic laminate circuit boards constructed of glass laminate outer shell molded and textured from a polycarbonate ABS blend Table A 9 Environmental specifications Characteristic Temperature Operating Nonoperating Description 5 C to 45 C 41 F to 113 F 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F without diskette in floppy drive A 14 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 9 Environmental specifications Cont Characteristic Humidity Operating Nonoperating Altitude Operating Nonoperating Random vibration Operating Nonoperating Shock nonoperating VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Description 20 to 80 relative humidity with a maximum wet bulb temperature of 29 C 84 2 F at or below 45 C 113 F noncondensing Upper limit derated to 30 relative humidity at 45 C 113 F With no diskette in floppy disk drive 5 to 90 relative humidity with a maximum wet bulb temperature of 29 C 84 2 F at or below 60 C 140 F noncondensing Upper limit derated to 20 relative humidity at 60 C 140 F 10 000 ft 3 048 m 40 000 ft 12 190 m 0 1 Gams from 5 Hz to 500 Hz 10 minutes on each axis 3 axes 30 minutes total 2 0 Gams from 5 Hz to 500 Hz 10 minutes on each axis 3 axes 30 minutes total 30 g 11 ms half sine wav
272. or Connection of the PC video card to the VM5000 using RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 7 Operating Basics 2 8 To connect the RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit 1 Connect the device under test DUT to the input side of the RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit using one of the VGA to BNC adapter cables supplied with your VM5000 See Figure 2 9 li Measurement interface Unit Give h B cia I t R H A TE P pei L Ve ty o PC VGA Out D w of connector Figure 2 9 Connection of the DUT to the RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit 2 Connect the outputs Aux CH1 CH4 of the RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit to same inputs on the VM5000 that is connect the CH1 output to the CH1 input See Figure 2 10 Measurement interface Unit i ij i w a aca o min mi VM5000 Figure 2 10 Connection of the RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit to the VM5000 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics 3 Connect the RS 232C cable between the RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit and the COM1 port on the VM5000 See Figure 2 11 Measurement RS 232 C port in back X interface Unit So Figure 2 11 Connecting the RS 232C cable between the Measurement Interface Unit and the VM5000 4 Verify that the Use MIU checkbox on the Configuration gt Operation tab is selected See Figure 2 12
273. p 24 M1080p24 mpg 16 9 1080i 50 M1080i50 mpg 16 9 59 94 M1080i59 mpg 16 9 Table E 7 Advanced TV Bitmaps Image format File name 720 M720 BMP M720XT BMP 1080 M1080 BMP M1080XT BMP VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual E 5 Appendix E Signal Sources Package Contents Table E 8 Standard Definition TV Elementary Streams Image format Field rate File Ratio 480i 59 94 M480i4x3A mpg 4 3 M480i16x9A mpg st ssid M480i16x9D mpg 16 9 480p 59 94 M480p4x3 mpg 4 3 576i 59 94 M576i4x3 mpg 4 3 576p 59 94 M576p4x3 mpg 4 3 Table E 9 Standard Definition TV Bitmaps Image format File name 480 M480 BMP M480XT BMP 576 M576 BMP M576XT BMP To use the elementary stream files copy the appropriate files into your transport stream multiplexor Figure E 3 shows a typical elementary stream test setup MPEG Transport getap Modul Elementary Stream Stream odulator VM5000 files on CD Multiplexor Figure E 3 Using elementary stream signals E 6 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix E Signal Sources Package Contents 480 and 576 Line DVDs The 480 Line DVD Tektronix part number 063 3795 XX and 576 Line DVD Tektronix part number 063 3795 XX both generate 60 second Matrix pattern test signals for use with the VM5000 instrument The DVD files are available in the formats listed in Table E 10 Table E 10 Available formats of DVD files DVD Image format Field r
274. p or five step linearity test signal If using a ramp signal the instrument divides the ramp signal into five values to determine the equivalent step values The instrument then measures the bottom individual step and top values of the test signal and compares these values to a nominal value to determine the percent of deviation of the test signal from the nominal signal Non Linearity Line Number Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value Measurement depends on the input signal format as set by Configuration gt Setup Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Average 16 Sets the number of measurements acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value Results Displays the percent of deviation of the test signal from a nominal signal value as a percentage for each step on each channel Measures the short time distortion of the input signal Short Time Line Number Sets the input signal line number to measure The default value Distortion Setup depends on the input signal format as set by Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Average 1 Sets the number of measurements acquisitions over which to calculate the average measurement value Short Time Displays the Rise Time ns Fall Time ns Overshoot Distortion Results Undershoot Settling Time
275. pattern E 4 c nhiding hidden application 2 22 pgrade firmware 1 3 SB devices 1 7 ser files backing up 1 9 ser interface description 2 22 sing Custom Instrument Settings 3 7 tilities menu Generate Report 3 25 Instrument Calibration 1 14 Instrument Diagnostics 1 13 E G GS Eee V V Sync detailed measurement information 3 52 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual displaying 3 127 setting up 3 94 V Timing detailed measurement information 3 55 displaying 3 128 setting up 3 95 Vectorscope 2 39 Verification incoming inspection procedure 1 13 Version number 3 26 Vertical scale autoscaling 3 7 3 12 Video specifications A 19 Video Transient detailed measurement information 3 56 displaying 3 130 setting up 3 96 Viewing measurement results 2 41 Viewing reports on the desktop 2 22 VMSET files recalling 3 3 W Warning Message Reporting 2 33 Warnings 2 33 Windows desktop accessing 2 22 Windows operating system backup tool 1 9 Index 5 Read This First Tektronix VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA 071 1855 00 Pa Read This First This following procedure was inadvertently left out of the VM5000 printed user manual Tek part number 071 1522 02 Future editions of the manual will include this procedure Measurement Interface Unit Performance Verification This performance verification can be used to establish that the RGBHV Measurement Interf
276. pear on the product A A CAUTION WARNING Protective Ground Refer to Manual High Voltage Earth Terminal VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual a Environmental Considerations Product End of Life Handling Restriction of Hazardous Substances This section provides information about the environmental impact of the product Observe the following guidelines when recycling an instrument or component Equipment Recycling Production of this equipment required the extraction and use of natural resources The equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or human health if improperly handled at the product s end of life In order to avoid release of such substances into the environment and to reduce the use of natural resources we encourage you to recycle this product in an appropriate system that will ensure that most of the materials are reused or recycled appropriately The symbol shown to the left indicates that this product complies with the European Union s requirements according to Directive 2002 96 EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE Mercury Notification This product uses an LCD backlight lamp that contains mercury Disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations Please contact your local authorities or within the United States the Electronics Industries Alliance www eiae org for disposal or recycling information This product has been cla
277. perating Basics 3 Wire Video with Composite Sync Setup 2 Option SD HD Signal source Tektronix MTX100 0 so 2 Rop Use this setup for testing 3 wire component analog video signals Y G Pb B Pr R with the composite sync signal on Y G See Figure 2 6 Set the triggering on the instrument to channel 1 the default trigger setting is channel 4 This setup is simpler than the others mentioned in this section but limits noise measurement on Y G to 65 dB 30 MHz noise bandwidth VM5000 Set top box Modulator o D0 O0 Y G PB Pr R g CH1 CH2 CH3 omi YIG P B P R rt BNC T connector 75 Q Termination Figure 2 6 Connection of 3 wire video with composite sync Setup 2 NOTE Verify that the trigger channel is set to channel 4 the default setting If the trigger setting Configuration gt Operation is not set to channel 4 you will see signal warning messages and will be unable to take measurements VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 5 Operating Basics 4 Wire Video with Use this setup for testing 4 wire component analog video signals Separate Composite Sync Y G Pb B Pr R with the composite sync signal on a separate output line For Option SD HD CH4 termination is optional For CH4 only you can use no termination or a 75 Q termin
278. pplication menu bar select File gt Recall Default Setup 5 Enable only the Luma Levels measurement From the VM5000 menu bar select Configuration gt Measurements Press Clear All to de select all measurements and select Luma Levels VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification 6 Run the Luma Levels measurement by clicking the Run button After about 40 seconds a Signal Warning message Luma Levels Acquisition Problem will appear This is normal as no video signal has been applied Click OK to clear the warning message The measurement will then stop No values will be reported in Results NOTE The purpose of this step is to properly set the channel gains and offsets From Part 1 the 9500B Oscilloscope Calibrator should already have a coaxial cable connected to its output with a min loss pad on the other end of the cable 7 Connect the open male end of the min loss pad to the MIU G input See Figure B 7 Fluke Wavetek 9500B Oscilloscope Calibrator 9530 Active head Female to female BNC adapter 50 to 75 Q 50 Q co ax cable Min loss pad RS 232 VM5000 Figure B 7 Setup to determine absolute amplitude measurement accuracy 8 On the VM5000 front panel under TRIGGER press the MODE button to change from NORM to AUTO 9 From Part 1 the 9500B Amplitude should already be set to produce 700 mV at th
279. quired 103 0030 00 Coupler Dual Input BNC T Female BNC to dual male BNC Tektronix part number cable assembly one required 067 0525 02 Option SD HD Procedure Purpose All tests AWVG7 signal output test All tests Channel delay match test Determine the AWVG7 This procedure determines the test signal generator output signal amplitude You Signal Output Amplitude will need this value for calculating measurements This procedure assumes you are using a Tektronix TG700 test signal generator with an AWVG7 module If you are using a different test signal source modify the steps according to your particular setup Required equipment AWVG7 module Digital multimeter 75 Q BNC Cable 1 Connector Dual Banana 1 Connector BNC T 1 Prerequisites 75 Q precision BNC terminations 1 HD CAV Television Test Signal generator Tektronix TG700 with The test signal generator and multimeter must warm up for at least 20 minutes before doing this test NOTE Make sure that the AWVG7 generator module and the multimeter have had a warm up period of at least 20 minutes 1 Connect the digital multimeter to the test signal source Refer to Figure B 1 while doing the following steps a Connect one end of a 75 Q BNC cable to the upper CH1 connector on the AWVG7 generator module B 2 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification b Connect the other cabl
280. r Manual 3 61 Setting Up Measurements In Figure 3 9 and Figure 3 10 for Option VGA note that the Measured Relative and Reference tabs are selectable To display the value of the measurements relative to the reference value select the Relative tab in the Results display To display the relative results click the Relative tab File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results ColorBars F j y Measured Relative Reference Ea O mv YIG Pb B PriR P White 2 86 0 03 0 16 Line Number x d Yellow 158 0 43 078 E Z 2 Cyan 0 97 2 15 0 24 Green 1 27 0 3 0 49 Configure Magenta 0 52 4 35 3 412 1 Red 0 56 0 27 2 29 Blue 0 88 2 65 0 51 suit _ _ aa et mae Average Signal Figure 3 9 Relative to reference results displayed Option SD HD To display the relative results click the Relative tab File Configuration Results Utiliti s Help Results H Sync Measured Relative Reference Neg ao 153 Syne Perio 0 0020 0 0060 0 927 0 564 Line Humber Configure Average Logic Li Figure 3 10 Relative to reference results displayed Option VGA Creating a Custom Reference File 3 62 Reference files are used as the source of comparison for calculating the Relative to Reference values for the measurements The VM5000 includes a set of reference files that you can use as a starting point to create reference files to suit your needs VM500
281. r levels of G B and R Channels Characteristic Measured Noise value mV Lower Limit Check Channel Skew Setup the Channel Skew Match as shown in Figure B 9 Match Figure B 9 Setup to check channel skew match A standard PC 3 foot VGA to 5 BNC cable Test Signal CD VM5000 including MIU must warm up for at least 20 minutes before doing this test Required equipment Prerequisites 1 Generate a test signal using the test PC as follows a Display the contents of either the Matrix or Full Field folder Whether you choose a single test pattern or take multiple measurements you must select the bitmap file that you will display to generate the video test signal The file you select depends on the format you want to test B 26 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification Suppose you want to test a 1280X1024 resolution format the refresh rate is not considered when selecting a bitmap file Within the appropri ate folder look for a filename that matches the format of the test you want to perform If you want to test Linearity you would need to choose either full field Staircase test pattern or use the Matrix test pattern Within the Staircase folder you would look for a file named STEP1280X1024 bmp Within the Matrix folder look for a file named Matrix1024x768 bmp b Select the bitmap file that fits your requirements and open the file with a program such as Pain
282. r the test Host VM5000 with mouse and keyboard Digital Multimeter 50 Q BNC cable Qty 2 BNC T adapter Qty 1 BNC female to dual banana adapter Qty 2 Connect the MIU to the VM5000 apply power and establish communica tions using Hyperterminal as described in Test A of this procedure Check that the green LED in the RGB LF Path is illuminated If not using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 0000000 to the MIU Verify that the LED in the RGB LF Path is now illuminated NOTE The V channel and H V LF Path LEDs will also be illuminated 6 On the VM5000 front panel under VERTICAL select 1 MQ for CH1 CH2 and CH3 Connect the two BNC to banana adapters to the Multimeter one to the Ohms input the other to the Ohms Sense input Orient the adapters so the BNC shell is connected to the LO terminal of each input on typical adapters the banana plug connected to the BNC shell has a GND label Connect a BNC cable to each BNC to banana adapter Connect the other end of each cable to the BNC T adapter This connects Ohms input and Ohms Sense input in parallel at the BNC T adapter On the multimeter select 4 wire Ohms mode and 100 Ohms range VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First 5 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Read This First 10 11 12 13 Connect the BNC T a
283. racy 5 ns Any two channels VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 12 Sync Pick Off Accessory Characteristics Characteristic Trigger Path DC Attenuation DC Attenuation Tem perature Coefficient Load on Main Signal Path Minimum compensation range Frequency Response Main Signal Path Trigger Path Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Description 10X 0 7 typi cal 10X 1 5 typi cal 12 pF to 24 pF typical 50 kHz to 30 MHz 1 typi cal 50 kHz to 30 MHz 5 typi cal 5 C to 45 C typical 20 to 80 RH non condensing VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Reference Information Termination is 1 00 MQ 0 Termination is 1 00 MQ 1 This specification will be met if the 10X 0 7 specification above is met 0 1 10 C typical 10 MQ in parallel with 6 pF typical 18 pF is nominal Measured in 50 or 75 Q system Terminated in 1 MQ 18 pF with compensation properly adjusted at 25 C Main path is driven by 50 or 75 Q system A 21 Appendix A Specifications Option VGA Tables A 14 and A 13 describe characteristics specific to Option VGA Table A 14 Option VGA Video Measurements Amplitude Measurements Luma Level Max and Min mV 8 MV 2 0 VESA 6 1 Color Bars mV 3 MV 1 8 Relative to back porch H and V sync Logic 0 and 1 mV 8mV 0
284. rd the results in Table B 28 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Resolution should read 8 bit Table B 28 10 bit Linearity B Channel Level 4 of 4 Linearity B Upper limit Resolution Bits Bo 8 Max INL LSB 5 12 Max DNL LSB 0 5 Monotonic Y N Yes Yes 76 77 78 79 80 Compute composite resolution If the Resolution bits value in Tables B 25 through B 28 is the same add 2 to the value and enter this value under Resolution Bits in Table B 29 If the value for Resolution bits is not the same for all tables the Resolution portion of the performance verification for this channel has failed Determine maximum INL find the worst case INL value from Table B 25 to Table B 28 and enter the resulting value or this value plus the INL value from Table B 12 on page B 28 which ever has the largest absolute value under Max INL LSB in Table B 29 on page B 42 Determine maximum DNL find the worst case DNL value from Table B 25 to Table B 28 and enter the resulting value under Max DNL LSB in Table B 29 on page B 42 Determine monotonicity enter Yes under Monotonic Y N if and only if the corresponding values in Table B 25 through Table B 28 are Yes Otherwise enter No in Table B 28 on page B 42 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Table B 29 10 bit Linearity B Channel All Levels Linearity Upper limit Resolut
285. re 3 13 Enabling limit testing Option VGA Figure 3 14 Results when limit testing is available Figure 3 15 Customizing a limits file 00 eee e ween Figure 3 16 Illustration of the BMP test signal in full screen mode Figure 3 17 Illustration of the BMP image set as wallpaper Figure 3 18 Displaying the results summary Option SD HD Figure 3 19 Displaying the results summary Option VGA Figure 3 20 Displaying the Channel Delay measurement Figure 3 21 Displaying limit values for the Channel Delay Measurement osis che Sealine eke ig eee Hawes ae Figure 3 22 Displaying the Color Bars measurement Figure 3 23 Displaying limit values for the Color Bars measurement 2 0 ccc cece weer ence ween sees cree sence Figure 3 24 Displaying the Frequency Response measurement Figure 3 25 Displaying limit values for the Frequency Response MCASULEMNCNE serari cth iKa EVAREN Tp Oa Nie wee ee OES VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Table of Contents Figure 3 26 Displaying additional units for the Frequency Response measurement 0 cece eee c cece cence enees Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 measurement Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 monitor Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 measurement Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 measurement Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41
286. re not achieved then the problem is likely in the bridge Test G RGB WB Mode Bandwidth This test checks the bandwidth of the G B and R inputs when the RGB WB Path is active The specification is less than 3 dB down at 1500 MHz The following equipment is required for the test Host VM5000 with mouse and keyboard Spectrum Analyzer with Tracking Generator 75 50 Min loss Pad Qty 2 6 dB Attenuator Qty 2 50 Q BNC cable Qty 2 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First 15 Read This First 16 Type N to BNC adapter Qty 2 75 Q BNC female female adapter 50 Q BNC female female adapter Connect the MIU to the VM5000 apply power and establish communica tions using Hyperterminal as described in Test A of this procedure Check that the MIU RGB WB Path LED is lit If not using Hyperterminal send the command LOAD 1000000 to the MIU Verify that the RGB WB Path LED is illuminated On the VM5000 front panel under VERTICAL select 50 Q for CH1 CH2 and CH3 Set the tracking generator and spectrum analyzer controls as follows m Tracking Generator output level 0 dBm m Spectrum Analyzer Vertical scale 1 dB div m Spectrum Analyzer Reference Level 10 dBm m Horizontal scale Span Max Span or 200 MHz div if available m Center Frequency 900 1000 MHz 10 div display m Resolution BW RBW 3 MHz Connect a Type N to BNC adapter followed by a 6 dB attenuator to the tracking generator
287. re the Color Bars measurements as explained in Setting Up the Color Bars Measurement on page 3 69 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Color Bars Refer to Figure 3 22 File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Color Bars Measured Unit mv Line Number Gi Average 1 Figure 3 22 Displaying the Color Bars measurement Click the Measured tab to display the measured amplitude levels for each of the eight colors for the color bars measurement If Relative to Reference testing is enabled see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Reference Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab To create a custom reference file see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 Limit Values If Limit testing is enabled see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for each signal format and color space Select the min option to display the minimum limit values Select the max option to display the maximum limit values Refer to Figure 3 23 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Color
288. red In the absence of the MIU external 2 21 kilo ohms and 301 ohms terminations have to be manually presented The user is prompted to change the termination from 2 21 kilo ohms to a 301 ohms termination for measuring the level when drawing maximum current Variations in the sync pulse voltage may cause instability in the displayed image or for extreme cases may even prevent the monitor from locking on to the correct scan frequency Rise time is measured from the 10 to the 90 amplitude points of a positive going transition Fall time is measured from the 90 to the 10 amplitude points of a negative going transition Overshoot refers to rise above the steady state value in a positive going transition Undershoot refers to fall below the steady state value in a negative go ing transition Settling time is measured from the end of the overshoot or undershoot to the point where the amplitude of the video ringing is down to 5 of the final steady state value Monotonicity is the property whether or not the video signal is continuously rising or falling without any inflection points Monotonicity is decided by determining the progression of the successive gray levels When measuring transients rise time fall time overshoot etc the MIU is set to use the Sync Wide bandwidth path When measuring amplitude levels the MIU is set to use the Sync low bandwidth path The H Sync measurement does not require a specific test pattern It
289. refresh rate setting of the test device For example use the 640x480 AlI ternateWhite amp BlackBars bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format You can also use a Matrix signal as a test signal For more information on the Matrix signal refer to page 2 16 For example use a 640x480 Matrix bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format The Luma Levels measurement results indicate the purity of the signal on the selected channel The results are calculated with reference to the oscilloscope ground by taking an average of 100 000 points between the 20 and 80 regions of the addressable video range The selected line from consecutive frames will be used to get the required number of points The maximum and minimum amplitude values are shown as the result Noise Inj Ratio Measurement 3 50 Noise Injection Ratio is the ratio of the peak peak noise amplitude injected to the maximum signal amplitude in the video signal To make use of the instrument s full bandwidth and get the highest sampling rate each channel is acquired separately at 5 GS s gigasamples per second The minimum bandwidth as specified by the VESA specification for Noise Injection Ratio measurement is 500 MHz There can be minor variations in the Noise floor of different instruments which can result in different results for the same DUT therefore a filter option is provided to limit the bandwidth to a pre defined value By using a 500 MHz filter more accurately measured
290. rement results Limit values for the Luma Levels measurement Noise Inj Ratio measurement results with MIU Limit values for the Noise Inj Ratio measurement V Sync measurement results Limit values for the V Sync measurement V Timing measurement results VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual vii Table of Contents viii Figure 3 60 Limit values for the V Timing measurement Figure 3 61 Video Transient measurement results Figure 3 62 Limit values for the Video Transient measurement Figure 3 63 Displaying Pass Fail results in results summary for Option SD HD gt eseist 3 ae os Badal geek ee dd ees Figure 3 64 Displaying Pass Fail results in results summary for Option VGA ceesre 20h 6 sae a brane WS teas Gea Peer eS Figure 3 65 Displaying Pass Fail results Option SD HD Figure 3 66 Displaying Pass Fail results Option VGA Figure A 1 Graph of Immunity behavior 0005 Figure B 1 Signal output amplitude test hookup Figure B 2 Amplitude accuracy test hookup 006 Figure B 3 Frequency accuracy test hookup 00 Figure B 4 Noise floor accuracy test hookup 06 Figure B 5 Channel delay match test hookup 00 Figure B 6 Setup to determine 9500B signal output amplitude Figure B 7 Setup to determine absolute amplitude measurement ACCULACY Peitiaie dae 0a
291. rements 1 Select Results gt Short Time Distortion 2 To change the setting for Line Number click the Line Number box Line Humber F There are three ways to change the number Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average EEE There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 79 Setting Up Measurements The next time the Short Time Distortion measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the Sync Measurement 3 80 Option SD HD To set up the Sync measurements select Results gt Sync to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that can be changed for the m
292. rements Measurements Operation Warnings Warnings Reference amp Limits Reference amp Limits Molt Lines Picture amp Vector Option SD HD p Fila Configuration Results Utilities Holp Configuration Format Meaeuramante Operations Warnings Ruference amp Limite Picture amp Vector Eas Setup Andor Run Run Mode Awto Scale Trigger aru meee octanns EF Z D y ec Channel 1 Initial Values Configure ol PE ZA RA Option VGA amp File Configuration Results Utllittes Help Configuration Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits Setup And Or Run Run Mode i Auto Scale ed Enavied Initial Values Configure gt Lasi Mea RGBHV MIU Sync Polarity Report Mode Last alled Use miu Sd Auto Detect Wi Embdoc Scroon Capture Restore Default Setup And Or Run Setup amp R tup Only amp Run Only VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics m Setup amp Run Configures the instrument setting and takes a measurement for each selected measurement and for each measurement acquisition Use this when taking multiple measure ments that require different instrument setups m Setup Only Configures the instrument for a measurement but does not take the measurement Use this to set up customized settings Try out your settings by pressing the Run button make adjustments as needed for example change the horizontal scale a
293. resolution the refresh rate and the timing standard for the input signal Select one or more measurements to take Set the measurement run operation Select Configuration gt Reference amp Limits VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements 5 Select Enable Relative Result Display See Figure 3 8 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Configuration Format Measurements Operations Warnings Reference amp Limits Picture amp Vector Relative Result Display Limit Testing fd Enable Relative Result Display W Enable Limit Testing Capture Results as Reference Stop on Lirit Testing Failure Reference Selection Limits Selection e Default BE eee elect Reference File SU Select Limits File Figure 3 8 Enabling relative to reference results By default the software selects a reference file appropriate to the specified signal format However you can specify a different reference file by selecting Manual in the Reference Selection pane 6 To specify a reference file click Manual under Reference Selection Click Select Reference File and navigate to the required reference file and select it 7 After you have selected the reference file click the Run button to take and view the measurements 8 Views the measurement results by selecting the corresponding menu item in the results panel of the measurement VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Use
294. resolution and 85 Hz refresh rate From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Measure ment gt Clear All From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Measure ment gt Linearity From the VM5000 application menu bar deselect Disable Configuration gt Operations panel gt Sync polarity gt Auto Detect From the VM5000 application menu bar deselect Disable Configuration gt Warnings gt Pop Up Warning Details On the AWG710B Load the H sync test file and setup from the floppy drive by following these steps Load the pvlinearltysetup set setup file Press buttons in the following sequence setup button gt Save Restore bottom gt restore setup right gt drive right gt floppy center gt OK right gt pvlinearltysetup set middle gt OK right Wait for file loading to complete On the AWG710B Generate the test signal on the AWG710B by following these steps a Press the CH1 button to enable signal output from Channel 1 b Press the MARKER OUT button to enable signal output from MKR 1 c Press the Run button to start generating the signal VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification 8 bit INL DNL Monotonicity and Resolution measurement The steps for checking the 8 bit INL DNL Monotonicity and Resolution measurement are as follows 11 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to t
295. rk Corporation cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator N CAUTION To prevent getting moisture inside the instrument during external If the display is very dirty moisten the wipe with distilled water or a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution and gently rub the display surface Avoid using excess force or you may damage the plastic display surface C 2 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual eer ae Appendix D Rebuilding the Hard Drive If you need to rebuild the hard drive you must install software from three CDs in the following order 1 Follow the directions in the CD jewelcase booklet to install the operating system restore CD 063 3693 XX Follow the directions in the CD jewelcase booklet to install the TDS5000 product software CD 063 3692 XX Install the VM5000 application CD 063 3768 XX Follow the online instructions When asked enter your option key information from the sticker on the back of your instrument VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual D 1 SS E ee Appendix E Signal Sources Package Contents There are two versions of the Signal Sources package One version for Op tion SD HD and one version for Option VGA The version for Option SD HD is described below The description of the Option VGA version begins on page E 8 Option SD HD Signal Source Discs The Signal Sources package Option SS in upgrade kits is a collection of DVDs and CDs tha
296. roduct manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate this product with metal covers or panels removed Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual XV General Safety Summary xvi Symbols and Terms A A Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may ap
297. rt File Ea File Name Em CAVMEO00TIAReporsiT ei nif trv 3 Get Default tie Report Heading E7 Configure Measurements Oa a Option VGA File Configuration Results Utilities Help Utilities Generate Report Format Report File RIF File Name CN Reports T ekO rtf POF Get Default csy Description E Measurements All Pererate Repo 3 Select a report format Which format you to select depends on what you want to do with the measurement results gt Option SD HD Format Option VGA Format RIF O RTF PDF csv PDF VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 51 Operating Basics m RTF Use RTF Rich Text Format to create results data that you can incorporate into documents PDF Use PDF Portable Document Format to create files of the measurement data for distribution and viewing m CSV VM5000 Option SD HD or CSV Option VGA Use CSV VM5000 Comma Sepa rated Values to save results in a format that contains information on all the new measurements and options For example Relative to Reference and Limit Testing results are included in the report m CSV Legacy Option SD HD Original format for Version 1 of the software It is provided for compatibility for customers who use a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet macro to process the file 4 Use the File Name box to Option SD HD specify where you want to save the report Use the Browse
298. s 2 17 Table 2 3 Elements of Option VGA Matrix Signal 2 18 Table 2 4 Resolutions and line number ranges supported at 60 Hz DMT standard for Option VGA 008 2 19 Table 3 1 Overview of menu descriptions eeeeee 3 1 Table 3 2 Elements of the reference file eee evens 3 63 Table 3 3 Matching measurements to the appropriate Full Field test patterin seii ds eee Shwe Sora aie co eee hone oa er ecw is was E RE OTSA 3 82 Table 3 4 Status Box Indicators in Results Summary pane 3 100 Table 3 5 Warning Box Indicators in Results Summary pane 3 100 Table A 1 Channel input and vertical specifications A 1 Table A 2 Horizontal and acquisition system specifications A 5 Table A 3 Trigger specifications ssssussssssesoosesoe A 6 Table A 4 Display specifications ccc cece eee eee eee A 11 Table A 5 Input output port specifications sssssssesoe A 11 Table A 6 Data storage specifications cece eee eens A 13 Table A 7 Power source specifications ceeeeeeeees A 13 Table A 8 Mechanical specifications cee eeeeeees A 14 Table A 9 Environmental specifications e cece eee A 14 Table A 10 Certifications and compliances 5005 A 16 Table A 11 Video measurement specifications A 19 Table A 12 Sync Pick Off Accessory Characteristics A 21 Table
299. s Fall Time ns Overshoot Undershoot Overshoot S T ns Undershoot S T ns Monotonic Rise Y N Monotonic Fall Y N Logic Level 1 mV 2 21 kQ and 8 mA and Logic Level 0 mV 2 21 kQ and 8 mA Results are reported on the Measured tab and if enabled on the Relative Reference and Limits tabs VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 21 Menu Descriptions Command H Sync Jitter H Timing Linearity 3 22 Function H Sync Jitter is the H Sync Jitter Measurement Setup H Sync Jitter Results Setting or field time superimposed image of No of Lines Description the second sync pulse over the first or triggered edge Sets the number of lines to measure Displays the H Sync Jitter in ns and in Pixel Clock Results are reported on the Measured tab and if enabled on the Relative Reference and Limits tabs H Timing comprises of the horizontal sync pulse the back porch the addressable video signal the front porch the left border and the H Timing Measurement Setup H Timing Results right border Line Number Average Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value depends on the input signal format as set by Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Sets the number of acquisitions over which to calculate an average meas
300. s Limit Values Configure the H Timing measurements as explained in Setting Up the H Timing Measurement on page 3 89 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt H Timing Refer to Figure 3 49 Fie Configuration Results Utilities Help Measured Relative Reference Limits G Line Humber Back Porch us Results H Timing Left Border us Addressable Video us Right Border us Front Porch us 613 Average 4 3 Sync Pulse Width us Pixel Clock MHz Figure 3 49 H Timing measurement results Click the Measured tab to display the measured values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 If Limit testing is enabled see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for the supported combination of resolution refresh rate and timing standard VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 121 Viewing Measurement Results Select the min option to display the minimum limit values for the measurement Select the max option to display the max
301. s P5050 10X 500 MHz Passive Voltage Probe Blank CDR CDRW Click N Burn Patch Floppy Disk Precision 75 Q terminations 4 2 21 KQ and 301 Q Terminator Kit BNC Female to Female connector BNC Male to Male connector BNC T connectors 4 2 21 kQ resistor 301 resistor Part number 020 2634 XX 174 5126 XX 174 5147 XX 012 1685 XX 011 0183 XX 161 0104 00 161 0104 06 161 0104 07 161 0104 05 161 0104 08 161 0167 00 161 A005 00 161 0306 00 119 6936 XX 118 9402 XX 200 4651 XX 016 1935 XX 020 2450 XX P5050 020 2434 XX 063 XXXX XX 011 0102 XX 020 2633 XX 103 0028 XX 103 0029 XX 103 0030 XX 322 3226 00 322 31 43 00 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Options and Accessories Table 1 3 Standard Accessories cont Accessory VGA to BNC Sync Combiner cable Table 1 4 lists the Recommended Accessories Table 1 4 Recommended Accessories Accessories TDS5000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Service Manual Transit Case Probe Calibration Compensation and Deskew Adapter Power Deskew Fixture Video Display Clamp P5050 500 MHz 10x passive probe GPIB Cable 3 3 ft or 1m GPIB Cable 6 6 ft or 2m Centronics printer cable Part Number 071 1362 XX 016 1937 XX 067 0405 XX 067 1478 00 013 0278 XX P5050 012 0991 01 012 0991 00 012 1214 00 Part number 012 1664 XX The accessories in Table 1 5 were orderable for use with the instrument at the
302. s cable to open end of the BNC female female adapter Move the min loss pad and cable currently connected to the VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First Read This First Example Table 4 Calculations 16 17 18 19 20 21 MIU G input BNC to the B input BNC The frequency response of the MIU B channel should be visible Repeat steps 11 13 for the B channel CHECK that the B channel response at 1500 MHz is less than 3 0 dB down Disconnect the MIU CH2 coaxial cable from the BNC female female adapter and reconnect it the VM5000 CH2 input Now disconnect the MIU CH3 cable from the VM5000 Attach this cable to open end of the BNC female female adapter Move the min loss pad and cable currently connected to the MIU B input BNC to the R input BNC The frequency response of the MIU R channel should be visible Repeat steps 11 13 for the R channel CHECK that the R channel response at 1500 MHz is less than 3 0 dB down Disconnect the MIU CH3 coaxial cable from the BNC female female adapter and reconnect it the VM5000 CH3 input The series connected min loss pads measure 0 6 dB at 1500 MHz The MIU G channel measures 1 6 dB at 1500 MHz with one min loss pad and 1 4 dB at 1500 MHz with the second min loss pad The corrected G channel 1500 MHz response is calculated to be 1 2 dB column C6 See Table 5 Table 5 Sample Table 4 worksheet GCH BCH RCH Equations C
303. s nine colors They are white yellow cyan green magenta red blue black and white If you generate your own color bars test signal it should have the first and the last bar white and the remaining seven color bars in any order Each of the bars should be at least 1 24 of the active line time in duration If you plan to take only Color Bars measurements use a Full Field test pattern of the type Color Bars Select the bitmap file that matches the format and the refresh rate of the test For example use the 640x480 ColorBars bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format You can also use a Matrix signal as a test signal For more information on the Matrix signal refer to page 2 16 For example look for a 640x480 Matrix bmp file to test a 640x480 resolution format The reference value of the amplitude level relative to the back porch of each of the colors is either 0 mV or 700 mV for G B and R channels For example relative value of 15 mV for yellow G channel indicates that the measured value of the signal is greater than the reference value of the signal First the bars are identified using the relative amplitudes of the three channels and the specification for the selected format and colorimetry The amplitudes are calculated using waveform averaged values within each identified bar relative to the back porch Thus it is important to ensure that the VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option VGA Detailed Meas
304. s verify that the application features operate They do not verify that they operate within limits Therefore when the instructions in these functional tests call for you to verify that a signal appears on screen that is about five divisions in amplitude or has a period of about six horizontal divisions and so on do not interpret the quantities given as limits Do not change the front panel settings unless directed to by the procedure If you change front panel settings you may obtain invalid results In this case redo the procedure from step 1 When you are instructed to press a front panel button or screen button the button may already be selected its label is lighted If this is the case it is not necessary to press the button 1 Connect the RGBHV MIU to the VM5000 as described in Option VGA Setup 1 RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit on page 2 7 2 Set the VGA display card under test to any built in format such as 800x600 60 supported by Option VGA This can be done in the PC by using the Display Properties menu Select the corresponding Matrix BMP file Resolution 800x600 Matrix Signal bmp from the PC Bitmap Graphics CD part number 020 2634 XX and display the BMP file in full screen mode 3 Remove the PC monitor connection from the VGA display card and connect the VGA display card output to the input channels on the MIU using the VGA to 5 x BNC adapter cable 4 Ensure that all four channels of the VM5000 ar
305. ser Defined Format VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Menu Descriptions Command Function Setting or field Description Modifies the selected User Defined Format Delete Deletes the selected User Defined Format Measurements Select the video signal measurements to take You can select from one to twelve measurements in any combination Measurements Ch Ch Mismatch Select from one to twelve measurements in any combination Ch Ch Skew When you click Run the selected measurements will be taken Color Bars H Sync For more information see Detailed Measurement Information on H Sync Jitter page 3 27 H Timing Linearity For a high level overview of measurements refer to Results Luma Levels Menu on page 3 16 Noise Inj Ratio V Sync V Timing Video Transient Operations Set the measurement runtime options including test run mode waveform autoscaling line select setting using RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit accessory sync polarity and embed screen captures in report mode Setup And Or Setup amp Run For each selected measurement and for each measurement Run acquisition this setting automatically configures the instrument settings and takes a measurement Use this when taking multiple measurements that require different instrument setups Setup Only The application configures the instrument for a measurement but does not take the measurement Use this to set up customized settings Customized s
306. splay m Resolution BW RBW 3 MHz Connect a Type N to BNC adapter followed by a 6 dB attenuator to the tracking generator output Connect a 50 Q BNC cable to the other end of the attenuator Connect a second Type N to BNC adapter and 6 dB attenuator to the spectrum analyzer input and connect the other end of this attenuator to a second 50 Q BNC cable Connect the two cables together with a 50 Q BNC female female adapter Adjust the analyzer Reference Level control until the displayed signal is entirely on screen over the frequency range 1 MHz to 500 MHz Using the analyzer Display memory store the swept display Activate the active display minus stored display mode sometimes called B minus Save A A straight line display with less than 0 2 dB ripple should appear typically at mid screen This is the frequency response with the flatness errors of the tracking generator attenuators spectrum analyzer and cables normalized out Disconnect the two 50 Q cables at the BNC female female adapter Keep the female female adapter connected to the cable going to the analyzer input VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First Read This First 8 Disconnect the MIU CH4 coaxial cable from the VM5000 All of the MIU LEDs including Power will extinguish but the MIU is still receiving power to conduct this test Connect the MIU CH4 coaxial cable to the cable coming from the analyzer input using the BNC
307. ssified as Monitoring and Control equipment and is outside the scope of the 2002 95 EC RoHS Directive This product is known to contain lead cadmium mercury and hexavalent chromium VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual xvii C Getting Started SEE y Product Description Key Features This manual supports the VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set This chapter summarizes and highlights some of the key features of the instrument Following this description are three sections m Installation shows you how to configure and install the instrument as well as how to reinstall the system software included with the product Incoming Inspection procedure verifies basic operation and functionality m Accessories lists the standard and optional accessories for this product The VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set is a high performance oscilloscope based automated video measurement system Key features include m Fast accurate and repeatable video measurements m Comprehensive component analog signal analysis Support for SD HDTV and RGBHV component analog video formats using options Automated testing of PC and DTV consumer video devices m Automated VESA compliance testing for PC graphics devices m Picture Vector and Waveform Displays m Integrated Pass Fail limit testing m Companion Test Signal Package m GPIB Remote Control and LAN Connectivity m Complete Oscilloscope Functionality Targeted to me
308. stem Tools folder in the Accessories folder Use these steps to back up your files 1 Quit the instrument application by selecting the File menu Exit command 2 Click the Windows Start button 3 Select Programs gt Accessories gt System Tools gt Backup 4 Use the Backup Wizard to select the items you want to back up and the destination The destination can be the floppy drive or a third party storage device over one of the side panel ports VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 1 9 Installation Installing Software Software Release Notes VM5000 Remote Command Information The instrument system and application software is preinstalled at the factory If you have to reinstall the software for any reason refer to the instructions that accompany the CD ROMs that are shipped with the instrument Read the software release notes README TXT on the product software CD ROM before performing installation procedures This file contains additional information that supercedes other product documentation To view README TXT start the Windows Notepad accessory and open the file from the VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Product Software CD ROM The GPIB programmer information is available in the VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Programmer Manual PDF located on the VM5000 product software CD ROM Programmer information for the rest of the instrument functions is available as a PDF file on the TDS5000
309. surement Measurements on Multi Lines tab Ch Ch Mismatch Ch Ch Skew Color Bars H Sync Start Line End Line Start Line End Line Start Line End Line Start Line End Line Sets the start line number for the Ch Ch Mismatch measurement Note the start line number should be less than or equal to the end line number Sets the end line number for the Ch Ch Mismatch measurement Note the end line number should be greater than or equal to the start line number Sets the start line number for the Ch Ch Skew measurement Note the start line number should be less than or equal to the end line number Sets the end line number for the Ch Ch Skew measurement Note the end line number should be greater than or equal to the start line number Sets the start line number for the Color Bars measurement Note the start line number should be less than or equal to the end line number Sets the end line number for the Color Bars measurement Note the end line number should be greater than or equal to the start line number Sets the start line number for the H Sync measurement Note the start line number should be less than or equal to the end line number Sets the end line number for the H Sync measurement Note the end line number should be greater than or equal to the start line number VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Menu Descriptions Command Function Setting or field Description
310. surements If no measurements have been taken is displayed in all the boxes in the summary table Once measurements have been taken the contents vary depending on whether limit testing was enabled and whether warnings were generated Tables 3 4 and 3 5 describe the indicators that can appear in the Results Summary Table 3 4 Status Box Indicators in Results Summary pane Status box Description gt No measurements taken Done Measurement completed Fail Measurement completed with Limit testing enabled and Failed Pass Measurement completed with Limit testing enabled and Passed Stopped Measurement halted before completion Table 3 5 Warning Box Indicators in Results Summary pane Warning box Description gray No warnings no measurements taken white Measurements completed with no warnings Yes Measurements completed with warnings VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Displaying Channel Delay Measurement Results Option SD HD Measured Values Relative Values Reference Values Limit Values Configure the Channel Delay measurements as explained in Setting Up the Channel Delay Measurement on page 3 68 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Channel Delay Refer to Figure 3 20 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Channel Delay Measured Relative Reference Limits Unit ns Line Number
311. t Cont cna Equation 1 Lower White limit value DC700 DC0 X 0 985 2 mV Equation 2 Upper White limit value DC700 DC0 X 1 015 2 mV 14 Calculate the instrument white bar measurement as follows a Copy the AWVG7 Blanking to White level values from Table B 2 row 3 for each channel in row 1 of Table B 3 b For each channel calculate the Lower VM5000 white limit using equation 1 and enter the values in row 2 Table B 3 c For each channel calculate the Upper VM5000 white limit using equation 2 and enter the values in row 3 Table B 3 15 Check that the VM5000 white measurement row 4 falls between the Lower Line 2 and Upper Line 3 limit values for all three channels Table B 4 is an example of typical measurements and the calculation results Table B 4 Example white bar measurement values CH1 Y G CH2 B Pb AWVG7 Blanking to White level 700 05 mV 700 00 mV DC700 DC0 from Table B 2 Lower white limit value equation 1 687 55 mV 687 50 mV Upper white limit value equation 2 712 55 mV 712 50 mV White measurement 696 55 mV 700 25 mV Equation 1 Lower White limit value DC700 DC0 X 0 985 2 mV Equation 2 Upper White limit value DC700 DC0 X 1 015 2 mV CH3 R Pr 701 04 mV 688 52 mV 713 56 mV 695 01 mV The calculated VM5000 white measurements in row 4 are between the LOWER and UPPER limit values rows 2 and 3 so the measurements are within specific
312. t 60 Hz refresh rate Select OK for the new setting to take effect 4 Disconnect the monitor cable from the Test PC VGA output jack In its place connect the 3 foot VGA to 5 BNC cable between the PC and H and V inputs of the MIU Connect the H and V BNCs to the MIU H and V inputs The gray BNC is H and the black BNC is V If the distance from the test PC to the MIU is greater than 3 feet these cables may be extended 5 Connect three 75 Q terminators to G B and R inputs of the MIU as shown in Figure B 8 VGA to 5 BNC 152 H V G B R MIU terminators we T VM5000 Figure B 8 Setup to determine the noise floor measurement accuracy 6 In the VM5000 VGA Video application select Configuration gt Measure ments Press Clear All button then select Noise Inj Ratio 7 Select Results gt Noise Inj Ratio Set the number of result averages to 10 and ensure that the 500 MHz filter is enabled 8 Take the Noise Injection Ratio measurement by clicking the run button 9 Write down the mV results for G B and R channels in Table B 11 Ignore the dB and Noise Injection Ratio reading 10 Verify that the measured value for each channel is less than 22 mV VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 25 Appendix B Performance Verification 11 Disconnect the 3 foot VGA to BNC cable from the Test PC VGA output and reconnect the monitor cable Table B 11 Noise Floo
313. t Set User Manual 3 109 Viewing Measurement Results 3 110 Relative Values Reference Values Limit Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab To create a custom reference file see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 If Limit testing is enabled see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for each signal format and color space Select the min option to display the minimum Non Linearity values Select the max option to display the maximum Non Linearity values Refer to Figure 3 34 File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results NonLinearity Unit Line Number min 380 9 max Maximum Average 1 Figure 3 34 Displaying limit values for the NonLinearity measurement VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Displaying Short Time Distortion Measurement Results Option SD HD Measured Values Relative Values Reference Values Limit Values Configure the Short Time Distortion measurements as explained in Setting Up the Short Time Distortion Measurement on pag
314. t Shop Pro If you set up the DUT to drive a second display you can set the background of the second display to the bitmap file rather than opening the file 2 Ifthe VM5000 Option VGA application is not already running start it now from the Tekscope menu bar select File gt Run Application gt VM5000 VGA Video 3 In the VM5000 application select the default setup from the VM5000 menu bar select File gt Recall Default Setup 4 Set the Test PC display properties to 1024x768 with a 60 Hz refresh rate a Right click on the desktop the window that appears is labeled Display Properties b Select the Settings tab in the Display Properties window c Under Screen Area choose 1024x768 pixels Click on the Advanced button choose the Monitor tab and select 60 Hz refresh rate Select OK for the new setting to take effect 5 Place the Test Signals CD into the Test PC View the directory contents and locate the 1024x768 matrix bit map signal MAT1024x768 bmp Double click to open the file with the MS Paint program The matrix test signal should appear on the Test PC monitor screen 6 Make the signal full screen by selecting View gt View Bitmap from the MS Paint menu bar Move the mouse pointer to the upper left screen edge 7 Disconnect the monitor cable from the Test PC VGA output jack In its place connect the 3 foot VGA to 5 BNC cable Connect the 5 BNCs to the five MIU input BNCs The gray BNC is H and the black
315. t applicable State type typical Minimum true time before 1 ns clock edge 1 ns Minimum true time after clock edge 1 ns Setup Hold type typical Minimum clock pulse width Minimum clock pulse width from active edge to inactive from inactive edge to active edge edge 3 ns hold time setting 2ns Setup and Hold parameters Limits Setup time time from data 100 ns minimum transition to clock edge 100 ns maximum Hold time time from clock 1 ns minimum edge to data transition 102 ns maximum Setup time Hold time 2 ns minimum algebraic sum of the two 202 ns maximum settings Advanced trigger timer ranges Limits Glitch type 1Tnsto1s Runt or window type wider 1 ns to 1s than Runt or window type time 1nstois qualified Width type 1Tnstois Timeout type 1instois Transition type 1nstois Pattern type 1instois Setup Hold type Setup and Hold timers Limits VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual A 9 Appendix A Specifications Table A 3 Trigger specifications Cont Characteristic Description Setup time time from data 100 ns to 100 ns transition to clock edge Hold time time from clock 1 ns to 100 ns edge to data transition Setup time Hold time 2 ns to 200 ns algebraic sum of the two settings Advanced trigger timer accuracy For Glitch Timeout or Width types Time range Accuracy 1 ns to 500 ns 20 of setting 0 5 ns 520 ns to 1 s 0 01
316. t contain Matrix test pattern signal source files in a number of video formats See page 2 16 for information on the Matrix test pattern The Signal Sources package can contain one or two kits One kit contains four CDs This kit is a standard accessory for Option HD instruments The second kit contains two DVDs The second kit is a standard accessory with both Options HD and SD Table E 1 lists the Signal Source discs Table E 1 Signal Sources discs Tektronix part Included with Title number Option Baseband Test Signals Version 2 0 063 3794 XX HD ATSC Transport Streams Version 2 0 063 3806 XX HD Standard Definition TV Elementary Streams 063 381 9 XX HD Version 2 0 Advanced TV Elementary Streams Version 2 0 063 3820 XX HD 480 Line DVD Version 2 0 063 3664 XX SD HD 576 Line DVD Version 2 0 063 3665 XX SD HD Table E 2 provides an overview of the test signal formats that can be generated using files located on the Signal Sources discs The table also lists which TG700 modules are required to generate test signals with the TG700 using the DNL files supplied with the Signal Sources discs VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual E 1 Appendix E Signal Sources Package Contents Table E 2 Test Signal Files File and Signal Formats TG700 DNL Bitmap pner over over ATSC Trans Compressed MPEG Test Signal Format File AVG7 AWVG7 DVG7 HDVG7 Stream Elementary Stream DVD 480p 59 94 x x Oo K T
317. t file for each signal Option SD HD format and color space or Option VGA resolution refresh rate and timing standard The limits file is in Comma Separated Value CSV format The limit values for all measurements are in one file The reference file contains the following details m Format Option SD HD Color Space type or Option VGA Refresh Rate m Name of the measurement with maximum and minimum acceptable values 3 66 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements The easiest way to edit a limits file is to use a spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel or OpenOffice org See Figure 3 15 Because the files are in plain ASCII format you can also edit the files with a text editor If you do edit files with a text editor be certain to maintain the CSV format El Microsoft Excel DefeultLim 1000p24 RGD csy Read Only E i5 xj Gl Eile Edt Yew imet Format Toos Data Windkw Hep Mobboa AdobePDF pe a queson fer hop Ee GX leona ear s Bm sl o ERR T Ca o O E E z T i tudnad ARAY woes End XV 7H LA 68 c oc vi x cM ay T2 Format 1080 p 24 bess 13 Color Space RGB 14 Ref Low High 15 Channel Delay 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 Color Bars 21 G Levelimy 22 Whio ssp 23 Yullow l 735 24 Cyan mA 735 25 Green fez 735 26 Magenta 5 5 27 Red 5 5 28 Blue 5 6 29 Black 5 5 SO B Level m 31 White 555 735 32 Yellow 5 5 33 Cyan
318. t is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 69 Setting Up Measurements 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the Color Bars measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the Frequency Response Measurement Option SD HD 3 70 To set up the Frequency Response measurements select Results gt Frequency Response to display the result panel The results pane for the measurement shows the settings that can be changed for the measurement For frequency response you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged You can set the measurement location to either Frequency or Time specify a value and set the filt
319. t values by clicking the Limits tab see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for the supported combination of resolution refresh rate and timing standard Select the min option to display the minimum limit values Select the max option to display the maximum limit values Refer to Figure 3 40 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Measured Relative Reference Limits a a Results Ch Ch Mismatch min Line Humber O ma mv Peak Peak GtoB az 0 6 0 r 358 Ao GtaR 42 0 6 0 tR 42 0 6 0 ee Average 1 riae Figure 3 40 Limit values for the Ch Ch Mismatch measurement VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Displaying Ch Ch Skew Measurement Results Option VGA Measured Values Relative Values Reference Values Limit Values Configure the Ch Ch Skew measurement as explained in Setting Up the Ch Ch Skew Measurement on page 3 85 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Ch Ch Skew Refer to Figure 3 41 eS File Configuration Results Utilities Help Measured Relative Reference Limits A Line Humber ns ck 614 E 4 32 Results Ch Ch Skew Average 1 Figure 3 41 Ch Ch Skew measurement results Click the Measured tab to display the measured values in ns and Pixel Clock If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you c
320. tch between G to B G to R and B to R channels of the video signal values in mV and in Peak Peak Results are reported on the Measured tab and if enabled on the Relative Reference and Limits tabs VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Menu Descriptions Command Function Setting or field Description Ch Ch Skew Ch Ch Skew is the phase relationship time delay among R G and B video outputs of the graphics subsystem Ch Ch Skew Line Number Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value Measurement depends on the input signal format as set by Setup Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Average Sets the number of acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value Ch Ch Skew Displays the Ch Ch Skew for G to B G to R and B to R Results channels values in ns and in Pixel Clock Results are reported on the Measured tab and if enabled on the Relative Reference and Limits tabs Color Bars Color Bars measurement measures the GBR color bars of a VGA card in a PC The Color Bars measurement measures the amplitude level relative to back porch of each of the eight colors that is white yellow cyan green magenta red blue and black for each active channel Color Bars Line Number Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value Measurement depends on the input signal
321. te an average measurement value Results mV Displays eight color values in mV for each channel 24 measurements total Frequency Measures the amplitude at selected time or frequency location of the input signal Response Frequency Line Number Sets the input signal line number to measure The default value Response Setup depends on the input signal format as set by Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Average 1 Sets the number of measurements acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value Dist BW MHz Sets the distortion bandwidth frequency Meas Location Freq 4 4 4 When Meas Location is set to Freq 4 4 4 the measurement uses the same frequency for the measurement location on all three signals CH1 Y G CH2 Pb B and CH3 Pr R This setting is the best option for RGB GBR signals When Meas Location is set to Freq 4 2 2 the measurement uses the full frequency for CH1 and half that frequency for CH2 and CH3 This setting is the best option for YPbPr signals Time When the Meas location is set to Time the measurement reports the waveform frequency at that specified time Freq MHz Sets the measurement location frequency Time us Sets the measurement location time Frequency Displays the Flag Amplitude mV Frequency MHz Amplitude Response dB with reference to the Flag Time Position us and RMS Results
322. ted The default signal is the multiburst signal used for multiburst measurement but many other types of signals can be used including sweeps and even some live program material If the cross cor relation is high enough for at least one pair of channels the measurement results will display Otherwise running the measurement will result in for each channel If warnings are enabled low correlation between channels will result in associated warnings A positive number indicates that the first signal arrives later than the second signal For example Y to Pb delay of 4 03 ns means that the signal in the Y channel is delayed 4 03 ns relative to Pb However the signals may contain distortions which create different delays for different portions of the video line In such a case the measurement result is the delay compensation required to maximize the cross correlation of the second channel with the first generally giving a weighted average of the various delays For narrow band signals the delays at a particular frequency band may be measured An ensemble of such measurements may be collected to develop a portrait of group delay If the signals of the three channels are highly mutually correlated which is the case if the signals are reconstructed well and free of distortions other than delay the loop delay will be approximately zero Delay1 Delay2 Delay3 0 where Delayl is Y to Pb or G to B Delay2 is Y to ProrGtoR De
323. ter 0 350 Volts in Offset box 87 From the TekScope application menu bar click the App software button 88 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement 89 Record the results in Table B 30 90 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Resolution should read 8 bit VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 43 Appendix B Performance Verification Table B 30 10 bit Linearity R Channel Level 1 of 4 Resolution Bits Ce E A wow ooo o Monotonic Y N 91 From the TekScope application menu bar select Vertical gt Offset gt Select Ch3 gt enter 0 175 Volts in Offset box 92 From the TekScope application menu bar click the App software button 93 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement 94 Record the results in Table B 31 95 Check that the results are within the upper and lower limits Resolution should read 8 bit Table B 31 10 bit Linearity R Channel Level 2 of 4 Linearity Lower limit Rs Upper limit Resolution Bits vanes a E C dS Monotonic Y N 96 From the TekScope application menu bar select Vertical gt Offset gt Select Ch3 gt enter 0 Volts in Offset box 97 From the TekScope application menu bar click the App software button 98 From the VM5000 application menu bar click the Run button to take the linearity measurement
324. th Microsoft Paint and display the test pattern in full screen mode for a single monitor setup or set as Wallpaper Centered for a dual monitor setup m The MatrixSignals folder that contains a set of test pattern sub directories that contain images and takes one or more measurements Select the pattern depending on the measurement selected Once the pattern sub directory is opened you can see a list of files in BMP format Select the file depending on the video format set You can open the file with Microsoft Paint and display the test pattern in full screen mode for a single monitor setup or set as Wallpaper Centered for a dual monitor setup VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Index Index Numbers 3 wire composite sync setup 2 3 2 5 4 wire with separate sync setup 2 6 75 Ohm termination CH4 2 6 A Access the Windows desktop 2 22 Accessories 1 23 connecting peripherals 1 7 optional 1 27 probes 1 3 1 4 recommended 1 27 standard 1 24 Adjusting display contrast 1 12 Algorithm descriptions See Measurements detailed information All Button 2 52 All button 3 25 Ambient temperature A 1 App button 2 22 Application display default 2 21 Application software version number 3 26 Application view area 2 22 Applications Microsoft 1 11 Auto Scale buttons 3 7 3 12 options 2 30 Average 3 27 3 39 Averages interactions with results 3 16 3 20 interactions with Run Mode 3 16 3 20
325. that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Sets the number of measurements acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value Disables turns off all noise signal filtering Use this setting to measure broadband noise without any filtering Enables turns on unified weighting noise signal filtering Use this setting to measure noise with the psychovisual weighting established by CCIR Recommendation Rec 576 2 adjusted for the selected video format Enables turns on unweighted noise signal filtering and activates the filter bandwidth field Use this setting to remove high frequency noise from your signal Sets the bandwidth filter cutoff frequency Selecting Unweighted activates this field The default value depends on the input signal format as set by Configuration gt Format Sets the Cursor frequency Sets the channel for the Noise Spectrum measurement Displays Noise spectrum The Noise measurement must be selected and running continuously to display a noise spectrum If the Noise measurement is not running this button is not selectable Displays the noise measurement results for each channel in dB relative to peak white and mV VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Menu Descriptions Menu item Non Linearity Short Time Distortion Sync Function Setting or Field Description Measures channel signal linearity based on a ram
326. the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt Noise Inj Ratio Refer to Figure 3 55 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Noise Inj Ratio Measured Relative Reference Br Line Humber G B 537 E Inj Ratio Average e e 4 Se ie EI ie Figure 3 55 Noise Inj Ratio measurement results with MIU Click the Measured tab to display the measured values in mV dB and Inj Ratio When the MIU is used the measured values of Noise in mV less than 1 mV are displayed as lt 1 When the MIU is not used the measured values of Noise in mV less than 0 1 mV are displayed as lt 1 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 125 Viewing Measurement Results Relative Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 Reference Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62 Limit Values If Limit testing is enabled you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for the supported combination of resolution refresh rate and timing standard Select the min option to displa
327. the reference file the measurement will run without producing valid relative results A reference file can still be loaded after a measurement completes to produce relative results for the latest measured values Selecting Enable Limit Testing enables Pass Fail testing Check the Stop on Limit Testing Error option to cause the software to stop testing when a measured value falls outside the defined limits Select Default to automatically load the Tektronix limit file VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Menu Descriptions Menu Item Function Setting or field Description Select Manual to enable user defined select limit File Select Limits File Click Select Limit File to open the file chooser to browse and select file Without selecting the limit file the measurement will run producing valid relative results during continuous mode A limit file can still be loaded after a measurement completes to produce valid results for the latest measured values NOTE The Default Reference file or Default Limit file is provided AS IS without warranty of any kind and is intended to be used as a template only WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE EXPLICITLY DISCLAIMED Menu Item Function Setting or field Description Picture amp Vector Select the display type to either Picture Vector or Noise spectrum The Picture and Vector displays will stop measurements when they are d
328. the top f Using the bottom right most soft key select DIRECT entry mode symbol is 1 0 with up down arrows g Using the keypad enter 1 1 volts and press ENTER ENTER is large oval shaped key with an arrow on it just to the right of the keypad 3 If you are using the Keithley 2000 multimeter set it to AUTO range Otherwise select the 1 V scale 4 Select the 9500B OUTPUT ON button and ensure that the corresponding red LED glows The multimeter should read approximately 700 mV 5 Adjust the 9500B output amplitude until the multimeter reads as close as possible to 700 mV Use the lt and gt keys to select the digit and the a and v keys to adjust Your final reading on the multimeter should be between 699 9 mV and 700 1 mV 6 Enter both the multimeter reading to the nearest 0 1 mV and the 9500B amplitude setting in Table B 7 row DC700 7 On the 9500B select ground mode by pressing the bottom soft key below the ground symbol The multimeter should read approximately 0 V 8 If you are using the Keithley 2000 multimeter leave it in AUTO range Otherwise select the 100 mV scale VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 19 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Appendix B Performance Verification 9 Enter the multimeter reading in Table B 7 row DCO Record the voltage to the
329. tic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 35 Option SD HD Detailed Measurement Information Interpreting Results How Results are Calculated 3 36 on transmitted signals will therefore evaluate only those components in approximately the 200 ns to 1 us range The affected signal components range in duration from 0 100 us to 1 us Short time distortions are most often characterized by measuring Kor The rise and fall times are calculated on the bar using the 10 and 90 points The result is displayed in ns The overshoot is calculated as the highest excursion of the signal on the positive edge relative to the Vmax steady state The undershoot is calculated as the lowest excursion of the signal on the negative edge relative to Vmin steady state These two results are displayed in using the steady state value as a reference The Settling time on the rising edge is measured from the end of the overshoot to the point where the amplitude of the video ringing is down to 5 of the final steady state value The Settling time on the falling edge is measured from the end of the undershoot to the point where the amplitude of the video ringing is down to 5 of the final steady state value The K2T measurement is an indicator of the quality of the video signal as perceived by a human viewer K2T is an estimate of the degradation of subjective quality due to linear distortions of the video signal Linear distortions include any linear combination
330. ting Failure option to cause the Failure software to stop testing when a measured value falls outside the defined limits VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 13 Menu Descriptions Command Function Limits Selection Setting or field Default Manual Select Limits File Select Reference File Description Select Default to automatically load the Tektronix limits file Select Manual to enable user defined select limits File Click Select Limits File to open the file chooser to browse and select file Without selecting the limit file the measurement will run producing valid relative results during continuous mode A limit file can still be loaded after a measurement completes to produce valid results for the latest measured values Click Select Reference File to open the file chooser to browse and select the file Without selecting the reference file the measurement will run without producing valid relative results A reference file can still be loaded after a measurement completes to produce relative results for the latest measured values NOTE The Default Reference file or Default Limit file is provided AS IS without warranty of any kind and is intended to be used as a template only WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICU LAR PURPOSE ARE EXPLICITLY DISCLAIMED Multi Lines Sets runs and writes the result report to a file across a range of lines for each of the selected mea
331. tion Sync Pickoff Compensation for Option The Matrix Test Signal Starting the Application SD HD oA TEASA The VM5000 Application User Interface 0 2 eee eee eee eee Measurement Steps Overview Setting the Input Signal Format Selecting the Measurements Setting the Measurement Run Operations 0 2 00 ee eee eee Setting the Measurement Warnings Setting Reference and Limits Options VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual xiii xiii xiv XV xvii PRP RP RRR mm RP RRR fl io meei I BWW BWW NOrFP OOO ADINIAMNWM ULUR pe PRR f 1 m jm dae N NN ee rot BRWONPWNDTAWN WR SSeS ee eae ce Cd WWNNNNNNPR KR Table of Contents Displaying the Input Signal asa Picture 0 0 eee eee eee eee 2 36 Changing Picture Display Settings 2 0 cee eee eee eee 2 37 Displaying the Input Signal in a Vectorscope Window for Option SD HD 2 39 Taking and Viewing the Measurement Results 000 2 41 Taking Measurements Across Multiple Lines 0 000 2 44 Changing Line Number or Averaging on the Results Screen 2 45 Saving Measurement Setups 0 0 eee eee eee 2 47 Recalling Measurement Settings 0 00 cece eee eee eee eee 2 49 Saving Measurement Results Reports 0 0 eee cece eee eee 2 51 Reference Reference Overview ai san ceued sada id
332. tion VGA To set up the Noise Inj Ratio measurement select Results gt Noise Inj Ratio to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that you can change for the measurement For Noise Inj Ratio you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change the settings for the Noise Inj Ratio measurement 1 On the menu bar click Results gt Noise Inj Ratio 2 To change the line number click the Line Number box Line Humber Ef eoo There are three ways to change the line number m Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 93 Setting Up Measurements 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average 7 There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perfor
333. tion tests are desired Table B 16 Video rise fall time R Channel R Channel parameters Measured result Upper limit Video Rise Time ns 0 360 Po 0 540 Video Fall Time ns 0 360 I Jo This test verifies the accuracy of the vertical resolution monotonicity integral and differential linearity of the test system Required equipment AWG710B Arbitrary Waveform Generator 50 Q SMA cables 3 SMA to BNC adapters 3 50 75 Q min loss pad 1 6 dB Attenuators 2 Tek part number 011 0069 03 The AWG710B and VM5000 including MIU must warm up for at least 20 minutes before doing this test Prerequisites VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual B 33 Appendix B Performance Verification B 34 Linearity Measurement The steps for checking the Linearity measurement are as follows 1 10 Make connections as shown in Figure B 11 on page B 31 a Connect the AWG710B CH1 to the G input of the MIU through the 50 Q to 75 Q min loss pad b Connect the MRK 1 output of the AWG710B to the H input of the MIU c Connect the MRK 1 output of the AWG710B to the V input of the MIU If the VM5000 Option VGA application is not already running launch by selecting File gt Run Application gt VM5000 VGA Video From the VM5000 application menu bar select File gt Recall Default Setup From the VM5000 application menu bar select Configuration gt Format to display the Format panel Select 2048 x 1536
334. tions or refresh rates that are in common industry use in lower performance systems CVT The Coordinated Video Timing standard is a method for generating a consistent and coordinated set of standard format formats display refresh rates and timing specifications for computer display products both those employing CRTs and those using other display technologies CVT addresses problems found in GTF CVT R The Coordinated Video Timing Reduced Blanking standard is designed for use with non CRT displays that can accept reduced horizontal blanking times GTF The Generalized Timing Formula standard is a method for generating general purpose display timings and new formats This allows much greater flexibility in the choice of refresh rates and pixel formats than currently available with discrete monitor timings GTF enables new formats and refresh rates to be developed but is based on some set parameters to improve the likelihood of interchange VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics If a timing standard or refresh rate is not available for the selected resolution then the timing standard or refresh rate is grayed out Select the resolution refresh rate and the timing standard for the signal you are measuring If a resolution is selected and the currently selected refresh rate is not available in the selected resolution the refresh rate will automatically change to the default value of 60 Hz A message infor
335. to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 89 Setting Up Measurements Average EEE There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the H Timing measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the Linearity Measurement 3 90 Option VGA To set up the Linearity measurement you must display the Results gt Linearity pane The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that you can change for the measurement For Linearity you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change the settings for the Linearity measurement 1 On the menu bar click Results gt Linearity 2 To ch
336. to disable warnings Measure ment warnings include general information about potential problems in taking the measurement Signal warnings appear if signals either change or are absent If there are some invalid results Results Warnings lets you know that some of the displayed results may not be valid Results Warnings also shows you the types of test results that are included in the report you have just generated If warnings are selected message boxes may appear on screen requiring you to click OK To avoid interruptions to your testing clear all the Warning reporting VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Menu Descriptions Command Function Setting or field Description Control Options Pop Up Warning Details Control Options determines whether warnings are displayed or Log Warnings to File logged to a file When any one of the Warning Types Reported is selected Control Options is enabled If Log Warnings to File is checked the warnings are written to a file named Log txt Warnings are appended to the Log txt file until it reaches 1 MB in size At that point it is renamed LogOld txt and a new Log txt file is created If the new file reaches 1 MB in size it will be renamed LogOld txt and be written over the existing LogOld txt file If you wish to save the data in the LogOld txt file you must save the file under a different name before it is overwritten If Pop Up Warning Details is selected then a message
337. to the MIU G input the analyzer measures 58 0 dBm at 100 MHz and 51 3 dBm at 250 MHz The MIU G channel 100 MHz return loss is 23 4 58 0 34 6 dB The 250 MHz return loss is 24 5 51 3 26 8 dB NOTE The most exact way to measure these signal level differences is to align the 0 dB return loss signal display test port open to a specific location on the graticule using the Reference Level control Note the Reference Level reading Then connect the test port to the MIU and adjust the Reference Level control until the new signal display is aligned with the same point on the graticule The difference between the two Reference Level readings is the Return Loss This method avoids any linearity errors in the analyzer s log display system 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 for the Blue and Red inputs VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set Option VGA Read This First Read This First Optional Checks to Verify Return Loss measurements can be severely degraded by bridge calibration errors Return Loss Bridge bridge port mismatch and small impedance errors at the test port The following Performance checks can help verify that the measurement system is working properly These checks require a Reference 75 Q Load The 75 Q BNC female female adapter and the Precision 75 Q BNC male male adapter may also be needed 11 12 13 14 Connect the bridge as described in step 4 If any adapters or cables are normally used b
338. true 22 5 V into open circuit lt 0 7 V with lt 4 mA sink 1 0 V into 50 Q load lt 0 25 V into 50 Q load Auxiliary Output pulse width typical Pulse width varies 1 us minimum VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual A 11 Appendix A Specifications Table A 5 Input output port specifications Cont Characteristic External Reference Input Side panel I O ports Parallel port IEEE 1284 Audio ports USB port 2 Keyboard port Mouse port LAN port Serial port COM1 SVGA video port GPIB port Scope VGA video port Video Input Description Rear panel BNC connector 9 8 MHz to 10 2 MHz 200 mVp p to 7 Vp p lt 1 5 kQ in series with 10 nF DC blocking capacitor Ports located on the side panel DB 25 connector supports the following modes Standard output only Bidirectional PS 2 compatible Bidirectional Enhanced Parallel Port IEEE 1284 standard mode 1 or mode 2 v 1 7 Bidirectional High speed Extended Capabilities Port Miniature phone jacks for stereo microphone input and stereo line output Allows connection or disconnection of USB keyboard and or mouse while oscilloscope power is on Supports USB 2 0 protocol PS 2 compatible oscilloscope power must be off to make connection PS 2 compatible oscilloscope power must be off to make connection RJ 45 connector supports 10 base T and 100 base T DB 9 connector uses NS16C550 compatible UARTS transfer speeds up to 11
339. trument setup files Figure E 2 shows a typical test signal setup using the MTX100 instrument as the signal source MPEG transport Y Transport Stream files on CD MTX100 seam Modulator VM5000 Figure E 2 Using ATSC transport stream signals E 4 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix E Signal Sources Package Contents Advanced TV Elementary Streams CD Standard Definition TV Elementary Streams CD The Advanced TV Elementary Streams disc Tektronix part number 063 3820 XX and the Standard Definition TV Elementary Streams disc Tektronix part number 063 3819 XX contain MPEG2 compressed elementary stream files You use these files with a transport stream multiplexor to build advanced TV or standard definition TV transport streams Tables E 6 and E 8 list the elementary stream formats Each disc also contains bitmap images in BMP format that you can display on a PC to see what a good signal should look like when displayed on a TV monitor Tables E 7 and E 9 list the bitmap files The RGB bmp files with the XT suffix have been been processed with an anti alias filter applied to the Pb and Pr portion for 4 2 2 or 4 0 0 representation such as in the mpg and trp files Use the XT files for any compression for example MPEG2 which requires subsampling of the color difference signals Table E 6 Advanced TV Elementary Streams Image format Field rate File Ratio 720p 50 M720p50 mpg 16 9 59 94 M720p59 mpg 16 9 1080
340. uded 75 Q terminations between the end of the BNC cables and the instrument input channels 1 through 3 using the included BNC T connectors See Figure 2 13 To achieve accurate measurements it is important to attach the T connectors directly to the input channel BNCs Direct connection to VM5000 input channel BNC 75 Q Precision VGA to 5X Cable end line termination 011 0102 03 Mec Sef TT BNC T connector 103 0030 00 Figure 2 13 Connecting the VGA to 5X cable to the input channel 2 Ifyou will be making H Sync V Sync or V Timing measurements you will need to make 2 21 kQ and 301 Q terminations using the BNC to Binding Post adapters and resistors supplied as standard accessories 2 10 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Operating Basics Attach each resistor to an adapter See Figure 2 14 Figure 2 14 Building the 2 21 kQ and 301 Q terminations 3 Connect the PC video output signals to the VM5000 See Figure 2 15 Connect the H Sync signal using the 2 21 k adapter to begin with The VM5000 will prompt you to change it to the 301 Q adapter if necessary VM5000 PC VGAOut gt D connector Figure 2 15 Connecting the PC video output signals to the VM5000 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 11 Operating Basics A pop up warning appears to prompt you to change signal termination on CH4 when making a H Sync me
341. ue 0 0 mV 8 mV 8 0 mV Upper Black limit value 0 0 mV 8 mV 8 0 mV Lower White to Black limit 700 1 mV x 0 0 mV x 0 982 3 mV 684 5 mV value Upper White to Black limit 700 1 mV x 0 0 mV x 1 018 8 mV 715 7 mV value In this example all three channels meet their White Black and White to Black specifications This test verifies the noise floor of the three VM5000 channels CH1 G CH2 B CH3 R and digitizers Noise floor affects the linearity of the noise measurement between 56 dB and 32 dB A standard PC VGA to 5 BNC cable 75 Q precision BNC terminations 3 Required equipment Prerequisites The VM5000 including MIU must warm up for at least 20 minutes before doing this test 1 Ifthe VM5000 Option VGA application is not already running start it now from the Tekscope menu bar select File gt Run Application gt VM5000 VGA Video 2 In the VM5000 application select the default setup from the VM5000 menu bar select File gt Recall Default Setup VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Appendix B Performance Verification 3 Set the Test PC VGA output to 1024x768 60 Hz refresh frequency a Right click on the desktop The window that appears is labeled Display Properties b Select the Settings tab in the Display Properties window c Under Screen Area choose 1024x768 pixels Click the Advanced button choose the Monitor tab and selec
342. ults panel it indicates that the incoming signal does not change its polarity during the rise fall period The Scope trace is triggered by the leading edge of the V Sync pulse Sync levels are measured with reference to oscilloscope ground and reported at two different conditions m When V Sync is terminated by a 2 21 k resistor m When V Sync is connected to a current source of 8 mA 8 mA is connected when the voltage level is high 8 mA when the voltage level is low Vertical Sync amplitude is determined by averaging the points that lie between 30 and 90 of the pulse width Sync pulse width is determined by detecting the edges of the sync signal The position difference between the two edges is shown as the result Rise time is the time taken for the signal to rise from 10 to 90 of the steady state level Overshoot Undershoot settling time is the time taken for the signal to reach 5 of its steady state value V Sync frequency is derived from pulse time value VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information V Timing Measurement Signal Source Interpreting Results How Results are Calculated V Timing consists of the measurements the vertical sync pulse the back porch the addressable lines the front porch top border and bottom border Back porch is the portion of the video signal that lies between the trailing edge of the vertical sync pulse and the start of the
343. umber click the Line Number box Line Number bos There are three ways to change the line number Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 87 Setting Up Measurements m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value 3 Click the Average box to change the number of times the measurement is averaged Average a There are three ways to change the average Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number of averages When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to enter the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the number entry box Use the pop up keypad to enter a setting for the number of averages to perform m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the H Sync measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the H Sync Jitter Measurement 3 88 Option VGA To set up the H Sync Jitter measurement select Results gt H Sync Jitter to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that you can change for the measurement For H Sync Jitter you can choose the number of lines on which the meas
344. ured Relative Reference Limits G B Unit my Line Humber 245 Average 1 Figure 3 43 Color Bars measurement results Click the Measured tab to display the measured amplitude levels for each of the eight colors for the Color Bars measurement If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Reference Values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 64 Limit Values If Limit testing is enabled you can display the Limit values by clicking the Limits tab see Taking Measurements with Limit Testing on page 3 64 The minimum and maximum values are set in the limits file for the supported combination of resolution refresh rate and timing standard Select the min option to display the minimum limit values Select the max option to display the maximum limit values Refer to Figure 3 44 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Color Bars Measured Relative Reference Limits G B Unit mY R 770 0 Line Number min 424 Q max 770 0 70 0 70 0 Stopped Average 770 0 ColorBars Yes J 0 0 770 0 770 0 70 0 Figure 3 44 Limit values for the
345. urement Information sync signal is within the captured data window for valid measurements For example if a manual setup is performed all eight bars are required on the waveform display The Color Bars relative to reference values are calculated as follows mV Result measured value reference value measured value reference value Result fe x 100 reference value H Sync Measurement Horizontal Sync is the pulse occurring from 2 4 V to 5 5 V at the beginning of each line This pulse causes the electronic beam of a CRT to go back to the left side of the display and trace another horizontal line of picture information This measurement characterizes the rise time fall time overshoot undershoot and settling time shown in the Figure 3 1 Amplitude A Vmax T steady state Vmin steady state Figure 3 1 Signal definitions H Sync VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 43 Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information 3 44 Signal Source Interpreting Results where a Vmin steady state amplitude before transition b Rise Time c Overshoot d Settling time e Fall time f Settling time g Undershoot This measurement also characterizes monotonicity and steady state voltage amplitude at logic levels 1 and 0 When the MIU is present a current source inside the MIU automatically presents the required load So no manual interven tion is requi
346. urement is made To change the settings for the H Sync Jitter measurement 1 On the menu bar click Results gt H Sync Jitter 2 To change the number of lines click the No of Lines box Ho of Lines g oo There are three ways to change the number of lines VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Setting Up Measurements Turn the top knob on the front panel to change the number When it is set to the correct number click outside the box to save the change m Click the keypad button to the left of the Line Number box to open the virtual keyboard Use the pop up keypad to enter the new value for the line number m Using the keyboard to directly input the desired value The next time the H Sync Jitter measurement is run it will run with the newly entered numbers Setting Up the H Timing Measurement Option VGA To set up the H Timing measurement select Results gt H Timing to display the result panel The results panel for the measurement shows the settings that you can change for the measurement For H Timing you can choose the line on which the measurement is made and the number of times the measurement is averaged To change the settings for the H Timing measurement 1 On the menu bar click Results gt H Timing 2 To change the line number click the Line Number box Line Humber There are three ways to change the line number Turn the top knob on the front panel
347. urement value Displays the Back Porch us Left Border us Addressable Video us Right Border us Front Porch us on the G B and R channels and Sync Pulse Width us Pixel Clock MHz Results are reported on the Measured tab and if enabled on the Relative Reference and Limits tabs Linearity is a measure of how well the device under test performs analog to digital and digital to analog conversions Linearity consists of the Resolution Integral linearity Differential linearity and Monotonic measurements Linearity Measurement Setup Linearity Results Line Number Average Sets the video signal line number to measure The default value depends on the input signal format as set by Configuration gt Format and assumes that the appropriate Matrix image file is being used to generate the test signal Sets the number of acquisitions over which to calculate an average measurement value Displays the Resolution Bits Max INL LSB Step No Max DNL LSB Step No Monotonic Y N and Step No on the G B and R channels Results are reported on the Measured tab and if enabled on the Relative Reference and Limits tabs VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Menu Descriptions Command Function Setting or field Description Luma Levels Luma corresponds to the sensitivity of human vision to each of the RGB primaries standardized for video The Luma Levels measurement reports
348. urements All Creates a report with all the measurements that you have run since starting the application Selected Creates a report with only the measurements that are currently selected in the Configuration gt Measurements screen Generation Generate Report Writes the specified measurement data in the selected report format to the specified location VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 25 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Menu Descriptions Help Menu Function Setting or field Description Opens the VM5000 online help window that provides you with application information on your instrument screen Command Help Topics About VM5000 Displays a VM5000 dialog that contains the application software version number 3 26 VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual S Option SD HD Detailed Measurement Information For a high level procedure on how to take a measurement refer to page 2 23 For a high level overview of all the measurements refer to the table beginning on page 3 16 The following information applies to all the measurements Matrix Signals and Line Numbers Averaging The matrix signals that are included with the Signal Source Set refer to page E 1 provide appropriate signals for all the measurements Refer to the Readme txt files on the Signal Source Set for extensive informati
349. xial cables to connect the video device under test to the VM5000 instrument Install the included 75 Q terminations between the end of the coaxial cables and the instrument input channels using the included BNC T connectors See Figure 2 1 For accurate frequency response measurements it is important to attach the T connector directly to the VM5000 input channel BNCs Direct connection to VM5000 input channel BNC 75 Q precision 75 Q coaxial end line termination cable G D 011 0102 03 A BNC T connector 103 0030 00 Figure 2 1 Connecting the T connector to the VM5000 The preferred method of connecting the video device under test to the VM5000 instrument is to use the RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit The Measurement Interface Unit contains an impedance matching circuit to ensure the most accurate measurement results For some measurements a low frequency path is used and for other measurements a wideband path is used VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 2 1 Operating Basics 2 2 The VMS5000 selects which path is used through an RS 232 connection to the Measurement Interface Unit See Figure 2 2 Figure 2 2 RGBHV Measurement Interface Unit You can also connect the video device under test to the VM5000 by using the supplied VGA Connector to 5X cable See Figure 2 3 If you use this method you will n
350. y installed 2 000 000 points 3 or 4 channels 4 000 000 points 2 channels 8 000 000 points 1 channel 4 000 000 points 3 or 4 channels 8 000 000 points 2 channels 16 000 000 points 1 channel Number acquired channels Sample rate range 1 25 S s to 5 GS s A 5 Appendix A Specifications Table A 2 Horizontal and acquisition system specifications Cont Characteristic Equivalent time sample rate or interpolated waveform rate range Seconds division range Horizontal delay range Long term sample rate and delay time accuracy RMS aperture uncertainty typical Delta time measurement accuracy Description 2 5 GS s to 250 GS s Listed values depend on the number of channels in use horizontal scale and resolution settings Equivalent time acquisition can be enabled or disabled When disabled waveforms are interpolated at the fastest time base settings s div x 10 to 1 000 s 16 ns to 250s 15 ppm over any 1 ms interval lt 3 ps 0 1 ppm x record duration for real time or interpolated records with a duration 1 minute For a single channel with signal amplitude gt 5 div reference level set at 50 interpolation set to sin x x volts division set to 5 mV div with displayed risetime sample interval ratio between 1 4 and 4 where sample interval 1 real time sample rate Single shot signal Sample 15 ppm x reading or Hi Res acquisition mode 0 3 sample intervals
351. y state value VMS5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual 3 53 Option VGA Detailed Measurement Information 3 54 Signal Source Interpreting Results How Results are Calculated Monotonicity is the property whether or not the video signal is continuously rising or falling without any inflection points Monotonicity of the signal is decided by determining the progression of the successive gray levels When measuring transients the MIU is set to use the Sync wide bandwidth path When measuring amplitude levels the MIU is set to use the Sync low bandwidth path For V Sync Period the scope horizontal scale is adjusted to be able to see at least two V sync pulses and the duration between the leading edges of the two sync pulses is measured The test signal used for the V Sync measurement can be any of the available patterns in the Matrix signal which is located on the Test Signal Files CD ROM Vertical Sync polarity is detected by looking at the signal level after skipping a nominal pulse width duration It is considered to be positive if the signal level is less than one volt If not the polarity is negative V Sync edge and corner characteristics are determined by detecting the edge of the V sync signal A numerically smaller rise fall time value indicates a higher quality signal The overshoot and undershoot amplitude and settling time should be zero under ideal conditions When V Sync monotonicity is Yes in the res
352. y the minimum limit values Select the max option to display the maximum limit values Refer to Figure 3 56 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Noise Inj Ratio r s Measured Relative Reference Limits rr min Line Humber e max G 3 537 i 5 2 25 Inj Ratio Average e al Iv ea EI wae Figure 3 56 Limit values for the Noise Inj Ratio measurement 3 126 VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual Viewing Measurement Results Displaying V Sync Measurement Results Option VGA Measured Values Relative Values Reference Values Limit Values Configure the V Sync measurements as explained in Setting Up the V Sync Measurement on page 3 94 Take the measurement by clicking the Run button Click Results gt V Sync Refer to Figure 3 57 amp File Configuration Results Utilities Help Results Sync a Measured Relative Reference Limits Line Humber Pala g amp Average 4 Logic Leve Logis Figure 3 57 V Sync measurement results Click the Measured tab to display the measured values If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the calculated relative values by clicking the Relative tab see Taking Measurements Relative to a Reference on page 3 60 If Relative to Reference testing is enabled you can display the reference values by clicking the Reference tab see Creating a Custom Reference File on page 3 62

VM5000 Automatic Video Measurement Set User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents